LIBRARY     ^ 


OF 

CALIFORNIA 
.          SAN  DIE&O 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE 
OF  LIBRARIES 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE 
OF  LIBRARIES 


A  MANUAL  FOR  COLLEGE  AND  UNIVERSITY 
STUDENTS 


BY 
MARGARET  HUTCHINS,  A.B.,  B.L.S. 

Reference  Librarian  and  Lecturer  in  the  Library  School,  University  of  Illinois 

ALICE  SARAH  JOHNSON,  A.B.,  B.L.S. 

Reference  Librarian  and  Lecturer  in  the  Library  School,  University  of  Illinois 

MARGARET  STUART  WILLIAMS,  A.B.,  B.L.S. 

Instructor  in  the  New  York  State  Library  School 


Second   Edition 


NEW  YORK 

THE  H.  W.  WILSON  COMPANY 

LONDON:  GRAFTON  &  CO. 

1922 


Z-*U\ 


Copyright,    1920,    by  the  authors. 
Copyright,   1922,  by  The  H.  W.  Wilson  Company. 

Published  September,    1922. 


Printed  in  the  United   States  of  America. 


PREFACE 

The  need  of  a  textbook  for  college  courses  in  the  use 
of  libraries  and  books  where  weekly  problems  are  as- 
signed to  be  worked  out  by  the  students  has  been  keenly 
felt  by  instructors  giving  these  courses.  This  manual 
is  intended  to  serve  as  a  textbook  and  basis  for  prob- 
lems in  such  a  course  planned  for  undergraduate  students. 
It  is  in  no  sense  a  handbook  for  the  trained  librarian  or 
scholar.  It  contains  chapters  on  general  library  prac- 
tices helpful  to  the  user  of  any  library,  suggestions  as  to 
the  use  of  books,  and  annotated  lists  of  the  basic  refer- 
ence works  in  general  and  special  fields.  Its  use  leaves 
free  for  recitation  and  discussion  the  part  of  the  class 
period  otherwise  consumed  in  detailed  note-taking,  and 
places  the  subject  matter  of  the  course  before  the  student 
in  a  convenient  and  trustworthy  form. 

The  book  in  its  present  form  constitutes  a  second 
edition  of  "Guide  to  the  use  of  libraries;  a  manual  for 
students  in  the  University  of  Illinois"  (1920).  Two 
printings  of  the  first  edition  have  been  exhausted  and 
the  use  of  the  book  in  other  colleges  makes  desirable  an 
edition  omitting  all  references  to  special  practices  in  the 
University  of  Illinois  library.  This  edition  is  a  com- 
plete revision  of  the  first,  adding  some  new  material,  sub- 
stituting material  of  general  for  that  of  local  interest, 
and  bringing  the  lists  of  reference  books  up  to  date  by 
the  addition  of  important  new  titles  and  the  revision, 
where  necessary,  of  notes  on  those  previously  included. 
These  lists  will  continue  to  need  revision  if  the  manual 
is  to  be  of  greatest  usefulness  as  a  text.  The  authors 
and  publisher  plan,  therefore,  to  issue  new  editions  from 
time  to  time. 


This  manual  in  its  first  edition  was  a  direct  develop- 
ment from  outlines  and  lecture  notes  used  in  a  general 
reference  course  for  freshmen  and  sophomores  at  the 
University  of  Illinois.  The  course  was  started  in  the 
fall  of  1898  by  the  late  Katharine  L.  Sharp,  formerly  Li- 
brarian and  Director  of  the  Library  School,  and  has  been 
continued  by  successive  members  of  the  Reference  De- 
partment of  the  Library  assisted  by  members  of  the 
faculty  of  the  Library  School.  It  is  a  two  hour  elective 
course  running  through  one  semester,  accepted  for  credit 
in  the  undergraduate  colleges  of  the  university.  Its  pur- 
pose, primarily,  is  to  give  to  the  students  early  in  their 
college  career  some  knowledge  of  the  resources  of  the 
library  and  a  familiarity  with  reference  books  which  will 
help  them  in  the  preparation  of  assignments  in  other 
studies.  Its  worth,  however,  extends  beyond  the  college 
years  of  the  student  as  the  facts  taught  are  applicable  to 
other  libraries  and  the  evaluating  and  arranging  of  ref- 
erence sources  may  be  used  in  many  lines  of  work. 

In  teaching  the  subject,  recitations  may  be  conducted 
by  the  question-and-answer,  topical  and  lecture  method, 
but  the  most  important  feature  of  the  course  is  the  lab- 
oratory work  in  the  form  of  problems  which  necessitate 
the  use  of  the  library  records  and  the  books  described 
in  this  manual.  These  problems  should  be  assigned  each 
week  and  on  being  handed  in  should  be  corrected  and 
returned  to  the  students  for  discussion  at  a  following 
class  period.  Appendix  II  is  a  sample  problem  based  on 
Chapter  XX,  Literature. 

The  chapters  are  not  planned  to  represent  separate 
lessons  but  may  be  divided  or  grouped  as  seems  best  to 
the  instructor.  In  colleges  where  there  are  several  sec- 
tions, it  is  well  to  arrange  the  assignments  so  that  the 
various  sections  will  not  be  working  with  the  same  group 


PREFACE 

of  books  at  the  same  time.  As  the  chapters  listing  ref- 
erence books  are  separate  units  in  themselves,  no  difficulty 
will  be  experienced  in  making  such  an  arrangement. 

It  is  not  expected  that  the  instructor  will  require 
every  student  to  become  acquainted  with  all  the  titles  in- 
cluded in  this  manual.  Allowance  has  been  made  for 
variations  in  library  collections  and  for  personal  prefer- 
ences. In  some  subjects  such  as  engineering,  agriculture, 
commerce,  home  economics,  etc.,  more  titles  have  been 
listed  than  the  student  not  specializing  in  the  field  would 
need  to  consider.  Here  it  is  possible  to  arrange  the  as- 
signments so  that  the  students  who  are  interested  in  a 
special  subject  make  a  careful  study  of  all  the  books  listed 
in  the  field  and  the  other  students  consider  only  the  titles 
of  outstanding  importance. 

The  compilers  are  glad  to  acknowledge  their  indebted- 
ness to  Mr.  Phineas  L.  Windsor  for  advice  and  encour- 
agement in  the  planning  of  this  work,  to  Mr.  James  I. 
Wyer  for  suggestions  and  criticism,  and  to  Miss  Frances 
Simpson,  Miss  Emma  Felsenthal,  Miss  Sabra  Vought, 
Miss  Fanny  Dunlap,  and  others  for  their  contributions 
to  the  development  of  the  course  as  given  at  the  Univer- 
sity of  Illinois.  From  the  following  books  especially, 
helpful  suggestions  have  been  received :  Kroeger,  "Guide 
to  the  study  and  use  of  reference  books" ;  Fay  and  Eaton, 
"Instruction  in  the  use  of  books  and  libraries" ;  Lowe, 
"Books  and  libraries" ;  Ward,  "Practical  use  of  books  and 
libraries" ;  and  Rice,  "Lessons  on  the  use  of  books  and 
libraries." 

M.H. 

A.S.J. 

M.  S.  W. 
July  1922. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


CHAPTER 


SECTION 


PREFACE 

INTRODUCTION    1 

I    THE  COLLEGE  OR  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY.     2-8 
II     CLASSIFICATION    9-18 

III  CALL   NUMBERS   AND   THE   ARRANGE- 

MENT OF  BOOKS  ON  THE  SHELVES.  .     19-24 

IV  SHELF  LIST 25 

V     CARD  CATALOG:  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES.  26-37 
VI     CARD  CATALOG  (Continued)  :  DETAILS.   38-55 
VII     CARD  CATALOG  (Continued)  :  PUBLICA- 
TIONS OF  GOVERNMENTS,  SOCIETIES 

AND  INSTITUTIONS  56-61 

VIII     ARRANGEMENT     OF     CARDS     IN     THE 

CATALOG   62-76 

IX     PARTS  OF  A  BOOK  77-87 

X     REFERENCE  BOOKS 88-91 

XI     MAGAZINES  AND  MAGAZINE  INDEXES.  .  92-107 
XII     ENCYCLOPEDIAS,  ANNUAL  CYCLOPEDIAS 

AND  ALMANACS 108-1 18 

XIII  DICTIONARIES  OF  THE  ENGLISH  LAN- 

GUAGE     119-134 

XIV  BIOGRAPHY 135-142 

XV    GEOGRAPHY  143-158 

XVI  HISTORY 159-184 

XVII  SOCIOLOGY   185-213 

XVIII  RELIGION  '.,... 214-221 

XIX  LITERATURE " 222-243 

XX  LITERATURE  (Continued)  244-267 


CONTENTS 

XXI  FINE  ARTS   268-275 

XXII  SCIENCE 276-291 

XXIII  AGRICULTURE    292-307 

XXIV  HOME  ECONOMICS  308-324 

XXV  ENGINEERING 325-336 

XXVI     COMMERCE  AND  GENERAL  BUSINESS.  .337-359 

XXVII     EDUCATION    360-369 

XXVIII     UNITED  STATES  PUBLIC  DOCUMENTS.  .370-381 

XXIX     BIBLIOGRAPHY 382-399 

APPENDIX     I :  QUESTIONS  FOR  ORAL  ' 

REVIEW 

APPENDIX  II :  SAMPLE  PROBLEM 
INDEX 


".  .  .  The  study  of  Bibliography  and  of  the  scientific  meth- 
ods of  using  books  should  have  an  assured  place  in  the  Uni- 
versity Curriculum  .  .  .  and  all  who  go  forth  into  the  world 
as  graduates  should  have  such  an  intelligent  and  practical  knowl- 
edge of  books  as  will  aid  them  in  their  studies  through  life.  .  . 

"I  do  not  mean  that  the  university  student  should  learn  the 
contents  of  the  most  useful  books;  but  I  do  mean  that  he 
should  know  of  their  existence,  what  they  treat  of,  and  what  they 
will  do  for  him.  He  should  know  what  are  the  most  important 
general  reference  books.  .  .  He  should  be  familiar  with  the 
best  method  by  which  the  original  investigation  of  any  topic 
may  be  carried  on.  .  .  No  person  has  any  claim  to  be  a  scholar 
until  he  can  conduct  such  an  original  investigation  with  ease 
and  pleasure."  W.  F.  Poole.  The  university  library  and  the  uni- 
versity curriculum. 

"Let  me  say  as  a  public  lecturer  in  one  of  our  universities, 
that  in  my  opinion  a  guided  access  to  the  shelves  of  a  great 
library  is  of  far  greater  worth  than  attendance  at  lectures  can 
possibly  be.  Lectures  may  stimulate ;  private  talk,  in  my  ex- 
perience, stimulates  better.  Both  have  their  uses.  But  the  true 
key  to  understanding  is  the  key  of  a  library."  Sir  Arthur 
Quiller-Couch  in  the  London  Times  literary  supplement,  May 
II,  1922. 


INTRODUCTION 

1.  Libraries:  their  function  and  use. — Libraries 
were  once  regarded  simply  as  places  in  which  to  keep 
books,  storehouses  for  knowledge  where  stress  was  laid 
on  preserving  rather  than  on  using  records.  During  the 
last  few  decades,  however,  the  trend  has  been  in  the 
direction  of  making  the  library  an  active  agency  in  the 
community.  Progressive  public  libraries  assist  in  meet- 
ing civic  needs,  educational  and  social  as  well  as  recre- 
ational. So-called  "special"  libraries  maintained  by  large 
business,  manufacturing  and  engineering  firms  meet  a 
definite  demand  by  furnishing  information  relating  to  the 
firm's  particular  interests. 

The  college  library  has  a  somewhat  different,  though 
very  real  service  to  perform.  Here,  in  addition  to  sup- 
plying reading  and  study  room  facilities,  the  primary 
purpose  is  to  make  possible  the  investigation  of  any  sub- 
ject connected  with  the  college  curriculum.  The  library 
becomes  the  common  laboratory  of  students  and  teachers 
alike  irrespective  of  their  special  interest,  be  it  engineer- 
ing, agriculture,  commerce,  science  or  the  liberal  arts. 

Now  in  order  to  make  the  best  use  of  any  laboratory 
it  is  necessary  to  know  something  of  the  subject  to  which 
it  relates  and  of  the  technic  of  using  its  equipment.  A 
physics  laboratory  of  only  passing  interest  to  a  casual 
observer  has  infinitely  more  meaning  to  a  person  who 
has  been  instructed  in  its  use.  Likewise,  the  library — a 
laboratory  composed  of  books  and  of  records  relating 
to  books — may  interest  those  not  informed  regarding  its 


1  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

make-up  but  an  adequate  use  of  its  facilities  can  only  be 
made  by  one  who  knows  something  of  its  organization 
and  resources.  This  knowledge  might  come  in  time 
through  a  continued  use  of  the  library  and  the  gradual 
discovery  of  its  records  but  meanwhile  many  short-cuts 
would  have  been  missed  and  some  valuable  material  en- 
tirely overlooked. 

For  this  reason,  a  systematic  study  of  the  library,  its 
arrangement,  important  records,  and  resources  brings 
abundant  returns.  By  knowing  where  to  go  for  special 
assistance  and  by  having  a  definite  idea  as  to  what  mate- 
rial is  available  and  where,  the  worker  obtains  the  de- 
sired information  more  quickly  and  with  greater  assur- 
ance, accuracy  and  satisfaction. 

The  usefulness  of  a  course  dealing  with  the  college 
library,  however,  should  not  be  regarded  as  ending  with 
college  days.  Library  practices  in  America  are  now 
fairly  well  standardized.  The  same  departments  render- 
ing practically  the  same  services  are  found  in  almost  all 
general  libraries.  The  systems  followed  in  arranging  and 
cataloging  the  books  are  fairly  uniform.  All  except  the 
smallest  libraries  or  libraries  limited  to  some  special  field 
have  most  of  the  reference  material  noted  in  this  book. 
The  principles  herein  given  for  recording  references  are 
those  in  general  use,  and  methods  of  bibliographical  re- 
search in  one  library  are  similar  to  those  in  any  other. 
Thus  it  will  be  seen  that  although  the  course  may  seem 
to  deal  with  one  college  library  only,  most  of  what  is 
learned  is  equally  applicable  to  other  libraries,  and  that 
familiarity  with  the  methods  of  work  in  one  library 
makes  for  a  more  efficient  and  intelligent  use  of  all  li- 
braries. 


CHAPTER    I 
THE  COLLEGE  OR  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 

"Among  all  the  institutes  or  departments  of  a  university, 
none  is  of  more  fundamental  necessity  than  the  university  li- 
brary. No  scientific  work  can  be  done  nowadays  of  any  real 
value,  and  aside  from  those  extraordinary  cases  of  genius  which 
occur  now  and  then  in  human  history  and  which  seem  to  be 
independent  of  all  conditions  and  exceptions  to  all  rules,  with- 
out the  aid  of  an  adequate  library."  Edmund  J.  James.  Sixteen 
years  at  the  University  of  Illinois. 

2.  Partly  because  the  college  library  was  the  first 
type  to  develop  in  this  country  and  so  had  more  tradi- 
tions to  live  down  than  its  younger  sister,  the  public  li- 
brary ;  partly  because  of  the  nature  of  its  collections  which 
were  largely  of  a  serious  and  learned  tone — theology, 
Greek  and  Latin  classics  and  standard  authors  that  had 
little  attraction  for  the  undergraduate — ;  partly  because 
of  the  manner  of  administrating  the  library;  and  partly 
because  of  the  textbook  methods  of  teaching  in  vogue, 
the  museum  atmosphere  hung  around  the  university  li- 
brary in  this  country  longer  than  around  other  types  of 
libraries  and  is  only  recently  being  dissipated. 

In  the  early  college  library  no  attempt  was  made  to 
get  books  into  the  hands  of  students ;  rather  the  reverse 
was  sought.  No  thought  was  taken  of  the  present  day 
very  common  use  of  the  college  library  for  required 
readings ;  no  attempt  was  made  to  supply  general  cul- 
tural reading.  Stories  and  practices  of  these  early  days 
seem  almost  unbelievable  viewed  in  the  light  of  later 


2  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

developments.  At  Harvard  the  library  was  open  daily 
from  nine  until  one ;  at  Brown  university  one  hour  a 
day  five  days  of  the  week ;  at  Princeton  one  hour  twice 
a  week.  Yale  allowed  only  juniors  and  seniors  to  use  or 
draw  books  from  the  library.  Brown  had  this  rather  in- 
teresting rule,  that  students  should  come  to  the  library 
four  at  a  time  when  sent  for  by  the  librarian,  and  should 
not  enter  the  library  beyond  the  librarian's  table  on  pen- 
alty of  threepence  for  every  offense.  As  illustrating  the 
storehouse  idea  of  a  library  there  might  well  be  cited  the 
remark  credited  to  one  of  the  early  librarians  at  Harvard 
that  there  was  only  one  book  at  the  time  out  of  the  li- 
brary and  he  was  on  his  way  to  Professor  Agassiz's 
house  to  get  that  and  bring  it  back. 

The  present  day  university  library  with  its  stream  of 
users  pouring  in  and  out  every  hour  of  the  day,  with  its 
special  facilities  for  the  use  of  the  faculty  and  graduate 
students  doing  research  work,  and  with  its  extensive 
cooperation  with  other  libraries  throughout  the  country 
presents  a  decided  contrast  to  the  earlier  libraries  of  the 
same  type.  It  has  now  become  an  active  workshop  open 
to  all,  the  very  center  of  the  intellectual  life  of  the  in- 
stitution where  students  and  faculty  from  every  depart- 
ment find  opportunity  for  study,  research  and  recrea- 
tional reading. 

The  collection  of  books  in  a  university  library  will 
always  depend  on  the  work  of  the  institution  of  which 
it  is  a  part.  It  would  be  foolish  to  expect  to  find  large 
collections  of  books  on  medicine  and  music  in  a  university 
giving  no  courses  in  these  subjects.  If  the  work  in  agri- 
culture is  a  special  feature  of  the  institution,  the  library 
would  naturally  contain  a  large  collection  in  this  field. 


THE  COLLEGE  OR  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY  3 

• 

If  graduate  courses  are  given,  there  must  be  added  to  the 
more  popular  and  general  treatments  of  the  subject 
needed  by  undergraduates  the  special  treatises  of  a  more 
unusual  nature  and  less  general  appeal  needed  by  those 
engaged  in  research  in  that  field.  In  every  case  less  ma- 
terial of  a  purely  recreational  type  will  be  found  than  in 
a  public  library  of  equal  size,  and  more,  proportionally, 
of  an  informational  type.  The  college  library  may  be  ex- 
pected to  contain  a  live,  rich  collection  touching  on  all 
fields  but  especially  strong  in  those  in  which  the  college 
offers  special  training.  The  library  is,  as  it  were,  a  mir- 
ror reflecting  in  its  collection  and  service  the  interests  and 
aims  of  the  institution  which  it  serves — its  development 
being  influenced  by  that  of  the  college,  which  in  turn  is 
dependent  on  the  development  of  the  library. 

3.  The  organization  of  a  library. — To  use  a  library 
effectively  it  is  not  necessary  to  know  all  the  technical 
details  that  enter  into  its  administration,  but  a  general 
survey  of  a  library's  organization  with  regard  to  its  vari- 
ous departments  and  the  division  of  work  among  them 
will  make  for  a  better  understanding  of  those  departments 
and  records  with  which  the  user  of  the  library  is  brought 
constantly  into  contact.  Slight  variations  in  organization 
appear  in  different  libraries  but  the  following  depart- 
ments and  the  work  assigned  to  them  are  typical : 

Order  department.  The  order  department  attends  to 
the  procuring  of  books  and  periodicals.  Purchases  are 
made  through  this  department  and  the  material  on  arriv- 
ing at  the  library  is  received  here. 

Catalog  department.  From  the  order  department  books 
are  sent  to  the  catalog  department,  and  there  a 


5 


4  f     GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

classification  number  is  assigned,  cards  for  the  catalog 
are  made,  and  book-plates  and  labels  are  added. 

Binding  department.  The  binding  department  attends 
to  the  binding  of  periodical  publications  and  of  books 
which  are  purchased  unbound  or  which  need  rebinding. 

Loan  department.  The  work  of  the  loan  department 
is  to  deliver  to  the  reader  the  volumes  he  may  desire  and 
to  keep  a  record  of  all  loans.  The  supervision  of  the 
shelving  of  books  is  often  delegated  to  this  department, 
although  it  sometimes  ranks  as  a  separate  division  called 
the  shelf  department. 

Reference  department.  The  reference  department 
serves  as  the  interpreter  of  the  library  to  those  who 
wish  assistance  in  using  its  resources.  Its  work  is  (1) 
to  advise  readers  as  to  where  information  on  a  given  sub- 
ject may  be  found,  (2)  to  assist  them  in  their  use  of  the 
catalogs,  and  (3)  to  compile  reading  lists  and  bibliog- 
raphies. 

4.  Interlibrary  loans. — The  interlibrary  loan  work, 
though  not  a  separate  department  in  a  library's  organiza- 
tion, constitutes  a  service  so  important  to  students  making 
a  careful  study  of  a  subject  that  it  merits  special  atten- 
tion. It  is  a  term  applied  to  the  cooperation  existing  very 
generally  among  libraries  in  this  country  whereby  books 
needed  by  students  but  not  owned  by  the  library  in  which 
they  are  working  may  be  borrowed  from  the  library  own- 
ing them.  These  loans  usually  consist  of  very  expensive 
or  rare  works  which  every  library  cannot  own.  Photo- 
stat copies  of  pages  are  often  sent  when  the  volumes 
are  too  precious  or  too  much  needed  or  too  large  to  be 
conveniently  sent  from  one  library  to  another.  The  Li- 
brary of  Congress  in  Washington  is  especially  generous 


THE  COLLEGE  OR  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY          5-6 

in  its  loans  as  are  also  the  larger  reference  and  research 
libraries  throughout  the  country. 

5.  Departmental  libraries. — In  many  colleges  and 
universities   a   special  system   of   departmental   libraries 
has  developed.     These  bear  much  the  same  relation  to 
the  general  library  that  the  branches  of  a  city  system 
bear  to  the  main  city  library  with  this  important  difference 
that  here  each  collection  is  limited  to  a  special  subject. 
It  may  be  architecture,  engineering,  agriculture,  chemis- 
try, law,  history,  classical  literature,  commerce  or  any 
field  in  which  the  institution  offers  special  courses.    The 
collections  vary  in  size  from  a  few  hundred  to  many 
thousand  volumes.     The  books  are  usually  listed  in  the 
catalog  at  the  general  library  and  again  in  the  special 
catalogs  kept  in  the  departmental  library.     Students  spe- 
cializing  in  the   fields   the  collections   cover  find   these 
rooms  very  useful  in  study  or  research  since  they  bring 
together  in  one  place  those  books  most  often  needed. 

6.  Special    collections    in    the    reading    rooms. — 
Although  most  of  the  volumes  in  the  general  library  are 
shelved  in  special  rooms  filled  with  tiers  of  book-cases — 
called   "stacks" — ,there  are  usually  some  special  collec- 
tions shelved  in  the  reading  rooms. 

Reference  books:  Books  such  as  dictionaries,  ency- 
clopedias, indexes  and  atlases  which  are  often  consulted 
for  definite  bits  of  information  are  shelved  in  the  ref- 
erence room  arranged  by  subject. 

Periodicals:  Bound  volumes  of  the  most  frequently 
used  periodicals  in  the  library  and  current  numbers  of 
periodicals  of  general  interest  are  usually  available  in 
some  special  alcove  or  reading  room.  The  fact  that  a 
particular  periodical  is  not  found  in  such  a  collection, 


7  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

however,  should  not  be  taken  to  mean  that  the  periodical 
is  not  in  the  library.  It  may  be  shelved  in  the  stacks 
or  in  a  departmental  library. 

Books  for  reading:  If  a  person  wants  a  good  book 
for  reading  and  cannot  think  of  one,  the  "open-shelf" 
collection  of  books  interesting  for  general  reading  may 
be  found  suggestive.  The  name  and  contents  of  this  col- 
lection differ  in  different  libraries.  A  distinctive  name 
is  usually  given  such  as  Standard  Library,  Leisure  Hour 
Collection,  Gilt  Star  Collection,  Red  Star  Collection,  etc. 
The  collection  may  consist  of  the  works  of  standard  au- 
thors in  attractive  editions,  of  translations  of  the  works 
of  foreign  authors,  or  of  a  general  collection  of  interesting 
and  popular  volumes  in  various  fields — travel,  science, 
art,  biography,  drama,  and  so  on.  In  some  colleges  very 
attractive  "browsing"  rooms  for  recreational  reading  only 
have  been  equipped  with  beautiful  books  and  easy  chairs. 
The  Farnsworth  Room  at  Harvard  and  the  Brooks  Me- 
morial Room  at  Wellesley  are  examples  of  these. 

In  addition  to  these  fairly  permanent  collections,  there 
will  usually  be  found  somewhere  in  the  library  a  small 
collection  of  books  which  is  changed  from  week  to  week. 
This  contains  books  on  special  subjects  or  books  of 
timely  appeal  and  current  interest.  In  selecting  a  book 
for  home  reading  this  collection  will  often  be  helpful. 

7.  General  regulations  for  the  use  of  the  library. 
Library  rules  are  made  with  the  intention  of  giving  to  a 
large  number  of  people  the  best  opportunity  possible  to 
use  a  library  for  the  purpose  for  which  it  is  intended. 
As  a  university  library  is  to  be  used  primarily  for  study 
and  investigation,  it  must  have  regulations  in  order  to 

8 


THE  COLLEGE  OR  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY  7 

provide  quiet  surroundings  for  the  former  purpose  and 
quick  access  to  material  needed  for  the  second. 

Consider  a  library  in  which  no  rules  of  conduct  are 
observed.  You  come  to  study  in  it,  but  find  so  many 
people  talking  together  that  it  is  impossible  to  concen- 
trate your  attention  on  your  work.  You  hurry  in  to  look 
up  an  address,  but  some  one  has  taken  the  directory  out 
and  is  not  expected  to  return  it  until  next  week.  You 
have  to  read  a  chapter  in  a  book  for  a  class  assignment, 
but  some  fellow  student  has  removed  the  book  and  will 
probably  not  replace  it  until  after  the  class  has  met.  If 
you  want  to  make  use  of  some  statistics,  you  cannot  de- 
cipher the  figures  because  the  tables  in  the  Census  report 
are  so  covered  with  pen  marks ;  or,  having  found  with 
considerable  difficulty  a  reference  to  a  magazine  article 
on  some  subject  on  which  little  has  been  published,  you 
discover  when  you  open  to  the  place  where  the  article 
should  be,  that  some  inconsiderate  person  has  torn  out 
those  pages.  Naturally  you  would  grow  indignant  over 
your  experiences  in  a  library  like  that  and  would  won- 
der "why  they  allow  it." 

It  will  be  seen  then  that  the  library  regulations  are 
for  the  purpose  of  having  the  material  owned  by  the 
library  on  hand  when  it  is  most  needed  and  that  requests 
for  silence  and  the  careful  use  of  books  are  for  the  bene- 
fit of  the  students  rather  than  the  librarians.  Fines  are 
imposed  for  infringement  of  the  rules  not  because  they 
increase  the  revenues  of  the  university  but  simply  because 
no  other  plan  has  yet  been  devised  for  the  protection  of 
the  rights  of  the  many  against  the  few  who  do  not  vol- 
untarily work  together  for  the  common  good. 

Many  libraries  print  booklets  giving  their  regulations 


8  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

as  to  the  period  for  which  a  volume  can  ordinarily  be 
kept,  the  time  limit  for  "reserve"  books,  fines,  penalties 
for  the  mutilation  of  books,  etc.  Sometimes  these  regu- 
lations are  printed  in  the  college  catalog  or  are  posted 
in  a  conspicuous  place  in  the  library.  They  should  be 
read  and  carefully  noted  by  the  new  student. 

8.     How  to  obtain  library  books. 

Loan  Department:  If  the  student  knows  what  books 
he  wants  and  how  to  use  the  card  catalog  of  the  library, 
he  will  fill  out  for  each  book  a  call  slip  and  present  it 
at  the  Loan  Desk.  Unless  the  book  is  kept  in  a  depart- 
mental library  or  one  of  the  reading  rooms  or  unless  it 
is  charged  out  to  someone,  the  assistant  at  the  Loan  Desk 
will  bring  it  from  the  stacks.  The  student  will  then  sign 
a  slip  which  becomes  the  library's  receipt  from  him  for 
the  book.  In  the  case  of  "reserve"  books  (i.e.  books 
whose  circulation  is  restricted  usually  at  the  request  of 
an  instructor  who  wishes  to  have  them  available  for  col- 
lateral reading  in  class  assignments)  a  special  card  will 
be  signed.  Care  should  be  taken  to  find  out  what  regu- 
lations govern  the  circulation  of  these  reserve  books.  A 
usual  time  limit  for  other  books  is  two  weeks. 

Reference  department:  If  a  student  does  not  know 
how  to  find  the  book  he  wants  through  the  card  catalog, 
or  if  he  does  not  know  what  books  will  give  him  the  de- 
sired information,  he  should  ask  for  aid  at  the  Reference 
Desk. 


10 


CHAPTER    II 
CLASSIFICATION 

9.  Classification  defined. — To  assemble  a  number 
of  volumes  in  one  place  and  arrange  them  side  by  side 
on  the  shelves  is  not  sufficient  in  a  present  day  well 
organized  library.  There  must  be  some  grouping  of 
books  so  that  those  having  characteristics  in  common 
will  stand  together.  This  process  is  called  Classifica- 
tion. 

The  similarity  between  the  books  may  be  based  on 
artificial  characteristics  peculiar  to  the  particular 
copies  of  the  works  such  as  size,  date  of  publication 
or  of  purchase,  color  of  binding,  or  type  of  illustra- 
tion ;  or  it  may  be  based  on  a  more  intrinsic  and  nat- 
ural quality  such  as  the  subject  with  which  the  book 
deals.  In  the  arrangement  of  any  particular  collec- 
tion, however,  the  grouping  is  usually  determined  by 
the  use  to  which  the  collection  is  to  be  put.  An  ar- 
rangement suited  to  one  purpose  might  not  be  suited 
to  another.  A  printer  might  arrange  his  volumes  as  to 
style  of  type;  a  binder  as  to  their  bindings;  a  collector 
of  old  books  as  to  their  date  of  printing;  a  book  dealer 
alphabetically  as  to  their  publishers  or  authors.  In  a 
library  for  general  use,  however,  those  systems  of 
classification  have  been  found  most  satisfactory  which 
arrange  books  according  to  the  subjects  with  which 
they  deal.  This  would — in  so  far  as  possible — group 
all  of  the  algebras;  all  of  the  botanies  in  one  place. 
The  histories  of  England  would  be  together,  likewise 

11 


10  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

those  of  France,  and  those  dealing  with  general  Euro- 
pean history  would  be  not  far  distant. 

For  many  books,  the  grouping  is  naturally  with  one 
subject  and  one  subject  only,  but  for  many  others  it 
might  be  equally  well  with  any  one  of  several  sub- 
jects. In  such  cases  the  decision  as  to  the  proper  num- 
ber is  usually  based  on  a  consideration  of  which  ar- 
rangement is  best  suited  to  the  individual  library  and 
will  make  the  book  most  available.  A  book  on  the 
diseases  of  wheat  might  be  grouped  with  material  on 
crops  in  an  agricultural  library  and  with  books  on 
botany  in  a  scientific  library.  Likewise  a  book  on  elec- 
tricity might  be  grouped  with  engineering  in  one  li- 
brary and  with  physics  in  another.  Or  it  sometimes 
happens  that  in  separate  sections  of  the  same  book 
several  subjects,  such  as  heat,  light  and  electricity,  are 
treated.  Then,  since  the  book  can  stand  in  only  one 
place,  it  becomes  necessary  to  classify  it  with  only  one 
of  the  subjects  with  which  it  deals  or  with  a  more 
general  subject,  such  as  physics,  which  includes  them 
all.  From  these  examples  some  idea  may  be  gained 
of  the  problems  of  classification  and  the  lack  of  definite 
or  rigid  rules  to  govern  the  placing  of  any  particular 
book.  A  perfect  classification  has  not  yet  been  devised 
and  probably  never  will  be,  but  much  has  been  done 
to  make  books  and  other  printed  material  more  avail- 
able, and  it  must  be  remembered  that  a  classification 
suited  to  abstract  philosophical  ideas  is  not,  in  all  prob- 
ability, suited  to  subjects  as  they  are  treated  in  books. 

10.  Notation. — In  any  classification  to  be  applied 
to  books  it  is  desirable  to  have  a  system  of  symbols — 
a  shorthand  method,  in  fact — by  which  the  various 

12 


CLASSIFICATION  11-12 

subjects  may  be  briefly  expressed  and  naturally  grouped 
in  logical  order.  These  should  be  familiar  symbols 
having  some  definite  sequence — such  as  the  letters  of 
the  alphabet  or  the  Arabic  numerals;  they  should  be 
easily  spoken  and  written ;  and  as  few  as  possible 
should  be  needed  to  express  a  subject.  The  symbols 
used  in  a  classification  to  designate  the  subjects  con- 
stitute the  notation. 

11.  Systems  of  classification. — Many  systems  of 
classification  have  been  formulated,  but  there  are  three 
in  most  common  use  in  the  libraries  of  this  country 
today:    the    Expansive   classification,    the    Library   of 
Congress  classification,  and  the  Decimal  classification. 
These  differ  from  each  other  in  the  grouping  of  the 
various  subjects  and  in  the  notation  which  they  em- 
ploy. 

12.  The  Expansive,  or  Cutter  classification  as  it  is 
sometimes  called  from  the  name  of  its  author,  Charles 
A.  Cutter,  uses  the  twenty-six  letters  of  the  alphabet 
as  the  basis  of  its  notation,  and  has,  consequently,  a 
large   number   of   general   divisions,   or   subjects.      The 
main  divisions  of  this  classification  are  as  follows : 

A  General  works 

B  Philosophy 

C  Judaism  and  Christianity 

D  Ecclesiastical  history 

E  Biography 

F  History 

G  Geography  and  travels 

H  Social  sciences 

I  Demotics,  Sociology 

J  Civics,  Government,  Political  science 

13 


13  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

K  Legislation 

L  Sciences  and  arts 

M  Natural  history 

N  Botany 

O  Zoology 

P  Vertebrates 

Q  Medicine 

R  Technology 

S  Constructive  arts  (Engineering  and  building) 

T  Fabricative  arts    (Manufactures  and  handicrafts) 

U  Combative  and  preservative  arts 

V  Recreative  arts 

W  Art 

X  Philology 

Y  Literature 

Z  Book  arts 

13.  The  Library  of  Congress  system,  devised  to 
meet  the  special  needs  of  our  national  library  at  Wash- 
ington, has  been  adopted  by  other  libraries,  although  its 
use  is  much  less  general  than  that  of  the  other  classifica- 
tions mentioned.  It  uses  for  its  notation  the  letters  of 
the  alphabet  followed  by  Arabic  figures  or  in  some  cases, 
by  an  additional  capital  letter  and  figures.  The  main 
classes  of  this  scheme  are : 

'    A  General  works — Polygraphy 

B  Philosophy — Religion 

C  History — Auxiliary  sciences 

D  History  and  topography   (except  America) 
E  and  F    American  history 

G  Geography — Anthropology 

H  Social  sciences 

J  Political  science 

K  Law 

L  Education 
M    Music 

N  Fine  arts 

14 


CLASSIFICATION  14 

P  Language    and    literature 

Q  Science 

R  Medicine 

S  Agriculture — Plant  and  animal  industry 

T  Technology 

U  Military  science 

V  Naval  science 

Z  Bibliography  and  Library  science.1 

14.  The  Decimal  classification,  worked  out  by 
Melvil  Dewey,  is  the  system  most  often  used  in  the  pub- 
lic and  college  libraries  of  this  country.  It  is  also  found 
to  some  extent  in  the  libraries  of  foreign  countries  since 
its  notation,  the  Arabic  numerals,  is  adaptable  to  many 
languages.  It  was  first  developed  in  1873  and  has  been 
constantly  passing  through  new  editions  and  revisions. 
It  is  now  in  its  tenth  edition  and  fills  a  volume  of  nine 
hundred  and  thirty-six  pages.  It  is  published  also  in  two 
abridged  forms  for  the  use  of  small  libraries. 

According  to  this  scheme  of  classification  the  field  of 
knowledge  is  divided  into  nine  main  classes,  and  books 
are  arranged  under  these  nine  groups  numbered  1  to  9. 
A  tenth  class  marked  with  a  0  is  added  for  encyclopedias, 
periodicals  and  other  publications  so  general  in  character 
as  to  belong  to  no  one  group.  Each  class  is  divided  into 
nine  divisions  as  shown  in  the  accompanying  summary 
of  the  classification.2 


1  U.    S.    Library  of   Congress.     Classification;  outline  scheme   of  classes. 
Preliminary,   Dec.    1909. 

2  From    Dewey,    Melvil.     Decimal    classification    and    relative    index   for 
libraries,   clippings,   notes,   etc.     Ed.    10.     Lake   Placid   Club,    N.   Y.,    Forest 
press,    1919.    (New  ed.   in   press.) 


15 


14 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 


DECIMAL  CLASSIFICATION 

SUMMARY  OF  CLASSIFICATIONS  AND  DIVISIONS 


ooo     GENERAL  WORKS 
oio      Bibliography 
020      Library  economy 
030     General    cyclopedias 
040     General    collections 
050     General  periodicals 

500      NATURAL  SCIENCE 
510      Mathematics 
520      Astronomy 
530      Physics 
540      Chemistry 
550      Geology 

060      General   societies.     Museums 

560      Paleontology 

070      Newspapers 

570     Biology 

080      Special  libraries.  Polygraphy 

580      Botany 

090      Book   rarities 

590     Zoology 

100     PHILOSOPHY 

600      USEFUL  ARTS 

no     Metaphysics 

610      Medicine 

120      Special   metaphysical   topics 

620      Engineering 

130      Mind  and  body 

630      Agriculture 

140      Philosophic    systems 

640      Domestic,  economy 

150      Mental   faculties.  Psychology 

650      Communication.    Commerce 

1  60      Logic.      Dialectics 

660      Chemical  technology 

1  70      Ethics 

670      Manufactures 

180      Ancient  philosophers 

680     Mechanic  trades 

190      Modern    philosophers 

690      Building 

200      RELIGION 

700      FINE  ARTS 

210      Natural  theology 

710      Landscape    gardening 

220      Bible 

720      Architecture 

230      Doctrinal.      Dogmatics.      The- 

730     Sculpture 

ology 

740     Drawing.    Decoration.    Design 

240      Devotional.     Practical 

750      Painting 

250      Homiletic.  Pastoral.  Parochial 

760      Engraving 

260     Church.   Institutions.   Work 

770      Photography 

270      Religious   history 

780     Music 

280      Christian    churches    and    sects 

790     Amusements 

290      Ethnic.   (  Non-Christian 

300      SOCIOLOGY 

800     LITERATURE 

310      Statistics 

810      American 

320      Political    science 

820      English 

330      Political   economy 

830      German 

340      Law 

840      French 

350      Administration 

850      Italian 

360      Associations   and   institutions 

860      Spanish 

370      Education 

870      Latin 

380     Commerce.     Communication 

880      Greek 

390      Customs.   Costumes.   Folklore 

890      Minor   languages 

400      PHILOLOGY    • 

900      HISTORY 

410      Comparative 

910     Geography  and  travels 

420      English 

920      Biography 

430      German 

930      Ancient   history 

440      French 

940        /Europe 

450     Italian 

950    c     Asia 

460      Spanish 

960    £     Africa 

470     Latin 

970    "d  !    North  America 

480     Greek 

980    <2     South  America 

490      Minor    languages 

990           Oceanica  and  polar 

regions 

16 


CLASSIFICATION  14 

These  divisions  are  again  divided  into  nine  sections; 
as  in  940  History  of  (modern)  Europe,  and  780  Music. 

940  History  of  Europe  780  Music 

941  Scotland     Ireland  781  Theory 

942  England     Wales  782  Dramatic 

943  Germany    Austria  783  Sacred 

944  France  784  Vocal 

945  Italy  785  Orchestral 

946  Spain     Portugal  786  Piano  and  organ 

947  Russia  787  Stringed  instruments 

948  Norway  Sweden  Denmark  788  Wind  instruments 

949  Minor  countries  789  Percussion  and  mechanical 

If  further  division  of  a  subject  is  desired,  a  decimal 
point  is  used  and  beyond  this  the  subdivision  is  carried 
out  as  far  as  desirable.  788,  Wind  instruments,  has  the 
following  subdivisions. 

788  Wind  instruments 

788.1  Trumpet 

788.2  Trombone 

788.3  Cornet 

788.4  Horns  and  other  brass  wind  instruments 
.41  French  horn 

.42  Saxhorn 
.43  Saxophone 
etc. 

788.5  Flute     Waldflute     Piccolo     Fife     Flageolet 

788.6  Clarinet     Bass  clarinet     Bassethorn 

788.7  Oboe    D'amore    Da  caccia    Cor  anglais 

788.8  Bassoon     Double  bassoon     Bombardon 

788.9  Other  reed  wind  instruments :  bagpipe 

In  the  number  788.3,  7  indicates  the  class  Fine  arts ;  8, 
the  division  Music;. the  second  8,  the  section  Wind  in- 
struments; and  3,  the  subsection  Cornet.  All  the  books 
on  the  cornet  would  have  this  number  and  all  the  books 

17 


15-16  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

bearing  this  number  would  stand  together.  In  this  way 
all  of  the  material  on  the  cornet  would  be  found  in  one 
spot  immediately  preceded  by  material  on  the  trumpet 
(788.1)  and  trombone  (788.2)  and  followed  by  material 
on  horns  (788.4).  On  the  shelf  preceding  all  of  these 
would  stand  books  on  wind  instruments  in  general  bear- 
ing the  number  788. 

15.  Form  divisions. — The  classification  is  primar- 
ily a  classification  by  the  subject  matter  of  the  book  rather 
than  by  the  form  in  which  it  is  written,  but  it  has  seemed 
wise  to  provide  in  the  various  divisions  of  the  classifica- 
tion separate  numbers  for  periodicals,  dictionaries,  etc. 
which  deal  with  a  definite  subject;  for  example,  engineer- 
ing.    These  "form"   divisions   as  they  are  called  have 
practically  the  same  meaning  in  all  classes  and  are  as 
follows : 

1  Philosophies,  theories,  etc.    6  Societies,  associations,  transac- 

2  Compends,  outlines  •        tions,  reports,  etc. 

3  Dictionaries,  cyclopedias        7  Education,  study,  teaching,  etc. 

4  Essays,  lectures,  letters,  etc.  8  Polygraphy,  collections,  etc. 

5  Periodicals,  magazines,  etc.  9  History 

Thus,  620.3  is  a  dictionary  of  engineering  terms ;  620.5 
is  a  periodical  devoted  to  engineering;  620.6  is  a  publi- 
cation of  an  engineering  society.  If  the  number  for  a 
subject  does  not  end  in  a  0,  0  is  added  before  the  form 
division  is  given ;  that  is  to  say,  in  the  case  of  a  dictionary 
of  mining  engineering,  to  622  (Mining  engineering)  0  is 
added  before  the  form  division  3  giving  the  number 
622.03. 

16.  Geographic  divisions. — The  form  divisions  by 
their  extensive  use  and  practically  uniform  designation 

18 


CLASSIFICATION  17 

throughout  the  classification  afford  a  very  convenient  key 
to  the  meaning  of  a  great  many  numbers,  but  perhaps  an 
even  more  helpful  key  is  the  repeated  use  of  certain  num- 
bers to  indicate  certain  geographic  divisions.  These  num- 
bers are  taken  from  the  900s  History.  Thus,  in  the 
number  942,  9  indicates  History,  4  Europe  and  2  Eng- 
land. The  history  of  England  is  designated  by  the  addi- 
tion of  42  to  the  history  number  9,  and  it. will  be  found 
that  wherever  subjects  are  divided  geographically  (The 
note  in  the  classification  usually  reads  "divided  like  930- 
999"  or  "like  940-999".)  the  number  42  always  indicates 
England ;  for  example, 

942  History  of  England 

914.2  Travel  in  England 

912.42  Map  of  England 

920.042  Biography  of  Englishmen 

554.2  Geology  of  England 

379.42  Public  schools  in  England 

581.942  Botany  of  England 

352.042  Local  government  in  England 

614.0942  Public  health  in  England 

If  the  42  with  which  each  of  the  above  numbers  ends 
were  changed  to  73  the  United  States  would  be  desig- 
nated ;  43  would  indicate  Germany ;  44  France ;  81  Brazil, 
and  so  on.  A  list  of  the  numbers  to  which  these  geo- 
graphical divisions  may  be  added  is  given  in  Table  I  at 
the  back  of  the  Decimal  Classification. 

17.  The  use  of  B,  C,  or  F  instead  of  a  class  num- 
ber.— In  certain  divisions  of  the  classification  some 
libraries  substitute  capital  letters  for  the  class  numbers. 
Thus,  in  biography  a  capital  B  indicates  the  lives  of  in- 
dividuals and  these  biographies  are  arranged  alphabetic- 

19 


18  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

ally  by  the  surnames  of  the  persons  written  about.  Books 
having  the  designation  B  are  shelved  as  if  they  had  the 
number  920.  C  is  a  letter  sometimes  used  for  college 
publications  and  is  a  substitute  for  the  number  378.  The 
use  of  F  for  Fiction  is  very  common  in  public  libraries 
and  takes  the  place  of  the  regular  class  numbers  813, 
823,  etc. 

18.  The  "Relativ"  index.  A  very  important  fea- 
ture of  the  Decimal  Classification  is  the  "Relativ"  index 
found  immediately  following  the  tables.  This  index  as- 
sists both  in  assigning  numbers  to  books  and  in  finding 
books  to  which  numbers  have  already  been  assigned. 
Entries  are  made  under  all  the  terms  used  in  the  tables 
and  under  those  of  similar  or  synonymous  meaning.  If 
the  number  for  a  book  on  the  Stage  is  desired,  by  look- 
ing for  Stage  under  S  in  the  index,  the  number  792  is 
found.  The  same  number  would  have  been  found  by 
looking  under  Theater,  Opera,  Dramatic  art  or  amuse- 
ments, and  so  on.  If  it  seems  desirable  to  analyze  this 
number,  it  will  be  seen  by  turning  to  the  classification 
tables  that  7  indicates  the  class  Fine  Arts,  9  the  division 
Amusements,  and  2  the  section  Theater. 

The  index  is  also  useful  in  indicating  the  numbers  for 
the  various  viewpoints  from  which  a  subject  may  be 
treated.  For  example  a  book  on  tobacco,  if  it  deals  with 
the  cultivation  of  tobacco,  would  be  given  the  number 
633.71  under  Agriculture;  if  it  deals  with  the  manufac- 
ture of  tobacco  products,  it  would  probably  be  given  the 
number  679  under  Manufactures;  if  it  deals  with  the 
physiological  or  moral  effects  of  tobacco  it  would  have  the 
number  613.84  under  Personal  hygiene,  615.99  under 

20 


CLASSIFICATION  18 

Materia  medica — Poisons,  or  178.7  under  Ethics-Temper- 
ance— Stimulants  and  narcotics;  if  it  deals  with  govern- 
ment tax  on  tobacco,  it  would  probably  have  the  number 
336.27  under  Taxation.  A  book  on  birds  has  ordinarily 
the  number  598.2.  This  is  a  number  under  the  division 
Zoology  and  would  include  books  on  the  different  kinds 
of  birds,  a  description  of  their  eggs,  nests,  migration 
habits,  and  so  on.  But  if  the  treatment  is  of  birds  in 
their  relation  to  the  farm,  either  as  aids  or  pests,  or  as 
domesticated  fowls,  it  would  have  a  number  under  agri- 
culture, while  a  book  on  game  birds  and  the  hunting  of 
them  would  probably  be  given  the  number  799  under 
^Amusements — Sports.  A  book  on  the  diseases  of  birds 
would  have  the  number  619.6  under  Comparative  medi- 
cine— Veterinary;  one  on  their  protection,  179.3 — So- 
cieties for  the  prevention  of  cruelty  to  animals.  These 
examples,  which  could  be  duplicated  many  times,  suffice 
to  illustrate  the  use  of  various  numbers  to  indicate  dif- 
ferent phases  of  the  same  subjeqt  and  will  serve  to  show 
the  advantage  of  consulting  the  index  before  either  as- 
signing a  number  to  a  book  or  going  to  the  shelves  (or 
shelf  list)  to  look  for  material  on  a  definite  subject. 


21 


19 


CHAPTER    III 

CALL  NUMBERS  AND  THE  ARRANGEMENT 
OF  BOOKS  ON  THE  SHELVES 

19.  Author  numbers. — As  we  have  seen  in  the  pre- 
ceding chapter,  books  are  arranged  on  the  shelves  ac- 
cording to  their  classification  numbers,  with  the  result 
that  material  on  the  same  subject  is  grouped  together. 
In  this  way  it  is  possible  to  locate  at  a  moment's  notice 
books  dealing  with  any  particular  subject,  e.g.  the  history 
of  the  United  States.  In  a  large  library,  however,  there 
may  be  a  great  many  histories  of  the  United  States,  and 
sometimes  the  request  is  for  a  book  by  some  special  au- 
thor, e.g.  McLaughlin's  History  of  the  American  Nation. 
Of  course  this  could  be  found  by  looking  over  all  of  the 
books  marked  973,  but  the  task  in  a  library  where  there 
is  a  large  number  of  United  States  histories  would  be  a 
long  one.  In  order  to  obviate  this,  it  has  seemed  practical 
to  arrange  alphabetically  by  their  authors'  surnames  all 
books  bearing  the  same  classification  number.  In  this 
way,  McLaughlin's  History  of  the  American  Nation  pre- 
cedes McMaster's  History  of  the  People  of  the  United 
States  and  follows  Channing's  History  of  the  United 
States. 

It  would  be  possible  to  shelve  the  books  alphabetically 
from  the  author's  name  as  it  appears  on  the  binder's 
title,  but  this  method  is  slow  and  inconvenient.  It  is 
much  easier  to  find  and  to  replace  books  if  the  author's 
surname  appears  directly  below  the  classification  number. 

22 


CALL  NUMBERS  20 

Here  again  a  shorthand  method  is  brought  to  bear  and 
the  author's  name  instead  of  being  written  out  in  full  is 
expressed  by  his  initial  letter  (or  sometimes  letters,  in 
the  case  of  vowels  or  s)  followed  by  two  or  three  Arabic 
numerals.  These  numbers  are  assigned  from  the  Cutter 
or  Cutter-Sanborn  tables  which  are  so  "constructed  that 
the  names  whose  initials  are  followed  by  some  of  the 
first  letters  of  the  alphabet,  have  the  first  numbers,  and 
those  in  which  the  initials  are  followed  by  later  letters 
have  later  numbers. 


Kg., 

Garden, 

167 

Gould, 

729 

Gerry, 

321 

Grand, 

762 

Gibbon, 

352 

Grote, 

915 

Glover, 

5i8 

Guizot, 

949 

If  the  books  are  arranged  in  the  order  of  these  num- 
bers, of  course  they  will  be  in  alphabetic  order."3  Thus, 
for  Channing,  C362  is  used;  for  McLaughlin,  M222;  for 
McMaster,  M227.  This  combination  of  letters  and  fig- 
ures to  express  an  author's  name  is  called  the  author 
number. 

20.  Work  mark. — Sometimes  an  author  has  writ- 
ten several  books  on  the  same  subject ;  e.g.  Channing  has 
written  one  book  entitled  A  History  of  the  United  States 
and  another  entitled  First  Lessons  in  United  States  His- 
tory. In  order  to  distinguish  between  these  and  give  each 
a  definite  location,  a  letter,  called  the  work  mark,  is  added 
to  the  author  number.  This  letter  is  usually  the  first  let- 
ter of  the  first  word  not  an  article  in  the  title ;  in  this  case, 
"h"  or  "f." 


3  Cutter,    C.    A.     Explanation    of   the   alphabetic-order   marks.     (Three- 
figure  tables)    1913.    p.  3-4. 

23 


21-22  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

21.  Book   number. — The   work    mark,   as   a    rule, 
follows  the  author  number — for  example,  C362h — and  the 
two  together  form  the  book  number. 

22.  Call  number. — The  classification  number  des- 
ignating the  subject  with  which  the  book  deals  and  the 
book  number  representing  the  author  a"nd  title  of  the 
book  are  usually  written  the  one  above  the  other,  and 

973 

together  form  the  call  number;  thus,  C362h.  In 

cases  where  there  are  several  copies  or  various  volumes 
of  the  same  work,  distinction  between  the  separate  books 
is  made  by  the  addition  of  the  volume  or  copy  number; 

973 
i.e.,  C362h  No  two  books  in  the  library  should 

v.  2  cop.  5. 

have  the  same  designation.  A  call  number  should  re- 
fer to  one  book  and  one  book  only. 

The  uses  of  the  call  number  are  many.  By  distin- 
guishing a  book  from  every  other  book  in  the  collection, 
it  affords  a  convenient  device  by  which  the  book  is  called 
for  at  the  Loan  Desk  and  referred  to  in  all  the  records 
of  the  library.  It  assigns  to  the  work  a  definite  location 
on  the  shelves,  grouping  it  with  other  material  on  the 
same  or  related  subjects ;  and  by  the  natural  sequence  of 
its  symbols,  it  facilitates  both  the  finding  and  the  re- 
placing of  books  on  the  shelves. 

There  are  numerous  variations  and  exceptions  to  the 
general  rule  for  the  forming  of  call  numbers.  In  most 
cases  these  variations  can  be  accounted  for  by  the  desire 
to  have  certain  books  stand  together  on  the  shelves  in  the 
most  usable  and  convenient  order.  A  thorough  study  of 

24 


CALL  NUMBERS  23 

them  is  not  necessary  for  the  person  who  is  simply  to 
use  the  numbers  and  not  assign  them.  In  the  following 
list  of  numbers  (arranged  in  the  order  in  which  the 
books  would  stand  on  the  shelves)  there  have  been  in- 
cluded some  numbers  representing  those  formed  in  the 
usual  way  and  others  representing  some  of  the  more  com- 
monly found  exceptions  to  the  general  rule  with  an 
analysis  and  explanation  of  each  figure  and  letter.  It  will 
be  seen  from  a  study  of  these  numbers  that  each  symbol 
has  a  definite  reason  for  being  there  and  this  knowledge 
may  tend  to  emphasize  the  importance  of  avoiding  mis- 
takes in  copying  call  numbers  and  may  add  something 
of  interest  to  the  mere  routine  of  using  them. 

23.     Call  number,  Author  and     Analysis  of  Call 
Title  numbers 

370  Henderson,  Charles  Han-  i.  3  Sociology;  7  Edu- 

H38w  ford  cation;      o      general 

\\rt,    L   •     •*          u        j  treatment.   H38  Cut- 

What  is  it  to  be  edu- 

ter  no.  tor  Hender- 
son; w  first  letter  of 
first  word  of  title  be- 
ginning with  What. 

C  Harvard  graduates  maga-  2.  C  used  for  publica- 

H26uTm      zine  tions  o£  colleges  as  a 

substitute  for  the 
number  378.  H~26 
Cutter  no.  for  Har- 
vard ;  u  University ; 
T  alumni  publication 
(see  Decimal  classi- 
fication under  378) ; 
m  magazine. 


25 


23 


GUIDE  TO  TTIE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 


823          Defoe,  Daniel 
D36r  Robinson  Crusoe 


3.  8  Literature;  2  Eng- 
lish; 3  Fiction;  036 
Cutter  no.  for  De- 
foe; r  Robinson. 


823  Dickens,  Charles 

D55  Complete  works.  1912 

Ed  1912 


823  Dickens,  Charles 

D55b  Barnaby  Rudge 

823  Dickens,  Charles 

D55bl  Bleak  House 


4.  8  Literature;  2  Eng- 
lish; 3  Fiction;  DSS 
Cutter  no.  for  Dick- 
ens;  Ed.   1912  Com- 
plete works  edited  in 
1912.* 

5.  823     and     DSS     ex- 
plained in  4;  b  Bar- 
naby. 

6.  823     and     DSS     ex- 
plained     in      4 ;      bl 
Bleak.5 


823  Dickens,  Charles 

D55e  Edwin  Drood 


7.  823     and     DSS     ex- 
plained in  4.  e  Edwin. 


823  Jackson,  Henry 

D55eYj        About  Edwin  Drood 


823  and  DSS  ex- 
plained in  4.  e  Ed- 
win; Y  criticism;6  j 
Jackson. 


4  Editions  of  the  complete  works  of  an  author  are  grouped  according 
to  date  of  publication  and  stand  on  the  shelves  preceding  the  individual 
works. 

B  If  there  is  more  than  one  of  an  author's  works  having  the  same  class 
number  and  titles  beginning  with  the  same  letter,  it  is  necessary  to  dis- 
tinguish one  from  the  other  by  the  use  of  two  or  more  letters  in  the  work 
mark. 

8  A  capital  V  following  the  author  no.  indicates  a  bibliography;  a 
capital  W,  a  biography;  a  capital  Y,  a  criticism;  and  a  capital  Z,  a  hand- 
book or  dictionary.  They  are  used  with  a  view  to  bringing  all  of  the 
material  on  a  subject  together  on  the  shelves.  . 


26 


CALL  NUMBERS 


23 


823  Dickens,  Charles 

D55n  Nicholas  Nickleby 


p.  823  and  DSS  ex- 
plained in  4.  n  Nich- 
olas. 


823  Chesterton,  Gilbert  Keith  10.  823    and     DSS    ex- 

D55Yc         Charles  Dickens,  a  crit-      Plained  in  4-  Y  criti 
ical  study 


cism;  c  Chesterton. 


823  Whipple,  Edwin  Percy 

D55Yw        Charles     Dickens,     the 
man  and  his  work 


832.62 
O62t 


Goethe,  Johann 

Wolfgang  von. 

Faust .  .  .  translated  by 
Bayard  Taylor 


823  and  DssY  ex- 
plained in  4  and  10; 
w  Whipple. 

12.  8  Literature;  3  Ger- 
man; 2  Drama;  6 
Classic  period,  1750- 
1830;  2  Goethe.  O 
Dramas,  6  Faust  in 
translation,  2  English 
translation,  t  Taylor.7 


910.5 
NG 


£912 
914rA 


azne 


National  geographic  mag-  13-  9  History;   i   Geog- 

raphy  and  travel;  o 
general  treatment;  .5 
periodical.  NG  Na- 
tional geographic. 


Rand,    McNally    &    Co., 


rr.,      i  -1  r  ,  i 

The  library  atlas  of  the 

u     finil\ 

world.   (1914) 


£  folio  size;8  9  His- 
tory;  !  Geography 
and  travel  ;  2  Maps, 

atlases,  etc.  914  from 
IOI4  (the  date  of 

publication)  ;  r  Rand  ; 
A  atlas. 


7  Special    schemes    are    used    in    many    libraries    for    Shakespeare    and 
Goethe  whose  works  have  appeared  in  many  editions  and  translations  and 
have  been  so   much  written  about. 

8  "q"   or   "f",   preceding  a   call   number,   indicates   that   the   book   is   of 
quarto    or   folio    size.      As   there   are   special   shelves    for    these   tall   books, 
this   indication   of   size   is  useful  in   determining   the  proper   location   for  a 
book. 


27 


23 


GUIDE  ro  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 


913.38 
Se91En 


Seyffert,  August  Oskar     15-  9  History;    i   Geog- 

Dictionary  of   classical      raPhy  and  travel:  3 
.....  frr         i   ,     ,        antiquities ;  3  Ancient 

antiquities  . . .  (Translated 

world ;      8      Greece ; 

by)  Henry  Nettleship  and       Seg   Cutter   no    for 
J.  E.  Sandys  Seyffert;  1  from  first 

word  of  original  title 
"Lexikon  der  klassis- 
chcn  altertumskun- 
de" ;  E  English  trans- 
lation ;  n  Nettleship. 

Curtis,  George  Ticknor     16.  B  biography  as  a  sub- 
Life  of  Daniel  Webster      stitute    for    the    no- 

920 ;     W378     Cutter- 

Sanborn  no.  for 
Webster;  c  Curtis. 


B  McMaster,  John  Bach 

W378m       Daniel  Webster 


17.  B  and  V/378  ex- 
plained in  16;  m  Mc- 
Master. 


q920  Great  men  and  famous^. 

G79  women;  a  series  of  pen 
and  pencil  sketches  of  the 
lives  of  more  than  200  of 
the  most  prominent  per- 
sons in  history 


q  quarto  size;  9  His- 
tory; 2  Biography;  o 
general  (920  is  used 
here  for  collective 
biography;  B  for  in- 
dividual biography.). 
679  Cutter  no.  for 
Great.9 


016.942    Cannon,  Henry  Lewin 
C16r  Reading  references  for 

English  history 


19.  o  General  works ;  i 
bibliography;  6  of 
special  subjects;  9 
History ;  4  Europe ;  2 
England;  Ci6  Cutter 
no.  for  Cannon ;  r 
Reading. 


•  When  a  work  has  no  definite  author,  or  is  published  anonymously,  the 
Cutter  no.  is  taken  from  the  first  word  of  the  title  not  an  article. 


28 


CALL  NUMBERS 


24 


942  Green,  John  Richard 

G82s  Short    history    of 

English  people 


20.  9  History ;  4  Europe ; 
2  England;  G82  Cut- 
ter no.  for  Green;  s 
Short. 


942  Green,  John  Richard        */•  942    and    G82s    ex- 

G82s2  Short  history   of   the         Plained     in     20'     2 

English  people.    New  ed. 


new 
tion. 


(or  2d)    edi- 


942.05      Creighton,  Mandell,  bp.  of  22.  942  explained  in  20 ; 

C86a  London  °5 Tudor  Period : c86 

Cutter  no.  for  Creigh- 
ton;  a  age. 


The  age  of  Elizabeth 


942.05      Beesly,  Edward  Spencer  23-  942.05    explained    in 

E14Wb        Queen  Elizabeth  *>'and  **'*  El4  Cut- 

ter no.  for  Elizabeth ; 
W  Biography ;  b 
Beesly. 


942.1 
W56 


943 
H38s 


Wheatley,    Henry   Benja-^-  942  explained  in  20; 

i  London  ;.Ws6  Cut- 
ter no.  for  Wheatley. 


mm 


The  story  of  London. 

Henderson,  Ernest  Flagg  25.  9  History ;  4  Europe ; 
A  short  history  of  Ger-       3      Germany;      H38 
many 


Cutter  no.   for  Hen- 
derson ;   s  short. 


24.  Arrangement  of  books  on  the  shelves. — In  re- 
placing a  book  on  the  shelves  or  in  finding  one  already 
on  the  shelves,  the  classification  number  is  the  first  guide. 
All  of  the  900s  are  together ;  the  930s  before  the  940s ; 
the  942.03s  before  the  942.1s.  Books  having  the  same 
classification  number  are  arranged  alphabetically  by  the 


29 


24 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 


letters  on  the  second  line,  and  then  decimally  by  the  num- 
bers following  the  letters;  thus,  B38  follows  B216  and 
precedes  B42.  Those  having  the  same  class  number  and 
the  same  author  number  are  arranged  alphabetically  ac- 
cording to  their  work  marks.  The  following  numbers 
illustrate  the  arrangement  of  books  on  the  shelves  accord- 
ing to  their  call  numbers. 


510 

512 

512 

512 

512 

512.814 

512.83 

520 

520 

H83m 

B68a 

W462c 

W48c 

W48s 

K63g 

Sco82 

M86i 

M86i2 

How* 

Bowser 

Wells 

Wentworth 

Wentworth 

Kircher 

Scott 

Moulton 

Moulton 



Introduc- 

Introduc- 

Mathema- 



' 





— 

tion 

tion 
fn 

tics 
for  the 

Complete 

Shorter 

to 
Astronomy 

1U 

Astronomy 

Practical 

Academic 

Course  in 

College 

Course  in 

Group 

Determi- 

New 

Man 

.Algebra 

Algebra 

Algebra 

Algebra 

Properties 

nants 

Edition 

Books  are  arranged  on  the  shelves  from  left  to  right 
and  from  the  top  shelf  to  the  bottom  shelf.  Often  the 
lowest  shelf  is  given  over  to  quartos  bearing  the  class 
number  of  the  books  above.  Folios  are  usually  shelved— 
as  an  economy  of  space — on  special  shelves  in  a  separate 
part  of  the  library. 


30 


25 


CHAPTER    IV 
SHELF  LIST 

25.  The  Shelf  list,  as  its  name  implies,  is  a  list 
of  the  books  in  the  library  arranged  in  the  order  in  which 
they  stand  on  the  shelves.  Each  work  is  represented  by 
a  separate  card,  and  these  cards  are  filed  according  to 
their  call  numbers.10  The  following  information  appears 
on  the  cards :  call  number,  author's  name,  title  and  acces- 
sion number.  (Accession  numbers  are  the  numbers  as- 
signed to  books  to  indicate  the  order  in  which  they  are 
added  to  the  library.)  Figure  1  illustrates  a  shelf  card 
for  a  one  volume  work. 


370    Henderson,  Charles  Hanford. 
H38w   What  is  it  to  be  educated? 


COP.  2 
EDUCATION 
DEPARTMENT 


23990 

234147  cop. 2 

Figure  I.  Shelf  list  card  for  a  one  volume  work  of  which 
two  copies  are  in  the  library,  copy  one  being  in  the  general  library 
(this  may  be  inferred  if  no  location  is  designated)  and  copy 
two  being  in  a  departmental  library. 


10  The  list  of  call  numbers  in  the  preceding  chapter  is  arranged  in  shelf 
list  order. 


31 


25 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 


Figure  2  and  Figure  3  illustrate  shelf  list  cards  for 
works  in  sets  and  for  periodicals  or  serial  publications. 


Green,  John  Richard. 
History  of  the  English  people 

27313-16  v.1-4 


942 
G82 

COP,  2 
HISTORY 

•EPARTMENT    28347 9 -82  v.1-4  cop.   2 
312561-63  v.1-3  cop.   3 


COP.  3 

ECONOMICS 

SEMINAR 


312589  v.4  cop.    3 


Figure   2.     Shelf   list   card    for  a   work  in   several   volumes, 
copies  of  which  are  in  different  departments  of  the  library. 


634.05     Fruit  growers'    journal. 
F 

1 

11 

21 

31 

41 

51 

61 

71 

81 

91' 

2 

12 

22 

32 

>»42 

52 

62 

72 

82 

92 

•   3 

13 

23 

33 

43 

53 

63 

73 

83 

93 

^4 

14 

'24 

34 

44 

54 

64 

74 

84 

94 

5 

15 

25 

35 

45 

55 

65 

75 

85 

95 

v6 

16 

26 

36 

46 

56 

66 

76 

86 

96, 

•  7 

17 

27 

37 

47 

57 

67 

77 

87 

97' 

•  8 

18 

28 

38 

48 

58 

68 

78 

88 

98 

i/9 

19 

29 

39 

49 

59 

69 

79 

89 

99 

•10 

20 

30 

40 

50 

60 

70 

80 

90 

100 

The   Library  has  those  that  are   checked. 

Figure  3.     Shelf  list  card  for  a  periodical.     Checks  indicate 
the  bound  volumes  of  the  periodical  in  the  library. 

The  Shelf  list  is  of  secondary  importance  to  the  ordi- 
nary user  of  the  library.  Its  main  purpose,  so  far  as  he 
is  concerned,  is  to  indicate  the  number  of  copies  of  a 
book  in  the  library  and  their  location  on  the  campus ;  or 
he  may  in  rare  cases  use  it  in  making  an  estimate  of 
material  in  the  library  on  a  certain  subject. 


32 


26-27 


CHAPTER   V 
CARD  CATALOG:  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES 

26.  When  a  student  goes  to  the  library  for  the  first 
time  in  quest  of  a  certain  book,  for  example,  Hender- 
son's What  is  it  to  be  educated?  he  may  wander  a  few 
minutes  about  the  reading  rooms  seeking  the  book  among 
the  many  others  on  the  shelves,  but  soon  concluding  this 
is  a  poor  method  of  procedure  he  undoubtedly  asks  as- 
sistance from  a  librarian,  who  directs  him  to  the  card 
catalog.  The  catalog  has  a  relation  to  the  library  which 
is  analogous  to  that  which  an  index  has  to  a  book.  As 
he  uses  the  index  in  ^a  book  to  find  reference  to  the  page  •- 
containing  information  on  some  .minute  topic  he  will  con- 
sult the  index  to  the  library,  that  is  the  card  catalog,  to 
find  the  call  number  of  a  certain  library  book. 

27.  The  card  catalog. — At  one  time  library  cata- 
logs were  printed  in  book  form,  well  known  examples 
of  which  are  the  catalogs  of  the  British  Museum  and  the 
Boston  Athenaeum.  A  catalog  made  in  this  way,  how- 
ever, is  out  of  date  as  soon  as  published,  for  entries  of 
new  books  may  not  be  inserted  in  their  alphabetical  places 
after  the  printing  is  finished.  The  card  catalog,  with 
an  entry  for  each  work  on  a  separate  card,  is  the  form 
now  in  general  use,  since  it  may  be  kept  up-to-date  by 
filing  in  the  proper  alphabetical  positions  cards  for  new 
works  as  they  are  added  to  the  collection. 

33 


28-29  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

The  card  catalog  is  in  cases  of  small  drawers  or  trays 
which  are  labeled  to  indicate  their  contents ;  e.g. 
"A- Abel";  "Abem-Acab";  "Acac-Ada",  etc.  In  each 
drawer  the  cards  are  arranged  alphabetically  by  the  first 
words  on  the  cards,  not  an  article,  as  words  are  arranged 
on  the  pages  of  a  dictionary.  Heavy  manila  guide  cards, 
with  letters  printed  on  a  projecting  portion  to  indicate 
what  card  is  filed  directly  behind  are  inserted  at  short  dis- 
tances among  the  other  cards.  They  correspond  to  the 
thumb  index  in  a  dictionary. 

28.  Dictionary  card  catalog. — Every  book,  whether 
it  is  kept  in  the  general  library  or  in  a  department  col- 
lection, has  one  or  more  entries  in  the  catalog.     One 
card  may  be  filed  under  the  name  of  the  author,  another 
under  the  first  word  of  the  title  not  an  article,  and  a 
third  under  the  subject.     These  are  called  the  author 
card,  the  title  card,  and  the  subject  card,  on  account  of 
their  headings.    The  word,  name,  or  phrase  at  the  top  of 
a  card  by  which  is  determined  its  alphabetical  position  in 
the   catalog   is    the   heading.      A    catalog   in   which    all 
varieties  of  cards,  including  author,  subject  and  title,  are 
arranged  in  one  alphabet  is  known  as  a  dictionary  card 
catalog. 

29.  Card  for  author. — The  author  card  has  for  a 
heading  the  name  of  the  author.    This  is  called  the  main 
entry  card  because  it  is  the  first  or  principal  card  made  for 
books  by  authors  whose  names  are  known,  whether  the 
author  is  an  individual  or  an  organization.    Books  by  au- 
thors whose  names  are  undiscovered  and  periodicals  with 
no  definite  author  have  main  entry  cards  under  title. 

34 


CARD  CATALOG 


30-31 


370   Henderson,  Charles  Hanford. 
H38w   What  is  it  to  be  educated?  Boston, 
1914. 
462p. 


30.  Card  for  title. — The  title  card  has  for  a  head- 
ing the  title  or  name  of  the  book  as  given  by  the  author. 
Works  with  unusual  or  striking  titles,  works  published 
anonymously,  and  periodicals  have  title  cards. 


370    What  is  it  to  be  educated? 
H38w  Henderson,  C.H. 


1914. 


31.  Card  for  subject. — The  subject  card  has  for  a 
heading  (generally  typed  in  red11)  the  word  or  phrase 
which  indicates  most  specifically  what  the  book  is  about. 
This  heading  is  selected  by  the  cataloger.  As  a  rule, 
all  works,  with  the  exception  of  fiction,  plays  and  poems, 
have  subject  cards. 


370          Education. 

H38w  Henderson,  Charles  Hanford. 

What  is  it  to  be  educated?  Boston, 
1914. 
462p. 


A  book  about  more  than  one  subject  has  more  than 
one  subject  card.     For  example,  Lippmann's  Engraving 


11  Words   which  may  be  in   red  in  the  card  catalog  have  the  letters  in 
bold-face    type    in    this    and    the    following    examples  of  cards. 


35 


32-33  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

and  etching  has  a  subject  card  under  Engraving,  and  a 
second  one  under  Etching. 

32.  The  call  slip.  —  By  consulting  author,  title,  or 
subject  cards,  a  student  can  usually  decide  whether  the 
library  contains  books  by  a  certain  author,  a  book  with 
a  given  title,  or  books  on  a  special  subject.  When  look- 
ing for  a  book  by  an  author  with  a  common  surname; 
e.g.  Principles  of  Commerce  by  Brown,  if  the  forenames 
are  forgotten,  it  is  quicker  to  look  under  the  subject  of 
the  book  rather  than  under  the  author's  name,  because 
there  are  probably  more  than  a  hundred  cards  with  Brown 
as  a  heading.  To  obtain  a  book  from  the  library,  the 
call  number,  which  is  given  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner 
of  the  card,  the  author's  name,  the  title  of  the  book,  and 
the  volume  number  if  the  work  is  in  several  volumes, 
should  be  copied  on  a  call  slip  and  presented  at  the  Loan 
Desk. 


.  Library  of  Congress  cards.  —  Many  librarians 
buy  the  printed  cards  of  the  Library  of  Congress  for  use 
in  their  catalogs.  These  give  fuller  data  than  the  cards 
typed  in  the  local  library,  such  as  the  dates  of  the  au- 
thor's birth  and  death,  the  full  name  of  the  publisher,  the 
size  of  the  book,  its  price,  and  sometimes  an  outline  of 
its  contents.  The  Library  of  Congress  call  number  and 
additional  headings  are  indicated  at  the  bottom  of  the 
cards. 


36 


CARD  CATALOG  34 


Bailey,  Liberty  Hyde,  1858- 

The  principles  of  fruit-growing,  with  applications  to; 
practice,  by  L.  H. -Bailey.  20th  ed.,  completely  rev.  New 
York,  The  Macmillan  company ;  London,  Macmillan  &  co., 
ltd.,  1915. 

xiv,  432  p.  incl.  front.,  illus.     19Jcra.     (Half-title:  The  rural  science  se- 
ries, ed.  by  L.  H.  Bailey)        $1.75 

First  published  in  1897. 

i."  Fruil^culture. 

Library  of  Congress 

• Copy  2. 

Copyright    A  397007 


Explanation  of  the  card.— i8s8=date  of  author's  birth ;  2Oth 
ed.,  completely  rev.=2Oth  edition  completely  revised;  New  York, 
The  Macmillan  company;  London,  Macmillan  &  co.,  ltd.,  1915= 
place  of  publication,  name  of  publisher,  and  date  of  publication; 
xiv=pages  numbered  with  Roman  numerals;  432p.=main  pag- 
ing; incl.  front.=including  frontispiece;  illus. ^illustrations ;  19^ 
cm.^size  of  the  book  in  centimeters;  Half-title:  The  rural 
science  series=name  of  the  series  to  which  the  book  belongs ; 
ed.  by  L.  H.  Bailey=name  of  the  editor  of  the  series;  $1.75= 
price;  Fruit-culture=subject  heading  used  in  the  Library  of 
Congress;  15-5322=8603!  number  of  this  catalog  card;  86355.- 
Bi5  i9i5=Library  of  Congress  call  number;  -  — Copy  2= 
Library  of  Congress  has  a  second  copy;  Copyright  A397OO7= 
copyright  number. 

34.  Additional  information  has  to  be  typed  on  these 
cards  before  they  are  ready  to  be  filed.  The  subject 
headings  used  in  the  local  library  are  not  always  the  same 
as  those  suggested  on  the  Library  of  Congress  cards. 
The  following  are  examples  of  Library  of  Congress  cards 
with  the  call  numbers  and  subject  and  title  headings  of 
the  local  library  added. 

37 


34 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 


634         Fruit-culture 

B15pr20 

Bailey,  Liberty  Hyde,  1858- 

Tho  principles  of  fruit-growing,  with  applications  to 
practice,  by  L.  H.  Bailey.  20th  od.,  completely  rev.  Now 
York,  The  Macmillan  company;  London,  Macmillan  &  co., 
ltd.,  1915. 

xiv,  432  p.  incl.  front.,  illus.  19}"".  (Half-title:  The  rural  science  sc- 
ries, ed.  by  L.  H.  Bailey)  $1.75 

First  published  in  1897. 


1.  Fruit-culture. 

Library  of  Congress 

Copy  2. 

Copyright    A  397007 


SB355.B15    1915 
is!9h6i 


15—53?' 


813    Caleb  West,  master  diver. 
Sm6c 


1900, 


~mith,  F^anciS]  Hopkinson,  1838- 

Caleb  West,  master  diver,  by  F.  Hopkinson  Smith; 
with  illustrations  by  Malcolm  Fraser  and  Arthur  I.  Keller. 
Boston  and  New  York,  Houghton,  Mifflin  and  company, 
1900. 

3  p.  1.,  378  p.,  1  1.    front.,  9  pi.    19ic". 


i.  Title. 


4-1  MM/ 2 


Library  of  Congress 


813 


Yr 


38 


CARD  CATALOG 


35-37 


35.  Cross  reference  cards. — An  author's  works  are 
listed  under  his  real  name  in  full,  and  a  cross  reference 
"see"  card  is  made  from  the  pseudonym,  or  sometimes 
from  the  common  form  of  his  name. 


Twain,  Mark,  pseud.,   see 
Clemens,- Samuel  Langhorne. 


Matthews,  Brander,   see 
Matthews,  James  Brander. 


36.  When  a  subject  might  be  looked  for  under  either 
of  two  headings;  e.g.  Aviation  or  Aeronautics;  Gothic 
architecture  or  Architecture,  Gothic,  only  one  is  selected 
as  a  heading  for  the  publications  pertaining  to  the  sub- 
ject and  a  cross  reference  "see"  card  is  made  from  the 
form  of  heading  not  chosen  to  the  one  that  is  used,  as 
follows : 


Aviation, 
Aeronautics 


see 


Gothic  architecture, 
Architecture,  Gothic 


see 


37.  Reference  is  made  from  a  subject  heading  in  use 
to  related  subject  headings,  also  in  use,  by  means  of  a 
cross  reference  "see  also"  card.  If  the  reader  does  not 


37  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

find  the  sort  of  books  he  is  looking  for  among  the  cards 
under  a  particular  subject;  e.g.  Aeronautics,  he  may  find 
just  what  he  has  in  mind  by  consulting  the  cards  for  the 
related  subjects  referred  to  on  the  following  "see  also" 
card. 


Aeronautics,  see  also 

Aeronautics,  Military 
Airships 
Balloons 
Kites 

For  the  filing  of  the  "see  also"  card  see  section  73. 


4U 


38-40 


CHAPTER   VI 
CARD  CATALOG  (Continued):  DETAILS 

38.  Phrase  and  compound  subject  headings. — If 
a  person  examines  the  catalog  carefully  he  will  notice 
that  subject  headings  are  occasionally  made  up  of  a  phrase 
or  compound  heading. 

Church  and  state 
Cost  of  living 
Government  ownership 

39.  Inverted    subject   headings. — Sometimes    sub- 
ject phrases  are  inverted  in  order  to  bring  the  more  im- 
portant word  first :  e.g.,  Insurance,  Life. 

40.  Subdivided  subject  headings. — Large  subjects 
are  usually  divided  into  smaller  groups  by  subheadings. 

Music  France 

Music — Dictionaries  France — Biography 

Music — History  France — Description  and  travel 

Music — Periodicals  France — History 

Mines  and  mining  France — History — Early     period 
Mines  and  mining — Alaska  — 087 

Mines  and  mining — Canada  France — History — Capet  and  Va- 

lois,  987-1589 

Only  literature  and  language  subjects  about  a  coun- 
try have  the  adjective  form  of  the  country  for  subject 
headings. 

French  language  French  poetry 

French  language — Dictiona-    French  poetry — Collections 

ries  French  poetry — History  and  crit- 

French  language — Grammar        icism 

41 


41-43  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

41.     Subject  cards  for  biography. — The  name  of  the 
person  written  about  is  used  for  the  subject  heading. 


For  biography  of 

Milton,  John,     see 

B   Garnett,  Richard. 

M662g  Life  of  John  Milton.  London,  1890. 
205p. 

42.  A  book  which  is  about  a  few  persons  has  a  sub- 
ject card  for  each.  For  example,  Glover's  Poets  and 
Puritans  would  have  nine  subject  cards ;  one  for  each  of 
the  writers  mentioned  in  the  contents  of  the  following: 


For  biography  of 

Milton,  John,     see 

928.2  Glover,  Terrot  Reaveley. 
G51p    Poets  and  Puritans.  London,  1915. 
323p. 

Contents .—Spenser.  Milton.  Eve- 
lyn.  Bunyan.   Cowper.  Boswell. 
Crabbe.  Wordsworth.   Carlyle. 

43.  Subject  cards  for  criticism. — A  book  criticizing 
a  person  or  his  work  as  a  whole  has  for  a  subject  head- 
ing the  name  of  the  person  criticised. 


For  Criticism  of 

Milton,  John,  see 

821    Thompson,  Elbert  Nevius  Sebring. 
M64Yth  Essays  on  Milton.  New  Haven, 
1914. 
217p. 


42 


CARD  CATALOG:  DETAILS 


44-46 


44.  A  criticism  or  review  of  a  specific  work  has  for 
a  subject  heading  the  name  of  the  author  and  the  title 
of  the  work  criticised.  For  the  filing  of  criticism  cards 
see  sections  69-70. 


For  Criticism  of 

Milton,  John, 

Paradise  lost,     see 

821    Woodhull,  Marianna. 
M64pYw  The  epic  of  Paradise  lost 
essays.  New  York,  1907. 
375D. 


twelve 


45.  Subject  card  for  bibliography. — This  card  may 
have  at  the  top  the  phrase  For  bibliography  of,  or  it  may 
include  the  abbreviation  Bibliog.  as  a  subdivision  of  the 
heading. 


Drama — Bibliog. 

792     Chambers,   Edmund  Kerchever. 
C35       Mediaeval  stage.     Oxford,  1903. 
v.l     pref.   p. 13-42. 


v.l, 


46.  Subject  card  for  a  periodical. — A  magazine  on 
a  definite  topic  has  for  a  subject  heading  the  name  of  the 
subject  about  which  the  magazine  deals,  followed  by  the 
word  Periodicals. 


43 


47-48 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 


770.5        Photography— Periodicals 

PH  Photo  era;  the  American  journal 

of  photography.  1898-Feb.  1903. 
July  1903-date.  Boston,  1898  -date. 
v.I-IO,  no.  2,  11 -date. 


" — date"  on  the  above  example  means  that  the  library 
has  the  current  or  recent  numbers.  Any  gaps  in  the  li- 
brary file  are  noted ;  in  this  instance,  numbers  for  March 
through  June,  1903,  are  lacking. 

47.  Title  card  for  a  periodical. — A  periodical  has 
a  card  with  its  name  as  a  heading.  Since  periodicals 
have  no  definite  author,  this  is  the  main  card  and  in  the 
case  of  many  periodicals  the  only  card. 


051  Atlantic  monthly,  Nov.  1857-c/o/e.  Boston, 
A  1857-dale. 

v  .I—date. 


48.  Joint  author  cards. — When  a  book  is  by  more 
than  one  author  an  entry  is  made  under  each  author's 
name. 


720.9     Kimball,   Sidney  Fiske  and  Edgell, 
K56h         G.H. 

History  of  architecture.     New 
York,    cl918. 

621p. 


44 


CARD  CATALOG:  DETAILS 


49-50 


720.9   Edgell,  George.  Harold. 

K56h   Kimball,  Sidney  Fiske  and  Edgell, 

G.H. 

History  of  architecture.  New 
York,  cl918. 

621p. 

49.  Editor,  translator,  compiler,  and  illustrator 
cards. — If  the  person  is  sufficiently  prominent,  or  a 
book  might  be  wanted  because  of  its  editorship  or  illus- 
trations, a  card  is  included  with  the  name  of  the  editor, 
translator,  compiler,  or  illustrator  as  heading,  followed 
by  the  abbreviation  ed.,  tr.,  comp.,  or  illus. 


822.33 
S7h 

Hudson,  Henry  Norman, 
Shakspere,  William. 
Tragedy  of  Hamlet  ;  ed. 
Hudson.   Boston,  c!879. 
253p. 

ed. 

by  H.N. 

50.  Cards  for  parts  of  a  book. — A  book  which  in- 
cludes works  by  different  authors  may  have  a  so-called 
author  analytical  card  under  the  name  of  each  author, 
with  page  reference  to  his  work. 


808.3  Maupassant,  Henri  Rene  Albert  Guy 

C64s    de. 

The  necklace,  and  The  string, 
tr.  from  the  French  by  the  editor, 
Sherwin  Cody,  (see  Cody,  Sherwin, 
ed.   Selections  from  the  world's 
greatest  short  stories.   Chicago, 
1902.  p. 319-42.) 


45 


51-54  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

51.     A  story,  play,  or  poem  which  is  published  in  a 
collection  may  have  a  title  analytical  card. 


Middle  years. 
813     James,  Henry. 

J23      Novels  and  tales.  New  York,  1907. 
Ed. 1907  v.16,  p. 75-105. 
v.16 


52.  If  specific  parts  of  a  book  treat  of  different  sub- 
jects a  subject  analytical  card  is  sometimes  made  for  each 
subject.    See  section  42. 

53.  Series  card. — The  series  to  which  a  book  be- 
longs is  usually  noted  on  the  author  and  subject  cards. 
See  sections  33-34.     For  an  important  series  a  card  is 
inserted  in  the  catalog,  listing  all  the  books  in  the  series 
which  the  library  possesses. 


Rural  science  series;  ed.  by  L, 
H.  Bailey, 

634  Bailey,  L.H.  Principles  of 
B15pr20  fruit  growing.  20th  ed.  1915 

635  Jordan,  W.H.  Feeding  of  ani- 
J767  mals.  7th  ed.  1909. 


54.  Edition. — Such  phrases  as  $d  ed.,  new  ed.,  ed.  2 
rev.  and  enl.  after  the  title  of  a  book  refer  to  the  edition. 
Separate  cards  may  be  found  for  each  edition  in  the 


46 


CARD  CATALOG:  DETAILS 


55 


library,  or  a  single  card  may  give  the  items  for  two  or 
more  editions  as  follows : 


342.42  Lowell,  Abbott  Laurence. 
L95g     Government  of  England.  New 
York,  1908. 
2v. 

342.42  New  ed.  with  additional 

L95g2    chapter.  New  York,  1912. 
2v. 


55.  Pamphlets. — In  some  libraries  those  pam- 
phlets not  considered  of  sufficient  value  for  complete  cata- 
loging have  a  manila  card  under  the  author's  name,  in- 
cluding brief  title  of  the  pamphlet  and  a  classification 
number  preceded  by  "P"  (pamphlet). 


P385  Dunn,  Samuel  0. 

The  present  railway  situation. 


12Mrl9   Union  league  club   Gift 


47 


56-58 


CHAPTER    VII 

CARD  CATALOG    (Continued):    PUBLICATIONS 

OF  GOVERNMENTS,  SOCIETIES, 

AND  INSTITUTIONS 

56.  The  catalog  contains  author  cards  not  only  for 
persons  but  also  for  bodies  or  organizations  which  are 
regarded   as   the   authors   of  works   published   in   their 
names  or  by  their  authority. 

57.  Card   for   a   government   as    author. — Works 
published  officially  by  the  officers  of  a  country,   state, 
or  city  are  entered  under  the  name  of  the  country,  state 
or  city,  and  the  name  of  the  office  from  which  the  pub- 
lications issue  is  generally  used  as  a  subheading.    If  the 
name  of  the  office  commences  with  such  a  word  as  de- 
partment, bureau,  division,  board,  etc.  it  is  usually  in- 
verted or  filed  as  if  inverted  in  order  to  facilitate  finding 
the  card  in  the  catalog. 


630   U.S.  Agriculture,  Department  of, 
Un3f   Farmers'  bulletin.  Washington, 
1889-c/afe. 
No. 1 -date. 


58.  Card  for  an  institution  as  author. — Publica- 
tions of  colleges  and  universities  which  are  of  sufficient 
importance  to  be  cataloged,  and  publications  of  libraries, 

48 


CARD  CATALOG:  GOVERNMENTS,  ETC.         59-60 

museums,  and  other  institutions,  as  a  general  rule  are 
entered  under  the  name  of  the  college,  university,  li- 
brary, museum,  etc.  if  the  name  is  distinctive. 


C     Johns  Hopkins  university. 

J62k   Celebration  of  the  twenty-fifth 
anniversary  of  the  founding  of  the 
university  and  inauguration  of  Ira 
Remsen,  LL.D. ,  as  president  of 
the  university.  Baltimore,  1902. 
182p. 

59.  Publications  of  libraries,  municipal  universities, 
chambers  of  commerce,  and  other  institutions  without  dis- 
tinctive names  are  usually  entered  under  the  name  of  the 
place  in  which  the  institution  is  situated. 


670    Rochester,  N.Y.  Chamber  of  com- 
R586r   merce. 

Rochester,  N.Y. ,  the  city  of 
varied  industries.  Rochester, 
1912. 
51p. 


60.     Exception :  Publications  of  American  state  uni- 
versities are  entered  under  the  name  of  the  state. 


505   Wisconsin  university. 
WU     Bulletin:  science  series.  Madi- 
son, 1894-Ja/e. 
v.I-date. 

49 


61 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 


61.     Card  for  a  society  as  author: — The  publica- 
tions of  a  society  or  company  are  entered  under  its  name. 


620.6     American  society  of  mechanical 
MEJ  engineers. 

Journal.     Oct.  1906-date:    Baltimore, 
1906-datc. 

v.28-datc. 


q385.4    Illinois  central  railroad 

116                 company. 

Annual  report  for  the  year 

ending  June  30. 

1900 

"1910  "'.Co 

1920 

1930 

1940 

1950 

1901 

»1911  vr.e, 

1921 

1931 

1941 

1951 

1902 

"1912^.6* 

1922 

1932 

1942 

1952 

1903 

1913 

1923 

1933 

1943 

1953 

1904 

1914 

1924 

1934 

1944 

1954 

*1905o-.  55 

1915 

192S 

1935 

1945 

1955 

f!906  NT.  56 

H916  V-GG 

1926 

1936 

1946 

1956 

^1907*51 

C1917  \J-.67 

1927 

1937 

1947 

1957 

^  908  v-  5-8 

1918 

1928 

1938 

1948 

1958 

1909 

1919 

1929 

1939 

1949 

1959 

The  Library  has  those  that  are  checked 

62-63 


CHAPTER    VIII 
ARRANGEMENT  OF  CARDS  IN  THE  CATALOG 

62.  To  say  that  the  cards  in  a  dictionary  catalog  are 
arranged  alphabetically  by  their  headings  is  not  so  definite 
a  statement  as  might  first  appear,  for  many  seeming  ex- 
ceptions, special  interpretations  and  slight  variations  nec- 
essarily occur.    The  catalog  at  best  is  a  complicated  tool. 
Although  familiarity  with  the  arrangement  of  one  catalog 
is  helpful  in  the  use  of  another,  each  library  is  more  or 
less  a  law  unto  itself  and  special  practices  are  found  in 
different  libraries.     No  universally   followed   rules  can 
therefore  be  given,  but  a  knowledge  of  the  more  gen- 
erally accepted  interpretations  of  the  alphabetical  arrange- 
ment and  variations  from  it  is  needed  for  the  efficient  use 
of  any  catalog. 

63.  Abbreviations. — Such     abbreviations     as     Dr., 
Mr.,  Mrs.,  are  arranged  as  if  spelled  in  full.    The  same 
is  true  of  titles  beginning  with  numerals.     Proper  names 
beginning  with  Me,  M',  and  St.  are  filed  as  if  spelled 
Mac,  Saint. 

McAtee  St.  Louis 

Macaulay  Saint  Maur 

M'Cord  St.  Paul 
Me  Cormick 

51 


64-66  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

64.  Alphabetical  arrangement  by  words  or  by  let- 
ters.— In  the  dictionary  card  catalog  all  varieties  of 
cards,  whether  author,  subject,  title,  or  cross  reference, 
generally  are  arranged  alphabetically  by  their  headings 
(disregarding   the    initial    articles).     The    alphabetizing 
may  be  by  words  or  by  letters,  but  either  one  method 
or  the  other  is  followed  in  a  particular  catalog. 

(a)  By  words  or,    (&)  By  letters 

In  midsummer  days  Inchbald,  Mrs.  Elizabeth 

In  the  South  Seas  Indiana 

Inchbald,    Mrs.    Elizabeth  Indian   blankets   and  their 
Indian     blankets     and     their          makers 

makers  In  midsummer  days 

Indiana  Innes,  Arthur  Donald 

The  inn  of  disenchantment  The  inn  of  disenchantment 

Innes,   Arthur   Donald  In  the  South  Seas 

New  Castle,  Col.  Newberry  library,  Chicago 

New  republic  New  Castle,  Col. 

New  Zealand  Newcastle,  Me. 

Newberry  library,  Chicago  New  republic 

Newcastle,  Me.       .  Newspapers 

News  review  News  review 

Newspapers  New  Zealand 

65.  A  possible  exception  to  the  rule  of  alphabetiz- 
ing by  words  is  the  filing  of  some  prefix  names  by  letters. 

Van  Buren  La  Farge 

Vancouver  Lamartine 

Vanderlip  La  Motte-Fouque 

Van  Dyke  Lancaster 

66.  Forenames,  surnames,  titles  of  books  with  the 
same  entry  word. — When   forenames,  surnames,  and 
titles  of  books  have  the  same  entry  word  the  arrange- 
ment  is    as    follows: — Saints,    rulers    alphabetically   by 
countries  and  under  countries  numerically,  princes  and 

52 


ARRANGEMENT  OF  CARDS  67-68 

nobles,  surnames  alphabetically   by  forenames,  titles    of 
books  alphabetically. 

George,  Saint 

George  2,  King  of  Great  Britain 
George  3,  King  of  Great  Britain 
George  i,  King  of  Greece 
George,  Prince  of  Denmark 
George,  Earl  of  Glasgow 
George,  Edward  Augustus 
George,  Walter  Lionel 
George  at  the  wheel   (title) 
George  Dandin   (title) 

67.  Headings  with  the  same  surname. — Headings 
beginning  with  the  same  surname  are  arranged  alphabet- 
ically by  forenames  or  initials. 

George,  Edward  Augustus 

George,  Henry 

George,  Hereford  Brooke 

68.  Books  by  the  same  author. — An  author's  pub- 
lications are  filed  in  the  order  of  complete  collections 
arranged  chronologically,  selections   from  the  complete 
collections,  single  works  arranged  alphabetically  by  titles, 
single  works  as  joint  authors,  works  edited  or  translated 
by  him. 

Dickens,  Charles.  Works.    1880 

Dickens,  Charles.  Complete  works.    1902 

Dickens,  Charles.  Novels 

Dickens,  Charles.     Selections ;   ed.   by  W.   H.   Helm 

Dickens,  Charles.  Bleak  House 

Dickens,  Charles.     A  child's  history  of  England 

Dickens,  Charles.  The  old  curiosity   shop 

Dickens,  Charles.  Our  mutual  friend 

Dickens,  Charles.  A  tale  of  two  cities 

Dickens,  Charles  and  Collins,   W.  W.    No  thoroughfare 

Dickens,  Charles,  ed.    Household  words 

53 


69-73  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

69.  Author  as  subject. — Subject   cards  about  an 
author,  including  bibliography,  biography,  and    general 
criticism,  are  filed  after  all  the  author  cards   for  his 
works. 

Dickens,  Charles.  A  tale  of  two  cities 

Dickens,  Charles,  ed.     Household  words 

Dickens,  Charles.  Bibliography 
Dickens,  Charles.     Biography 

Dickens,  Charles.  Criticism 

70.  Criticism  of  a  work. — Subject  cards  about  a 
specific  work  are  filed  after  the  author  card  for  the  text 
of  the  work. 

Dickens,  Charles.     Our  mutual  friend    (text) 
Dickens,  Charles.     Our  mutual  friend   (criticism) 
Dickens,  Charles.     Pickwick  papers  (text) 

71.  Books  by  various  authors  with  the  same  sub- 
ject heading. — Cards  with  the  same  subject  heading  are 
filed  alphabetically  by  authors'  names.    For  example,  un- 
der the  subject  heading  Birds,  a  publication  by  Beal  en- 
titled Some  common  birds  would  file  before  a  book  by 
Hudson  entitled  Adventures  among  birds. 

72.  Person,   subject,   title,   with   the   same   entry 
word. — When  the  same  entry  word  is  used  for  persons, 
subjects  and  titles,  the  arrangement  is  in  the  order  of 
person,  subject,  title. 

Law,  William    (person) 

Law    (subject) 

Law    as    a    means    to    an    end    (title) 

73.  Cross   reference   "see    also"   card   and   subdi- 
visions of  a  subject. — Under  a  subject  which  is  subdi- 

54 


ARRANGEMENT  OF  CARDS  74-75 

vided  the  order  of  arrangement  may  be  single  word  sub- 
ject, "see  also"  card,  subdivided  subject,  inverted  sub- 
ject, phrase  subject;  or,  after  the  "see  also"  card,  the  ar- 
rangement may  be  in  alphabetical  order  regardless  of  the 
punctuation  of  the  heading. 

(a)  Law  (single  word  subject)  or,  (&)   Law   (see  also) 

Law   (see  also)  Law 

Law — Societies  (subdivided  .            Law  libraries 

subject)  Law,  Primitive 

Law,     Primitive     (inverted  Law — Societies 
subject) 

Law  libraries    (phrase  sub- 
ject) 

74.  Person,  subject,  title,  place,  with  the  same  en- 
try word. — When  persons,  places,  subjects  and  titles 
have  the  same  entry  word  the  arrangement  is  in  the  order 
of  person,  place,  subject,  title. 

Orange,  Thomas    (person) 
Orange,  France    (place) 
Orange,  N.  J.   (place) 
Orange  (subject) 
Orange  Judd  farmer  (title) 

75.  Arrangement  under  place. — Under  a  country, 
state,  or  city,  the  cards  may  be  in  this  order :  first,  works 
by  the  country,  state,  or  city  and  its  departments,  as  au- 
thor and  works  about  the  country,  state,  or  city,  arranged 
in  one  alphabet;  second,  societies,  institutions,  and  titles 
beginning  with  the  name  of  the  country,  state,  or  city, 
filed  in  another  alphabet. 

Illinois  (author) 

Illinois  (subject) 

Illinois — Agriculture    (subject) 

Illinois — Agriculture,  Dept.  of   (author) 

55 


76  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Illinois — Zoology  (subject) 

Illinois  association  of  teachers  of  English    (author) 

Illinois  central  railroad  company   (author) 

Illinois  magazine,  (title) 

Illinois  university — Agricultural  experiment  station   (author) 

On  the  other  hand,  the  arrangement  under  place  may 
be  strictly  alphabetical  by  the  headings. 

Illinois   (author) 

Illinois  (subject) 

Illinois — Agriculture   (subject) 

Illinois — Agriculture,  Dept.  of  (author) 

Illinois  association  of  teachers  of  English   (author) 

Illinois  central  railroad  company    (author) 

Illinois  magazine    (title) 

Illinois  university — Agricultural  experiment  station    (author) 

Illinois — Zoology  (subject) 

76.  History  subdivided  by  periods. — In  the  history 
of  a  ntfmber  of  the  largest  countries  the  usual  subject 
subdivisions,  such  as  Bibliography,  Study  and  teaching, 
may  be  followed  by  period  subdivisions  which  are  ar- 
ranged chronologically. 

France — History 

France — History — Bibliog. 

France — History — Study  and  teaching 

France — History — Early  period-o87 

France — History — Capet  and  Valois,  987-1589 


56 


77-78 


CHAPTER    IX 
THE  PARTS  OF  A  BOOK 

77.  If  one  is  to  make  a  careful  and  intelligent  use 
of  the  contents  of  books,  it  is  necessary  to  have  some 
knowledge   of   the   significance   and   importance   of   the 
various  parts  which  go  into  the  make-up  of  present  day 
printed  books.    These  parts  vary  in  number  and  arrange- 
ment, but  the  order  commonly  found  is  as  follows:  (i) 
title-page,  (2)  copyright  date,  (3)  preface,  (4)  table  of 
contents,  (5)  list  of  illustrations,  maps,  etc.,  (6)  intro- 
duction, (7)  body  of  the  book,  (8)  appendix,  notes  or 
other  supplementary  material,  and  (9)  index. 

78.  Title-page. — The  title-page  usually  gives  the 
full  title,  the  name  of  the  author  or  editor,  the  edition 
if  other  than  the  first,  the  place  of  publication,  the  name 
of  the  publisher,  and  the  date  of  publication.     From  the 
title  one  can  often  get  some  indication  of  the  field  cov- 
ered by  the  work  and  sometimes  may  judge  of  the  class 
of  readers  for  whom  it  was  intended  or  the  viewpoint  of 
the  author. 

The  author's  name,  if  he  is  an  authority  in  his  field, 
carries  with  it  some  guarantee  of  the  value  of  the  work. 
Often  a  note  added  after  his  name  on  the  title-page  lists 
the  university  degrees  which  he  holds,  societies  of  which ' 
he  is  a  member,  or  work  he  has  done  which  fits  him  for 
the  special  undertaking  in  hand. 

"Revised  and  Enlarged  Edition,"   "Third   Edition," 

57 


79  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

etc.  indicate  a  revision  of  the  original  work  with  addi- 
tions, corrections  or  rearrangement  of  material. l- 

The  place  of  publication  often  throws  light  on  the  na- 
tionality of  the  author  and  this  is  important  as  being 
a  probable  indication  of  the  viewpoint  from  which  the 
book  was  written.  In  some  cases  this  influences  mater- 
ially the  treatment  of  a  subject. 

The  name  of  a  well-known  and  reliable  publisher  on 
the  title-page  of  a  book  usually,  though  not  always,  in- 
sures a  well  printed,  well  edited,  and  dependable  work. 
Some  publishers  specialize  in  a  certain  field,  for  example 
in  engineering,  and  books  in  that  field  published  by  them 
may  usually  be  regarded  as  authoritative. 

The  date  on  the  title-page  shows  the  year  in  which 
that  copy  of  the  book  was  printed. 

79.  Copyright  date. — The  copyright  date13 — us- 
ually to  be  found  on  the  back  of  the  title-page — indicates 
in  what  year  the  book  was  first  published.  This  is  espe- 
cially important  in  subjects  such  as  science  where  new 
discoveries  are  constantly  changing  old  theories  and  the 
value  of  the  book  depends  in  great  measure  on  whether  or 
not  the  results  of  recent  investigations  are  included.  New 
editions  of  a  work  have  as  a  rule  a  new  copyright  date. 


12  The  term  edition  should  not  be  confused  with  "impression"  which  in- 
dicates merely  a  reprinting  without  alteration  from  the  original  type  or 
plates. 

18  Copyright  is  the  "exclusive  right  secured  by  law  to  authors  and 
artists  to  publish  and  dispose  of  their  several  wotks  for  a  limited  time. 
The  copyright  law  of  the  United  States  requires  the  author  or  artist,  in 
order  to  secure  copyright  for  works  reproduced  in  copies  for  sale,  to  send 
to  the  Copyright  Office,  Library  of  Congress,  Washington,  D.  C.,  almost 
immediately  after  publication,  two  copies  of  the  work,  with  an  application 
for  registration.  .  .  and  a  money  order  for  the  statutory  fee  of  $i." 
The  term  of  copyright  is  "28  years  with  the  right  of  renewal  for  28  years 
on  application  within  one  year  prior  to  the  expiration  of  the  existing  term." 
New  Standard  Dictionary. 

58 


THE  PARTS  OF  A  BOOK  80-83 

80.  Preface. — In  the  preface  the  author  addresses 
the  reader  directly.    He  often  states  his  purpose  in  writ- 
ing the  book,  the  class  of  readers  for  whom  he  intended 
it,  the  field  he  has  aimed  to  cover,  and  any  indebtedness 
which  he  may  feel  to  those  who  have  assisted  him  in  the 
work. 

81.  Table  of  contents. — The  table  of  contents  may 
include  simply  the  chapter  headings  given  in  the  order 
in  which  they  appear  in  the  book  with  page  references 
to  where  they  will  be  found,  or  it  may  contain  in  addition 
to  this  a  rather  minute  analysis  of  the  sections  or  parts 
of  the  chapters.    Often  by  a  perusal  of  the  table  of  con- 
tents it  is  possible  to  obtain  a  very  good  idea  of  the  scope 
of  a  book  withqut  reading  it  through. 

82.  List  of  illustrations,  maps,  etc. — Illustrations, 
maps,  plates,  diagrams,  etc.  are  listed  in  most  books  in 
the  order  in  which  they  appear.    This  list  usually  affords 
the  best  and  quickest  means  of  locating  any  desired  map 
or  illustration  as  these  frequently  are  not  entered  in  the 
index. 

83.  Introduction. — The  introduction,  or  introduc- 
tory chapter  forms  as  a  rule  an  essential  part  of  the  book 
and  is  usually  a  general  survey  of  the  subject  preparing 
the  reader  for  the  treatment  to  follow.     It  differs  from 
the  preface  in  that  it  has  as  its  subject  the  subject  of  the 
book  while  the  preface  has  as  its  subject  the  book  itself, — 
its  history,  scope  and  purpose.     The  former  is  usually 
written  first,  the  latter  last,  although  both  may  be  written 
by  someone  other  than  the  author. 


59 


84-86  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

84.  Body  of  the  book. — The  body  of  the  book  is 
the  text  or  main  part  with  any  illustrations  or  foot-notes 
that  may  accompany  it. 

85.  Appendix,  notes  or  other  supplementary  mate- 
rial.— Material  which  is  not  essential  to  the  complete- 
ness of  the  book  and  cannot  be  conveniently  included 
in  the  text  but  which  gives  clearness  or  authority  to  the 
treatment  is  often  added  after  the  text  in  the  form  of 
an  appendix.     This  may  be  bibliographical   references, 
statistical  tables,  documentary  material,  or  explanatory 
notes. 

86.  Index. — The  index  of  a  book  is  the  alphabetical 
list  of  topics,  names,  etc.  occurring  in  the  book  with  an 
indication  of  where  each  is  to  be  found. .  It  is  the  key  to 
the  book,  and  affords  the  quickest  means  of  finding  a 
definite  fact  or  bit  of  information.     It  differs  from  the 
table  of  contents ;  first,  in  order  of  arrangement,  the  one 
being  alphabetical,  the  other  in  the  order  in  which  the 
material  appears  in  the  work ;  second,  in  location  in  the 
book,  the  one  being  usually  last  and  the  other  usually 
first;  and  third,  in  the  treatment  of  the  subject,  the  in- 
dex giving  detailed  topics,  the  table  of  contents  general. 

In  the  case  of  a  work  in  a  number  of  volumes,  the 
index  to  the  set  is  usually  in  the  last  volume.  However, 
there  may  be  either  a  separate  index  in  each  volume,  as 
in  Bailey's  Cyclopedia,  of  American  Agriculture,  and  no 
general  index,  or  a  general  index  to  the  set  and  also 
an  index  for  each  volume  as  in  the  Cambridge  Modern 
History.  For  this  reason,  it  is  important  to  make  sure 
what  section  of  a  work  the  index  proposes  to  cover.  Also, 
it  is  well  to  note  the  limitation,  if  any,  as  to  the  content 

60 


THE  PARTS  OF  A  BOOK  87 

of  the  index.  There  may  be  one  index  for  authors  and 
one  for  subjects,  or  in  books  of  poetry  a  separate  index 
for  authors,  titles  and  first  lines  of  poems.  If  any  dif- 
ficulty is  experienced  in  understanding  an  index  refer- 
ence, it  is  well  to  turn  to  the  beginning  of  the  index 
where  a  note  will  often  be  found  explaining  any  special 
symbols  or  abbreviations. 

In  some  indexes  where  there  are  a  number  of  ref- 
ences  under  a  topic  the  most  important  reference  is  placed 
first,  in  other  cases  it  is  printed  in  a  different  style  of 
type,  but  if  no  indication  is  given,  the  one  covering  the 
largest  number  of  pages  is  probably  the  most  important. 

87.  Abbreviations. — In  the  use  of  books  and  li- 
brary records,  abbreviations  are  frequently  encountered 
and  familiarity  with  their  meaning  will  greatly  facilitate 
the  process  of  finding  a  reference.  The  following  are 
some  of  the  abbreviations  most  often  met  with: 

abr.  abridged,   abridgment 

ad  fin.  ad  finem    (at  the  end) 

agric.  agriculture 

alph.  alphabetical 

A.L.A.  American  library  association 

Amer.  America  or  American 

anon.  anonymous 

app.,  apx.  appendix 

arch.  architecture 

arr.  arranged  or  arrangement 

assn.,  assoc.  association 

bibl.,  bibliog.  bibliography 

biog.  biography 

bk.  book 

bul.  bulletin 

c.  copyright,   chapter,   circa    (about) 

ca.  circa  (about) 

61 


87 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 


can. 

cat.,  catal. 

cf. 

ch.,  chap. 

chem. 

cir.,  circ. 

cm. 

col. 

comp. 

Cong. 

cont. 

cop. 

eye.,  cyclo. 

dept. 

diag.,  diagr. 

diet. 

do. 

doc. 

econ. 

ed. 

educ. 

e.g.,  ex.  gr. 

ency. 

eng. 

Eng. 

enl. 

et  seq.,  et  sq. 

etc. 

facsim. 

ff. 

fig. 

front. 

Ger. 

H.  of  R. 

hist. 

ib.,  ibid.,  ibidem. 

id.,  idem. 

i.e. 


canto 

catalog 

confer  (compare) 

chapter 

chemistry 

circa  (about) 

centimeters 

column  or  colored 

compare,  compiled  or  compiler 

Congress  or   Congressional 

contents  or  continued 

copy  or  copyright 

cyclopedia 

department 

diagram 

dictionary 

ditto  (the  same) 

document 

economics 

edition,  edited  or  editor 

education 

exempli  gratia  (for  example) 

encyclopedia 

engraving,  engineering 

England  or  English 

enlarged  (of  an  edition) 

et  sequens   (and  the  following) 

et  cetera  (and  so  forth) 

facsimile 

following 

figure 

frontispiece 

German  or  Germany 

House  of  Representatives 

history  or  historical 

in  the  same  place 

the  same 

id  est  (that  is) 


62 


THE  PARTS  OF  A  BOOK  87 

il.,  illus.,  illust.  illustrated,  illustration 

in  loc.  cit.  in  lo>co  citato   (in  the  place  cited) 

incl.  including  or  inclusive 

ind.  index     • 

inf.  infra  (below) 

introd.  introduction 

Ital.  Italian  or  Italy 

j.,  jour.  journal 

jt.  joint    (of  authors,  editors,  etc.) 

1.  leaf,  line  or  liber  (book) 

lang.  language 

I.e.,  loc.  cit.  loco  citato   (in  the  place  cited) 

lib.  library,   or  liber    (book) 

lit.  literature 

mag.  magazine 

mod.  modern 

MS.  (MSS.  plural)   manuscript 

mun.  municipal 

n.  note 

N.B.  nota  bene  (note  well) 

n.d.  no  date  of  publication 

n.p.  no  place  of  publication 

n.s  new   series 

nat.  hist.  natural  history 

no.  numero   (number) 

o.p.  out  of  print 

op.,  opp.  opposite 

p.  page,  pages,  or  part 

pam.  pamphlet 

par.  paragraph 

per.  periodical 

phil.  philosophy 

phot.  photography 

pi.  plate 

pol.   sci.  political  science 

por.,  port.  portrait 

pp.  pages 

pref.  preface 


63 


87  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

.** 

pro.,  proc.  proceedings 

pseud.  pseudonym 

pt.  part 

pub.  published  or  publisher 

q.v.  quod  vide  (which  see) 

ref.  reference 

rep.,   rept.,   rpt.  report 

rev.  revise,  revised,  reviser  or  review 

sc.  scene   (of  a  play) 

sc.,  scil.  scilicet   (namely) 

sec.,  sect.  section 

Sen.  Senate 

seq.,   seqq.  scquens    (following) 

ser.  series 

soc.  sociology  or  society 

Span.  Spanish 

sq.,  sqq.  sfquens   (following) 

st.  stanza 

subj.  subject 

sup.  supra   (above) 

sup.,  supp.,  suppl.      supplement 

tab.  table 

t.-p.  title-page 

tr.,  trans.  translated,   translator,   transactions 

v.  volume,  verse,  or  vide  (see) 

viz.  z'idilicet  (to  wit,  namely,  that  is  to  say) 

vol.  volume 

v.y.  various  years 

§  section 

ff  paragraph 

2-5  two  to  five  inclusive 


88-89 


CHAPTER    X 
REFERENCE  BOOKS 

88.  Reference    book    defined. — "Reference    books 
are  the  clearing-houses  of  knowledge.    They  are  libraries 
in  miniature,  focusing  into  a  single  book  information  scat- 
tered through  a  thousand  volumes.    They  are  short-cuts 
to  learning,  passkeys  to  the  accumulated  wisdom  of  the 
ages.     The  ordinary  reader  knows  little  of  them,  and 
realizes  but  slightly  the  great  help  they  would  be  to  him 

«  in  his  daily  reading  and  daily  living."  Kroeger.  Guide 
to  the  study  and  use  of  reference  books:  W.  G.  Jordan 
in  Literary  era,  8:52. 

A  reference  book,  in  the  strict  sense  of  the  term, 
is  a  book  to  be  consulted  for  information  on  a  definite 
point  rather  than  to  be  read  through.  Typical  works  of 
this  kind  are  encyclopedias,  dictionaries,  periodical  in- 
dexes, statistical  publications,  and  the  like.  There  are, 
however,  many  other  works  not  intended  primarily  for 
reference  use  such  as  histories  of  a  country  or  standard 
treatises  in  the  various  fields  of  science,  industry,  or  art, 
which  afford  the  best  material  on  their  subject,  and 
which,  for  answering  questions  in  their  field,  should  not 
be  overlooked.  In  a  broad  sense  any  book  may  be  con- 
sidered a  reference  book  if  it  contains  a  great  deal  of 
information  arranged  in  an  easily  accessible  form. 

89.  Reference    collection. — The     term     "reference 
collection"  is  applied  to  the  books  in  the  library  used 
primarily   for  reference   work.     It   rnay  be   limited   to 

65 


90  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

reference  books  proper  or  may  also  include  other  books 
that  have  been  found  helpful  in  answering  questions. 
The  collection  is  usually  shelved  apart  from  the  rest  of 
the  books  in  the  library  in  an  accessible  place  convenient 
to  readers.  The  books,  as  a  rule,  cannot  be  taken  from 
the  library  as  they  are  wanted  immediately  when  needed, 
are  used  often,  and  require  but  a  short  time  for  consul- 
tation. 

90.  Points  to  be  considered  in  judging  the  value 
of  a  book  for  reference  use. — Books  suitable  for  ref- 
erence use  should  have  certain  special  characteristics. 
Some  of  the  points  to  be  considered  are  as  follows : 

a.  Authoritativeness.     Can    the    statements    in    the 
book  be  depended  upon  to  be  accurate?  In  judging  of  this 
the  reputation  and  work  of  the  author  may  be  considered. 
The  publisher  should  be  noted.    A  greater  degree  of  con- 
fidence may  be  put  in  a  book  if  the  separate  articles  are 
signed  by  the  person  writing  them  as  responsibility  for 
the  accuracy  of  the  statements  is  thereby  definitely  fixed. 
In  the  case  of  statistics,  it  is  well  to  note  whether  or 
not  they  are  based  on  official  reports  with  an  exact  ref- 
erence to  the  source  from  which  they  were  taken. 

b.  Scope.    What  is  the  field  which  the  book  aims  to 
cover  and  does  it  really  cover  it?  What,  if  any,  are  the 
limitations  as  to  subject,  country,  or  period  of  time  in- 
cluded? These  questions  may  usually  be  answered  by 
noting  the  title  of  the  book  and  by  reading  the  preface, 
the  table  of  contents,  the  introductory  chapter  and  occa- 
sional sections  through  the  book. 

c.  Arrangement.     Material  in  a  book  for  reference 
use  should  be  arranged  so  as  to  be  easily  and  quickly 

66 


REFERENCE  BOOKS  90 

found.  If  there  is  a  classified  arrangement  in  the  body 
of  the  work,  there  should  be  a  good  alphabetical  group- 
ing of  topics  in  the  index  or  vice  versa.  It  should  also 
be  noticed  whether  or  not  the  cross-references  are  ade- 
quate. 

d.  Character  of  the  articles.     Are  the  articles  long 
or  short,  suited  to  the  specialist  or  the  general  reader? 
Are  topics  of  equal  importance  given  equal  treatment? 

e.  Viewpoint  of  the  author.    Does  the  nationality  of 
the  author,  his  religious,  political  or  personal  convictions 
affect  the  contents  of  the  book?  If  so,  the  book  may 
still  be  useful  for  reference,  but  its  bias  should  always 
be  borne  in  mind  in  any  use  of  the  information  it  gives. 

f.  Bibliography.     Bibliographies  are  usually  desir- 
able in  a  book  for  reference  use  as  they  point  the  way 
to  a  more  exhaustive  treatment  of  the  subject  and  in- 
dicate a  more  careful  editorship. 

g.  Date.     In  some  fields,  the  date  of  a  book  affects 
very  directly  the  value  of  the  material  it  contains.     In 
such  cases  the  date  of  publication  should  always  be  com- 
pared with  the  copyright  date  and  the  preface  date  if 
there  is  one.     Whether  or  not  the  work  is  kept  up-to- 
date  by  supplements  may  also  be  noted. 

• 

h.  Illustrations.  Are  the  illustrations  adequate?  In 
some  subjects  such  as  art,  costume,  etc.,  illustrations  are 
an  essential  feature;  in  other  cases  as  in  statistics  or  lit- 
erature, their  use  is  entirely  optional. 

i.  Comparison  with  other  books.  How  does  the 
book  compare  with  other  works  in  the  field  it  covers? 

j.  Physical  make-up  of  the  book.  Is  the  book  well 
printed,  well  bound  and  of  a  size  convenient  to  handle? 

67 


91  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

91.  How  to  use  a  reference  book. — If  one  is  not 
familiar  with  the  arrangement  of  a  reference  book,  it 
will  be  found  a  great  saving  of  time  and  energy  to  devote 
a  few  minutes  to  a  study  of  the  book  before  trying  to 
get  any  information  from  it.  This  may  be  done  by 
glancing  over  the  title-page,  the  preface,  the  table  of 
contents,  and  any  index  features  which  the  book  may 
have.  The  arrangement  of  the  main  body  of  the  work 
and  the  appendices  or  supplements  should  also  be  noted. 


68 


92-93 


CHAPTER    XI 
MAGAZINES  AND  MAGAZINE  INDEXES 

92.  Magazines     are     generally     published     weekly, 
monthly,  or  quarterly  as  numbers  or  parts  of  a  volume 
with  consecutive  paging;  e.g.  the  North  American  review 
for  July  1919  is  number  i  of  volume  210.     When  all 
the  parts  of  a  volume  have  appeared,  usually  including 
a  title-page  and  an  index,  they  are  bound  together,  and 
thus  are  retained  for  reference  use  in  a  convenient  and 
durable   form. 

Magazines  are  the  principal  source  of  information  on 
questions  of  recent  interest.  For  book  reviews,  biog- 
raphy, travels,  popular  treatment  of  art,  science,  technol- 
ogy, and  for  material  on  all  sorts  of  small  topics  often 
unobtainable  in  books  the  magazines  are  of  great  value. 
In  research  work  along  historical,  political,  or  literary 
lines  they  are  useful  for  contemporary  views  of  persons, 
events,  books,  etc.  Students  will  find  the  periodicals  es- 
pecially helpful  in  the  preparation  of  themes  and  in  de- 
bate work. 

93.  Standard  magazines. — Following  are  the  titles 
of  a  few  standard  magazines  which  are  of  importance 
for  general  reading,  current  history,  and  book  reviews. 
(M  indicates  a  monthly  publication:  SM  a  semimonthly 
publication:  W  a  weekly  publication). 

GENERAL 
American 

Atlantic  monthly,    (M).  National    geographic    magazine, 

Century,   (M).  (M)., 

69 


93 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 


Country  life,    (M). 
Harper's  monthly,    (M). 
Living  age,  (W). 

English 

Contemporary  review,  (M). 
Fortnightly  review,  (M). 
Nineteenth  century,  (M). 


Scientific  American,  (M). 
Scribner's  magazine,  (M). 
Survey,  (W). 


CURRENT    EVENTS 


American 

Current  history  magazine, 

(M). 

Current  opinion,   (M). 
Freeman,    (W). 
Independent,  (SM). 
Literary  digest,   (W). 


Nation,  (W). 

New  republic,   (W). 

North  American  review,    (M). 

Outlook,    (W). 

Review  of  reviews   (M). 

World's  work,   (M). 


English 

Graphic,   (W).  Saturday  review,    (W). 

Nation  and  the  Athenaeum,     Spectator,  /(W). 
(W). 

BOOK  REVIEWS:  LITERARY  PERIODICALS 
American 

Bookman,  (M).  Nation,   (W). 

Literary  review,   (W). 

English 

Nation  and  the  Athenaeum,     Spectator,    (W). 

(W). 
Saturday  review,  (W). 

FOREIGN  LANGUAGE  ILLUSTRATED  PERIODICALS 
French  Italian 

L'illustration,   (W).  L'illustrazione  italiana,   (W). 


German 

Illustrirte  zeitung,    (W). 


Spanish 

La     illustracion     espanola    y 
americana,    (W). 


70 


MAGAZINES  AND  INDEXES  94-96 

94.  In    addition    to    magazines    of  general  interest 
there  are  many  highly  specialized  or  technical  ones  per- 
taining to  the  subjects  taught  in  various  college  courses. 
For  the  cataloging  of  magazines  see  section  46-47. 

95.  Magazine  indexes. — On   account   of  the   con- 
stant  stream   of    periodical   articles    appearing   weekly, 
monthly,  quarterly,  from  year  to  year,  many  of  them 
would  be  inaccessible  if  there  were  no  general  periodical 
indexes.    These  are  the  means  of  locating  magazine  ar- 
ticles by  author,  title,  or  subject,  just  as  the  index  to  a 
book  is  the  means  of  finding  certain  information  in  that 
book. 

96.  Poole's    index   to   periodical    literature,    1802- 
1881.    Rev.  ed.  Boston,  Houghton,  1893.    Iv.  in  2. 

— First-fifth  supplements,  Jan.  1,  1882- Jan.  1, 
1907.  Boston,  Houghton,  c!888-1908. 

Contents:  v.l,  1802-1881  (2  parts);  1st  supplement 
1882-1886;  2d  supplement,  1887-1891;  3d  supplement, 
1892-1896;  4th  supplement,  1897-1901;  5th  supplement, 
1902-1906. 

The  account  of  the  origin  of  this  first  general  period- 
ical index  by  W.  F.  Poole,  when  he  was  a  student  at 
Yale  college  and  librarian  of  his  college  society,  is  re- 
lated in  the  preface  to  the  1882  edition  of  Poole's  index, 
v.l,  and  should  be  of  interest  to  every  college  student. 

Indexes  470  American  and  English  periodicals  of  the 
19th  century,  chiefly  general.  Arranged  aphabetically 
by  subject  or  title.  Subject  entries  are  often  made  by 
inverting  the  title  in  order  to  bring  the  important  word 
first.  Necessary  to  look  under  various  headings  to  be 
sure  of  finding  all  the  articles  on  a  subject.  A  story  or 

71 


97-98  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

poem  is  listed  under  its  title,  and  the  author's  name  if 
known  is  given  in  parentheses.  Thus  Thackeray's  novel, 
The  Newcomes,  which  was  first  published  in  a  magazine, 
is  entered  under  Newcomes  (W.  M.  Thackeray}.  Re- 
views of  books  are  indexed  under  the  name  of  the  author 
whose  work  is  criticised,  if  the  book  has  no  definite  sub- 
ject; e.g.  poetry  or  fiction;  otherwise  under  the  subject 
of  the  book.  A  review  of  Thackeray's  The  Newcomes 
is  listed  under  Thackeray,  but  a  review  of  Macaulay's 
History  of  England  is  entered  under  England  only,  for 
England  is  the  subject  of  the  work. 

Information  given  in  the  references :  title  of  the  ar- 
ticle, author's  name  within  parentheses  if  known,  abbre- 
viated title  of  the  periodical,  volume  and  page.  In  the 
front  of  each  volume  is  an  alphabetical  list  of  abbrevia- 
tions used  for  the  periodicals  indexed,  with  the  titles  of 
the  magazines  in  full  and  the  numbers  assigned  to  them 
in  the  Chronological  conspectus,  a  table  by  which  the 
years  of  the  different  volumes  can  be  found. 

97.  Poole's  index  to  periodical  literature,    [1815- 
1899.]    Abridged  ed.  Boston,  Houghton,  1901. 

—First       supplement,       1900-1904.       Boston, 
Houghton,  1905. 

The  abridged  edition  indexes  in  two  volumes  37  of 
the  most  frequently  used  periodicals. 

98.  Readers'  guide  to  periodical  literature,   1900- 
date.     N.  Y.  Wilson,  1905-date. 

V.I,  1900-1904;  v.2,  1905-1909;  v.3,  1910-1914,  v.4, 
1915-1918,  v,5,  1919-1921.  Continued  by  monthly 


72 


MAGAZINES  AND  INDEXES  99 

numbers  cumulating14  at  set  periods  during  the  year,  at 
the  end  of  the  year,  and  triennially.  An  index  to  general 
magazines,  some  U.  S.  government  publications,  and  re- 
ports of  associations.  V.2-3,  1905-1914,  also  index  many 
books  of  essays,  travel,  lectures,  etc.,  published  since 
1900. 

Arranged  alphabetically  by  author  and  subject,  some- 
times title.  Uniform  subject  headings  and  numerous 
cross-references.  Information  given  in  the  magazine 
references :  title  of  the  article,  author's  name  if  known, 
abbreviated  title  of  the  periodical,  volume,  inclusive  page 
reference,  and  exact  date.  Illustrations  and  portraits 
are  indicated  by  il  and  por.  An  alphabetical  list  of  per- 
iodicals indexed,  with  the  abbreviations  used  for  them, 
is  in  the  front  of  each  volume  or  number;  and  a  list  of 
books  indexed,  arranged  alphabetically  by  authors' 
names,  is  in  the  front  of  v.2-3. 

99.  International  index  to  periodicals,  1920-date. 
N.Y.  Wilson,  1921-date. 

Indexes  American  and  foreign  periodicals  pertain- 
ing chiefly  to  the  humanities  and  science  which  are  not 
indexed  in  Readers'  guide.  Issued  five  times  yearly  with 
annual  volumes  supplemented  by  cumulative  numbers. 
Arrangement  and  information  given  similar  to  Readers' 
guide.  Preceded  by  Readers'  guide  to  periodical  litera- 
ture: Supplement,  v.l,  1907-1915  (indexing  also  55 
books)  ;  v.2,  1916-1919. 

14  That  is,  the  entries  in  several  numbers  are  collected  together  and  re- 
issued in  one  alphabet. 


73 


A  SPECIMEN  PAGE  FROM  POOLE'S  INDEX  TO 
PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 

(By  permission  of  the  publishers,  Houghton,  Mifflin  and  company.) 
SOUTHERN  639  SPANISH 


Southern  Empire,  Morton  on.    (W.  D.  Fonlke)  Dial 

(Ch.)  14=  "4. 
Southern  Pacific  Railroad.    (F.  Stratton)  Cosmopol. 

15:  280. 

—  Overland  by.    (F.  C.  W.  Harbour)  Chant.  15:  391. 
Southern  Magazine,  Making  a.'    Southern  M.  5:  50. 
Southard,  Milton  I.,  with  portrait.    Nafl  M.  (N.  Y. 

•91)  17:'  279. 

Southey,  Robert.  (Oeo.  Saintsbury)  Macmil.  71:  346. 
Same  art.  Eel.  M.  124:  779.  Same  art.  Liv.  Age, 
205:  67.  — (Mary  C.  Agnew)  Temp.  Bar,  107: 
"4. 

—  Letter  by.    National,  19:  704. 

—  Letters.    Sat.  R.  79:  486. 

—  Life  and  Correspondence.    Eng.  R.  15*  77. 

—  ten  Letters  to.    (S.  T.  Coleridge)  Allan.  73:  57. 
"Southward  Ho  !  "  a  story.     Temp.  Bar,  102:  229. 
Southwark.     Walford's  Antiq.  1 :  132. 

Southwell,    Father,    the    Euphuist.      (H.    Thurston) 

Month,  83:  231,  383. 

Southwell  Minster.     Walford's  Antiq.  6:  49. 
Southwest,  Flora  of;   a  Characteristic  Plant  Group. 

(H.  L.  Clarke)  Pop.  Sci.  Mo.  43:  786. 
Southwold,   Eng.     (E.   B.  Brown)    Eng.    Illust.   10. 

4°5. 
Southworth,  Mrs.  E.   D.  E.  N.,  with  portrait.    Bk. 

News,  9=  66. 
Sovereign,  State,  Government:  a  Triad  of  Political 

Conceptions.    (C.  M.  Platt)  Pol.  Sci.  Q.  10:  292. 
Sovereignty,  Austin's  Theory  of.     (J.  Uewey)  Pol.  Sci. 

Q.  9:  3'- 

—  Jean  Bodin  and  Hobbes  on.     (W.  A.  Dunning)  Pol. 

Sci.  Q.  ii,:  82. 
Sowers,  The ;  a  story.     (H.  S.  Merriman)  Cornh.  71 : 

1-561.    72:  53-64'. 
Sown  on  Sand  ;  a  story.     (C.  E.  Morland)  Belgra.  78: 

94,  holiday  no. 
Space,  and  Time  as  Mere  Ideas.    (P.  Carus)  Open 

Court,  3:  1600. 

—  Curvature  of.    (J.  Dolman,  jr.)  New  Sci.  R.  2:  31. 

—  Four-fold,  Realization  of.    (T.  P.  Hall)  Science,  19: 

272. 

—  Geometric  and  Actual.     (J.   Delbcsnf)   Monist,  4: 

248. 

—  Homogeneous  Division  of.    Nature,  49:  445,  469. 

—  Infinity  of.     Cliamb.  J.  71:  647. 

—  Interstitial.      (T.  D.  Paret)  J.  Frankl.  Inst.  140: 

117. 

—  Perceptions  of,  Experiments  in.      (J.   H.   Hyslop) 

Psycholog.  R.  i:  257,  581. 

—  Problem  of  the  Three  Dimensions  of.     (P.  Carus) 

Open  Court,  7:  3720. 

—  Tactual  Estimation  of.    (G.  S.  Parrish)  Am.  J.  Psy- 

—  Visual  Perception  of.    (E.  C.  Sanford)  Am.  J.  Psy- 

chol.  6:  593. 
Space-Sense.  ,   (A.  E.  Segsworth)  Am.  J.  Psychol.  6: 

369. 
Space-threshold,  Perception  of  Two  Points  not  the.  (G. 

Tawney)  Psychol.  R.  2:  585. 
Spain.    Along  the  Spanish  Highways.  (H.  Lynch)  Good 

Words,  35-  <>6 1. 

—  and  the  Jacobites.    (Benjamin  Taylor)  Scot.  R.  27: 

253. 

—  and  1  he  Spaniards.     Eng.  R.  7:   i. 

—  The  Artist  in.     (A.  Griffiths)  M.  of  Art,  4:  26. 

—  Artistic,  as  Shown  by   Kerr  Lawson.    (G.  White) 


—  Church  in,  Meyrick  on.     (W.  Webster)  Acad.  41: 


—  Church  of.    Eng.  R.  18:  55. 

—  Colonies  of.    Spec.  74:  453. 


Spain,  Diercks's  Geschichte    Spaniens.     (B.  Moses) 
Am.  Hist.  R.  1 :  523. 

—  Economic  Condition  of,  in  the  16th  Century.    (B. 

Moses)  J.  Pol.  Econ.  i:  513. 

—  History  of,  Burke's.    Ed.  R.  182:  271.  —  (R.  Lodge) 

Eng.  Hist.  R.  n:  537. 

-  Holy  Week  in.    Cath.  World,  58:  840. 

—  Iberian  Peninsula.    Chamb.  J.  70:  609. 

—  In  Distressful.    Chamb.  J.  73:  513. 

—  in  the  15th  Century.    (B.  0.  Flower)  Arena,  13:  192. 

—  Jews  in,  MS.  Sources  of  History  of.  (J.  Jacobs)  Jew. 

Q.  6:  597. 

—  Memorial  of  Lord  Burghley  on  Peace  with  Spain. 

1588.    (W.  F.  Tilton)  Am.  Hist.  R.  1 :  490. 

—  Memories  of.    (G.  E.  Vincent)  Chaut.  15:  529. 

—  Midsummer  in  Southern.     (E.  R.  Pennell)  Cent.  30: 

643. 

—  A  Night  and  a  Day  in.     (M.  C.  Harris)  Allan.  78: 

647. 

—  Northern,  Fueros  of.    (W.  T.  Strong)  Pol.  Sci.  Q.  8: 

3'7. 

—  On  the  Trail  of  Don  Quixote.    (A.  F.  Jaccaci)  Sorib. 

M.  20:  135,  481. 

—  People  of.     Leis.  Hour,  43:  457,  600. 

—  Protestanls  in.  Proposed  Episcopate  for.    Church  Q. 

38:  283. 

-  Relation  of,  lo  her  Government.     (L.  Williams)  No. 

Am.  163:  634. 

—  Romance    of.     (C.  W.  Wood)  Argosy,  59:  78-698. 

60:  65-706. 

—  Secrets  from  the  Court  of.    New  R.  10:  529,  662. 

II :  35-594. 

—  Statesmen  of.     Liv.  Age,  194:  294. 

—  Summer  Resorts-in,  Lesser.   (W.  H.  Bishop)  Nation, 

61:  254. 

—  Thealres  and  Actors  in.    (D.  del  Toboso)  No.  Am. 

158:  628. 

-  Tour  in.    (L.  M.  R.  Walker)  Belgra.  77:  28. 

•-  Twenty  Years  of  Modern  Monarchy  in.   (C.  Benoist) 
Chant.  20:  yo. 

—  Up  Gibraltar  f  to  Tangier  ;  into  Spain.     (L.  R.  Gia- 

cey)  Chaut.  17:  515. 

—  Vignettes  in.    (H.  R.  Hnweis)  Contemp.  61 :  732. 

Same  art.  Eel.  M.  118:  852 


Quar.  182:  483, 

—  Weal"  Coasl  of,   and  Wrecks.     (R.  Beynon)  LeU. 

Hour,  42:  335. 

—  Wild,  Chapman's.    Nature,  47:  583. 

Spalato,  Diocletian's  Palace  at.'    (P.  Fitzgerald)  Gent. 

M.  n.  s.  53:  266. 

Spangohte.     (A.  H.  Miers)  Nature.  48:  426. 
Spaniard,  Evolution  of  the.     (H.  C.  Chatfield-Taylor) 

Cosmopol.  21 :  238. 
Spanish  America,  Descriptive  Topographical  Terms  of. 

(R.  T.  Hill)  Nat.  Geog.  M.  7:  291. 
Spanish-American   Families,  Our.      (H.   E.    Bandini) 

Overland,  n.  s.  26:  9. 
Spanish-American    Literature :    Antologia    de   Poetns 

Hispano-Americanos.     (A.  R.  Marsh)  Nation,  60: 

'6,  33- 

Spanish-Arabian  Dames.     (A.  GranO  Time,  19:  295. 
Spanish  Armada.    Quar.  182:   i.  -  Ed.  R.  181:  59. 

—  and  Turkey.    (E.  Pears)  Enr.  Hist.  R.  8:  439. 

—  Defeal  of.     (W.  F.  Tilton)  Allan.  76:  771. 

—  Froude  on.     Ath.  '92,  i:  625.  —  (M.  A.  S.  Hume) 

Eng.  Hist.  R.  7:  567. 

—  Spanish  Story  of,  Froude's.    Sat.  R.  73:  573. 

—  State  Papers  relating  to,  ed.  by  Laughton.     Sat.  R. 

78:   41  (.     79:   387. 
Spanish  Art  at  the  New  Gallery.    Am.  Arch.  51 :  88, 

115,  131!  —  (E.  R.  Pennell)  Nation,  62:  51. 
Spanish  Ballad-poetry.    Spec.  72:  169,  233. 


Copyright,  1897,  by  William  I.  Fletcher  and  Franklin  O.  Poole 

74 


A  SPECIMEN  PAGE  FROM  THE  READERS'  GUIDE  TO 
PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 

1838  READERS'  GUIDE  TO 


Spain — Description  and   travel— Continued 
Pluntiermgs   from    Spain.   C     Bill,    il   House    B 
42  137-40  As    17 

Economic  conditions 

Nation  that  hoaids  and  starves.  Survey  40. 
319  Je  15  18. 

Education 
Sec  Education — Spain 

Finance 
See  Finance — Spain 

Foreign   relations 

Spanish-Portuguese  union  map  R  of  Us  51 
050-60  N  16 

Great  Britain 

Spain  and  Gibraltar  J  de  Armas.  Quar  230' 
1S2  9  Jl  18,  Same  Liv  Age  29S.577-S.:  S  7 
'18 

United  Staid 

United  States  and  Spain  in  1S22  \V  S  Rol.grt- 
son  Am  Uist  It  20  7bl-SuO  Jl  10 

History 

Characteristics  of  the  Spaniard  H.  VV  Dres- 
ser Home  Prog  5  149-51  D  15 

Expulsion  of  the  Moors.  H  W.  Dresser  Home 
Prog  5  157-60  D  15 

In  memory  of  a  palace.  M.  L.  Woods.  Fortn 
109  723-30  My  18 

Spain  at  the  height  of  power  H.  W.  Dresser. 
Home  Prog  0  101-7  D  15 

With  the  Moors  in  Andalusia.  C.  U  Clark. 
tl  Art  and  Archacol  1.228-40  My  '15 

European  uar.  19H- 
Scc  European  wai — Spain 

National  characteristics 
.Vic-  National  characteristics,  Spanish 

Navy 
First  Spanish  submarine    Sci  Am  S  50:229  O 

9  '15 

Rebuilding  the  Spanish  navy.  R  of  Rs  58:199- 
200  Ag  '18 

Politics  and  government 
Elements  of   future  Spain    S.   de   Madariaga. 

Contemp  113  527-32  My  '18 
German   myth   in   Spain    S.    Griffith.   Outlook 

116  364-5  Jl  4  '17 
New  Spanish  cabinet    Outlook  116  55-6  My  9 

Plight  of  Spam.  E  J  Dillon  19th  Cent  83 
3S6-402  F  '18 

Spain  and  the  great  war  T.  H.  Pardo  de 
Tavera.  Cent  95  300-5  Ja  MS 

Spain  in  the  world's  debate.  A.  F  Bell  Con- 
temp  112  264-9  S  17.  Same  Liv  Age  295 
335-40  N  10  '17 

Spain's  homo  war  S  de  Madai  laga.  Con- 
temp  1H  380-0  O  '18 

Religious  history 

Cardinal  of  Spain.  A    T    Sadlier.  Calh  World 
106  633-45  F  '18 
See  also  Inquisition 

Social  conditions 

Dolores,  vendor  of  snails.  C.  M.  Goethe,  il 
Survey  37  15-19  O  7  '16 

Social   life  and  customs 
Sec  Bullfights 

Strikes 

Sec   Strikes— Spain 
Spain  and  the  United  States 
Spain    turns    to    America.    S.    Crillith.    Nation 

104.392-3  Ap  5  '17 
Spalatro,  Italy 

Architecture 
Palace  of  Diocletian.   F:   Lees,   il   plans  Aich 

Rcc  40:549-57  D  '1C. 
Spalding,  Albert 
Tuntail  America.  Wom.tn's   II  C  44:13   F  '17. 

Same  cond.  Musician  22:332  My  '17 
Albert  Spaldmg.  and  his  violins.  Musician  22. 

704  S   '17 
Fighting  v:olini:,t.  Outlook  117:279  O  24  '17 


Portrait     Outlook    117.293    O    21    '17;    Lit    Dl- 

Kcst   55:36   D    29    '17 
Violinist    and  a  congressman,   por  Lit  Digest 

58  27-8  Jl   13   '18 
Spalding,  Albert  Goodwill 

Hold   Spuldmjj  up.    Lit  Digest  51  .682  S  25  '15 
Spalding,  H.  G. 
International    pavedway     Am    City    (T   and    C 

ed)    13  2S7-S  O    15 
Spnltiing.  H.  S. 
Endowment  of  men  and  endowment  of  money. 

Educ   l<  52.  392-  102  N     1C 
Ellllcu  anil  ihc  nco-Mallhusiamsm.  Am  J  Soc 

22  009-15    Mr  '17 

Spalding,    John    Lancaster,    archbishop 
Aichbisliup  SiiuUlmg    Outlook  114.12  £>  6  '16 
Sketch.    Educ  K  02  J17   O    16 
Spalding,  Volney  Morgan 

Dedication  of  a  tablet  in  honor  of  Professor 
Volney    M.    Spalding.    Science    n   s   44:914-1:. 
D  29  '16 
Spalding,  Walter  Raymond 

Music  a  necessary  part  of  the  soldier's  eQulp- 

mtnt    Outlook  119.223-5  Je  5  'IS 
War  in  its  relation  to  American  music.  Mus 

Q   4:1-11   Ja   '18 

Work  of  the  music  school  settlement  in 
Americanizing  its  pulrons.  Musician  23.533 
Ag  '18 

Spangler,   Colin    Irving 
Frame-up  or  squaru  deal?  Sunset  38.28-9  My 

Spaniels 
Color  in  cockers.  J.  Watson.  Country  Life  27: 

57  F  '15 

Sp.imsn    America.    See    Latin    America 
Spanish-American    literature 

C|UM>IC  literature  of  Colombia.  R  of  Us  50  95 
J.i  '17,  Same  n  liul  1'au  Am  Union  44.341-5 
Mr  '17 

Moilci  mala  movement  in  Spanish  American 
literature  A  Cocslcr  Bui  Tail  Am  Union 
44  173-7  F  '17 

.Sec  also  Almafuerte,  pseud  ,  Rodo,  J.  E. 
Spanish-  American   poetry 
Of  Latin  American  poetry.  S.  de  la  Sclva.  Pan 

Am  M  26.  145-7  Ja  '!!> 
Pan-Aiiieiican  literary   meeting  in  New   York. 

Pan  Am   M   21  20:<-11   F  '17 
Some  poets  of  Chile.  L.  E.  Klhott.  Pan  Am  M 

26  04-7   D  '17 

Spanish-American    war.     See     United     States- 
History—  Spanish-American   war.    1898-1899 
Spanish  architecture.  See  Architecture,  Spanish 
Spanish  armada.  See  Armada,  1588 
Spanish    art.     See   Alt,   Spai   sh 
Spanish  cedar.  See  Cedar  trees 
Spanish  doubloons;  novel.  See  Kenyon,  Camilla 

E.  L. 
Spanish  elopement,  story.  K.  L.   Bates.  Harper 

130  522-0  Mr  '15 
Spanish  fiction 

Spain's    war-time    fiction.    Lit    Digest    50  1103 

My  15  '15 
Spanish  fiction  in  the  United  States.  R.  Jaen. 

Nation  106:261  Mr  7  '18 
Spanish  influenza.    See  Influenza 
Spanish   inquisition.  See  Inquisition 
Spanish  language 

Study  and   teaching 

Readjustment    of    language    teaching.    J.    T. 

Arntz,  jr.  School  and  Soc  7.769-72  Je  29  'lg 

Scientific  teaching  of  Spanish  and  other  lan- 

guages.     H.    E.   Card,     liul   Pan  Am   Union 

•13:197-503  O  '17 

Spanish  in  American  universities.  School  and 

Soc  4.G27-S  O  21  '10 
Touchers  of  Spanish  needed  in  New  York  high 

schools.  Bui  Pan  Am  Union  45:3S5-9  S  '17 
Spanish  literature 

Importance  of  Spanish  to  the  American  citi- 
zen J  D.  Fitzgerald.  Bui  Pan  Am  Union 
47.363-74  S  '18 


.- 

Mediaeval  Spanish  allegory,  by  C.  R.  Post.  Re- 
view. Nation  lul:779-81  D  30  '16 


75 


100-102       GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

100.  Magazine  subject-index,  a   subject-index  to 
seventy-nine  American  and  English  periodicals.    Boston, 
Boston  book  co.  1908,  v.l. 

Annual  magazine  subject  index  for  1908-date.  Bos- 
ton, Boston  book  co.  1909-date. 

V.I,  which  was  published  in  1908  and  indexes  some 
periodicals  from  their  first  numbers  and  others  only  for 
the  year  1907,  has  for  an  annual  continuation  or  supple- 
ment the  Annual  magazine  subject-index.  Specializes  in 
history,  travel,  and  fine  arts.  Indexes  the  less  familiar 
American  and  English  magazines  and  publications  of  so- 
cieties, most  of  which  are  not  indexed  in  the  other  period- 
ical indexes.  Entries  are  under  subject,  exclusive  of  fic- 
tion by  prominent  writers  and  continued  stories,  which 
are  entered  under  the  name  of  the  author.  Other  fiction 
is  not  indexed.  Information  given  in  the  references : 
title  of  the  article,  author's  name  if  known,  title  of  the 
magazine  abbreviated,  volume,  inclusive  page  reference, 
and  exact  date.  Illustrations  and  portraits  are  indicated. 
In  the  front  of  each  volume  is  an  alphabetical  list  of 
periodicals  indexed  with  the  abbreviations  used  for  them. 
Commencing  with  1909  the  Dramatic  index  is  included 
as  part  2  of  the  Annual  magazine  subject-index.  For 
description  of  the  Dramatic  index  see  section  103. 

101.  Special  indexes. — There  are  several  indexes 
devoted  to  specific  subjects  which  are  a  valuable  aid  to 
the  specialist.    These  are  useful  to  others  when  the  ma- 
terial wanted  is  not  found  in  the  general  periodical  in- 
dexes. 

102.  Book  review  digest,  1905-date.  N.  Y.  Wilson, 
1905-date.     For  description  see  section  262. 

76 


MAGAZINES  AND  INDEXES  103-104 

103.  Dramatic  index,   1909-date.    Boston,  Boston 
book  co.  1910-date. 

Annual  volumes.  Published  as  part  2  of  the  Annual 
magazine  subject-index  and  also  issued  separately.  An 
index  to  illustrations  and  articles  about  dramas,  drama- 
tists, players,  and  the  theater  appearing  in  American  and 
English  periodicals,  as  well  as  to  texts  of  plays.  Ar- 
ranged alphabetically  by  subject.  Information  given  in 
the  references:  title  of  the  article,  author's  name  if 
known,  title  of  the  magazine  abbreviated,  volume,  in- 
clusive page  reference,  and  exact  date.  If  an  article  is 
less  than  one  page  in  length  a  fraction  is  used  after  the 
page  number  to  indicate  the  article's  approximate  length. 
Alphabetical  list  of  periodicals  indexed  and  abbreviations 
used  for  them  is  in  the  front  of  each  volume.  A  quar- 
terly continuation  of  the  Dramatic  index  is  in  the  Bulletin 
of  bibliography. 

104.  Industrial  arts  index,  1913-date.    N.  Y.  Wil- 
son, 1914-date. 

Annual  volumes,  1913-1917,  two  year  volumes,  1918- 
1919  and  1920-1921,  supplemented  by  numbers  cumulat- 
ing during  the  year,  annually,  and  biennially.  Indexes 
engineering,  business,  and  trade  periodicals,  some  publi- 
cations of  the  federal  government,  and  occasionally  pam- 
phlets dealing  with  industrial  topics.  Arranged  alphabet- 
ically by  subject.  Information  given  in  the  periodical 
references:  title  of  the  article,  author's  name  if  known, 
title  of  magazine  abbreviated,  volume,  inclusive  page  ref- 
erence, and  exact  date.  Illustrations  and  diagrams  are 
indicated  by  il  and  diag  or  diags.  Alphabetical  list  of 
publications  indexed,  with  abbreviations  used  for  them, 

77 


105-107       GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

is  in  the  front  of  each  volume  or  number.  Valuable  for 
engineering,  electrical  appliances,  chemistry,  business, 
printing  and  textiles. 

105.  Engineering  index  annual,   1906-date.    N.  Y. 
Engineering  magazine,  1907-18;  American  society  of  me- 
chanical engineers,  1919-date. 

For  description  see  section  335. 

106.  Agricultural  index,  1916-date.   N.  Y.  Wilson, 
1919-date. 

For  description  see  section  294. 

107.  Suggestions  about  the  use  of  magazine  in- 
dexes.— Inability  to  find  material  through  the  periodi- 
cal indexes  is  often  due  to  haphazard  methods  of  work- 
ing, the  omission  of  volumes  which  should  have  been 
examined,  and  the  failure  to  follow  up  cross-references. 
Consideration  of  a  subject's  limitations  with  respect  to 
period  of  time,  then  a  systematic  order  of  consulting  the 
indexes,  and  accurate  copying  of  the  needed  references 
when  found  saves  confusion,  and  gives  the  reader  the  feel- 
ing that  he  has  exhausted  the  resources  of  the  magazine 
indexes. 

The  use  of  Poole's  index,  1802-1900,  and  Readers' 
guide,  1900-date,  will  probably  be  sufficient  for  ordinary 
purposes,  but  as  regards  topics  covered  by  a  special  index, 
turn  to  that  for  a  more  thorough  treatment.  If  the  sub- 
ject to  be  investigated  extends  over  a  long  period  of 
years,  begin  with  the  most  recent  number  or  volume 
and  work  back;  or  else,  starting  from  the  earliest  date 
that  articles  on  the  subject  may  have  been  published, 
work  forward  in  chronological  order.  Thus  for  magazine 

78 


MAGAZINES  AND  INDEXES  107 

references  on  the  Origin  and  influence  of  the  Monroe 
doctrine,  a  topic  which  covers  the  period  from  1823-date, 
use  Pools' s  index,  1802-1900,  and  Readers'  Guide,  1900- 
date,  working  forward  or  backward  in  order  of  time  to 
avoid  the  possibility  of  omitting  any  volumes  or  numbers 
of  these  periodical  indexes.  In  looking  for  material  on  a 
subject  which  pertains  to  a  brief  term  of  years  or  a  single 
year,  such  as  the  Coal  strike  of  1919,  consult  the  peri- 
odical index  which  covers  that  period  or  year,  in  this  case, 
Readers'  guide,  1919-1921.  If  more  specialized  articles 
are  needed  consult  the  Industrial  arts  index. 

For  each  reference  copy  the  name  of  the  magazine, 
its  volume,  page,  and  date  if  given,  also  the  title  of  the 
article,  and  the  author's  name  if  included.  The  maga- 
zines in  the  library  are  listed  in  the  card  catalog. 


79 


108 


CHAPTER    XII 

ENCYCLOPEDIAS,  ANNUAL  CYCLOPEDIAS, 
AND  ALMANACS 

108.  If  one  desires  to  secure  on  short  notice  con- 
densed authoritative  information  on  any  subject  except 
one  of  slight  importance,  very  recent  development,  or  ex- 
treme technicality,  he  can  find  it  in  many  cases  by  con- 
sulting one  of  the  standard  general  encyclopedias.  Not 
only  are  the  most  important  articles  written  by  specialists, 
but  all  of  the  material  is  'carefully  edited  so  as  to  include 
only  reliable  and  up-to-date  information.  Most  encyclo- 
pedias of  the  present  time  have  also  good  illustrations, 
maps,  and  bibliographies.  Finally,  their  information  is 
made  readily  accessible  by  means  of  alphabetical  arrange- 
ment, cross  references,  and  indexes. 

There  are  two  types  of  encyclopedias :  one  of  them 
arranges  material  under  broad  topics ;  e.g.  treating  mer- 
chantmen, torpedo  boats,  battleships,  submarines,  all  in 
one  article  on  Ships ;  while  the  other  devotes  a  separate 
article  to  each  smaller  topic  so  that. the  information  is  scat- 
tered through  the  encyclopedia  under  different  headings : 
Merchantmen,  Torpedo  boats,  Battleships,  Submarines, 
etc.  The  first  type  requires  a  minute  index  which  will 
indicate  what  article  contains  the  topic  wanted ;  the  second 
needs  "see  also  references"  so  that  all  the  data  on  the 
broader  subject  may  be  collected  by  the  reader.  The 
Encyclopaedia  Britannica  is  an  example  of  the  first  type, 
and  the  New  international  encyclopaedia  of  the  second. 

80 


ENCYCLOPEDIAS  109 

109.  Encyclopaedia  Britannica.  llth  ed.  Cam- 
bridge, Eng.  University  press,  1910-11.  29v. 

-  the  new  volumes  constituting,  in  com- 
bination with  the  twenty-nine  volumes  of  the  eleventh 
edition,  the  twelfth  edition.  London,  Encyclopaedia 
Britannica  co.  1922.  3v.  (In  the  eleventh  edition  v.30- 
32). 

A  comprehensive  summary  of  arts,  sciences,  literature, 
and  general  information,  international  in  scope,  though 
British  in  point  of  view.  The  longer  articles  aim  to 
present  a  thorough  elucidation  of  the  subjects  treated; 
consequently  they  are  quite  as  valuable  to  the  scholar  and 
specialist  as  to  the  general  reader.  They  are  signed  by 
the  initials  of  their  authors,  the  full  names  being  listed 
in  the  front  of  each  volume,  and  they  include  well  se- 
lected bibliographies,  sometimes  listed  at  the  ends  of  sec- 
tions as  well  as  at  the  ends  of  the  complete  articles.  Illus- 
trations and  maps  are  closely  related  to  the  text  and  are 
of  excellent  quality.  Pronunciation  is  not  indicated.  Ar- 
rangement is  alphabetical  by  letters.  The  broad  scope  of 
the  individual  articles  and  the  lack  of  cross-references 
make  it  often  necessary  to  use  the  Index  in  v.29.  This 
includes  cross-references,  analyzes  the  contents  of  the 
encyclopedia  minutely,  and  refers  definitely  by  means 
of  numbers  and  the  letters,  a,  b,  c,  d,  to  the  volume,  page, 
and  part  of  page  on  which  information  is  given;  e.g. 
25-187a  means  v.25,  p.  187,  upper  half  of  first  column, 
while  25-187d  means  the  lower  half  of  the  second  col- 
umn on  the  same  page. 

The  first  edition  was  published  1768-71  in  Scotland. 
The  ninth  edition,  published  1875-89,  contains  mono- 
graphs which  continue  to  be  of  considerable  value.  The 

81 


110  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

tenth  edition  was  only  a  supplement  to  the  ninth.  The 
eleventh  edition  contains  entirely  new  material,  arranged 
to  fit  the  requirements  of  the  modern  public,  with  such 
use  of  the  ninth  edition  as  any  treatises  on  the  subjects 
included  would  make. 

New  volumes  of  the  12th  edition  (following  llth 
edition  as  v.30-32)  deal  with  events  and  developments 
from  1910-1921.  Cross  references  to  volume  and  page 
of  the  treatment  of  the  subject  in  llth  edition  are  noted 
in  the  12th  at  the  beginnings  of  articles  on  such  subjects 
as  are  treated  in  both  editions,  e.g.  in  v.l  (or  v.30  of  the 
llth  ed.)  "ASTRONOMY  (see  2.800)"  refers  back  to 
the  article  on  astronomy  beginning  on  page  800  in  v.2  of 
the  llth  edition,  since  the  article  in  v.30  deals  only  with 
the  development  of  that  science  during  the  years  1910-21. 

110.  New  international  encyclopaedia.  2d  ed.  N.  Y. 
Dodd,  1914-16.  23v.  and  an  additional  v.  containing 
Courses  of  study  and  reading. 

Most  of  the  articles  are  shorter  and  the  technical  ones 
are  more  easily  understood  by  non-specialists  than  those 
in  the  Encyclopaedia  Britannic  a.  They  are,  however, 
written  by  authorities  and  are  usually  followed  by  very 
good  bibliographies.  None  of  the  articles  are  signed,  but 
in  the  front  of  each  volume  is  a  list  of  the  most  important 
articles  with  the  names  of  their  authors.  Pronunciation 
of  proper  names  is  given.  Arrangement  alphabetical  by 
letters  rather  than  words.  Many  excellent  illustrations, 
including  maps  and  reproductions  of  famous  paintings. 
Supplementai-y  volume  is  in  the  nature  of  a  classified 
index  to  the  encyclopedia,  grouping  the  titles  of  the  ar- 
ticles under  broad  subjects,  such  as  Religion,  Industrial 
chemistry,  Games  and  sports. 

82 


ENCYCLOPEDIAS  111-112 

111.  Encyclopedia  Americana.   N.  Y.  Encyclopedia 
American  corp.  1918-20.  30v. 

A  work  of  the  same  general  type  as  the  New  inter- 
national encyclopaedia  but  more  up-to-date.  Especially 
good  for  subjects  dealing  with  science,  business,  indus- 
tries, production,  government  and  other  phases  of  mod- 
ern life.  Important  articles  are  signed  in  full  and  some 
are  followed  by  bibliographies.  Very  good  text  illus- 
trations and  plates.  Physical  and  economic  as  well  as 
political  maps.  Indexes  of  the  counties  and  incorporat- 
ed cities,  towns,  and  villages  accompany  the  maps  of  the 
states  of  the  United  States. 

Difficulties  in  finding  material  in  the  work  arise  first, 
from  peculiarities  in  choice  of  headings,  with  a  tendency 
to  group  all  material  on  different  phases  of  a  country 
under  the  name  of  the  country  (e.g.  under  Great  Britain 
are  found  articles  with  such  varying  titles  as  Irish  his- 
tory, Parliament,  the  Church  of  England,  English  news- 
papers) secondly,  from  the  arrangement  of  headings  al- 
phabetically by  words  instead  of  letters  (e.g.  New  Castle, 
New  Zealand,  Newcastle)  and  thirdly  from  misleading 
cross  references.  The  Index  in  v.30  is  a  classified  list 
of  topics. 

112.  The  following  are  the  most  important  of  the 
foreign  encyclopedias: 

La  grande  encyclopedic.  Paris,  Lamirault,  1885-. 
1903.  31v. 

Larousse,  Pierre  Athanase.  Grand  dictionnaire  uni- 
versel.  Paris,  Larousse,  1866-90.  17v. 

Brockhaus'  konversations-lexikon.  14.aufl.  Leipzig, 
Brockhaus,  1901-04.  17v. 


83 


113  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Meyers  grosses  konversations-lexikon.  6.  neubearb. 
und  verm.  aufl.  Leipzig,  Bibliographisches  institut,  1902- 
13.  24v. 

Nuova  enciclopedia  italiana.     6.ed.     Torino,  Unione 
tipografico-editrice  Torinese,  1875-88.    25v.  in  26. 
— Supplemento.    1889-99.    5v.  in  6. 

Diccionario  enciclopedico  hispano-americano  de  liter- 
atura,  ciencias  y  artes.  Barcelona,  Montaner,  1887-1910. 
28v.  in  29. 

ANNUAL  CYCLOPEDIAS  AND  ALMANACS 

113.  Annual  cyclopedias  and  almanacs  may  be  con- 
sidered supplementary  to  encyclopedias  in  that  they  fur- 
nish more  recent  material  in  almost  as  wide  a  field.  Al- 
manacs, originally  planned  to  provide  calendars  and  other 
astronomical  data,  have  been  in  some  cases  much  expand- 
ed so  that  they  have  become  a  very  useful  source  of  up- 
to-date  information  in  the  way  of  statistics,  important 
laws,  events  of  the  year,  lists  of  government  and  society 
officials,  etc.  They  are  not,  however,  usually  considered 
so  authoritative  as  annual  cyclopedias,  because,  since 
they  are  published  the  first  of  January,  their  hasty  com- 
pilation gives  occasion  for  inaccuracies.  Annual  cyclo- 
pedias are  carefully  edited  and  issued  by  reliable  pub- 
lishers in  the  second  quarter  of  the  year. 

Only  the  latest  volume  of  an  almanac  is  needed  or- 
dinarily for  reference,  as  much  of  the  material  of  more 
than  ephemeral  usefulness  is  reprinted  from  year  to  year. 
The  annual  cyclopedias,  on  the  other  hand,  constitute  a 
very  good  summary  of  current  history  and  also  contain 
articles  by  specialists,  which  are  of  more  than  transitory 
interest.  Almanacs  bear  the  date  of  the  year  in  which 

84 


ENCYCLOPEDIAS  114-116 

they  are  published,  while  annual  cyclopedias  generally 
bear  the  date  of  the  year  preceding  their  publication  date. 
Hence,  for  an  event  or  law  of  1919  use  a  1920  almanac, 
but  a  1919  annual  cyclopedia. 

114.  New  international  year  book,  1907-date.  N.  Y. 
Dodd,  1908-date. 

Forms  an  annual  supplement  to  the  New  international 
encyclopaedia,  which  it  closely  resembles.  The  only  gen- 
eral year  book  that  is  illustrated. 

115.  Annual  register,  a  review  of  public  events  at 
home  and  abroad,  1758-date.    London,  Longmans,  1764- 
date. 

A  summary  of  history  for  the  year,  with  a  review 
of  literature,  science,  art,  drama,  music,  finance,  and  com- 
merce, mostly  of  England,  followed  by  reprints  of  a  few 
of  the  most  important  British  public  documents  and  an 
obituary  of  eminent  persons  deceased  in  that  year.  Ma- 
terial is  arranged  in  chapters,  since  1863  separating  Eng- 
lish from  foreign  and  colonial  history.  Each  volume  is 
in  two  parts,  with  different  pagings.  Subject  index  in 
the  back  of  each  volume,  as  well  as  a  general  index  cov- 
ering 1758  to  1819  in  a  separate  volume. 

116.  The  new  Hazell  annual  and  almanack,  1917- 
date.    London,  Frowde,  1917-date. 

Preceded  by  Hazell's  annual,  1886-1916.  Tables  and 
lists  of  many  kinds,  chiefly  applicable  to  Great  Britain, 
statistics  and  information  about  the  governments  of  all 
countries.  Progress  in  science,  art  and  literature  in  the 
preceding  year.  Table  of  contents  followed  by  minute 
index. 


85 


117-118        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

117.  Whitaker,  Joseph.  Almanack,  1869-date.  Lon- 
don, Whitaker,  1869-date. 

Similar  in  scope  to  Hazell.     Table  of  contents  fol- 
lowed by  minute  index. 

118.  The  American  almanacs  are  generally  more  re- 
stricted to  national  and  local  subjects  and  statistics  than 
the  British.     The  World  Almanac  and  Brooklyn  Eagle 
almanac  add  information  about  New  York  to  the  statis- 
tics, laws,  government  officials,  etc.  of  the  United  States, 
while  the  Chicago  Daily  news  almanac  in  like  manner 
is  a  source  of  information  about  Chicago  and  Illinois. 
Usually  the  index  in  these  almanacs  is  in  the  front  of  the 
book.     If  there  is  an  index  in  the  back  it  is  likely  to  be 
for  preceding  volumes  only. 


86 


119 


CHAPTER    XIII 
DICTIONARIES  OF  THE  ENGLISH  LANGUAGE 

119.  Encyclopedias  and  dictionaries  differ  from  each 
other  in  that  one  is  concerned  with  the  thing  which  the 
word  represents,  while  the  other  is  concerned  with  the 
word  itself.  In  an  encyclopedia  the  article  on  irrigation 
would  probably  treat  of  the  history  of  irrigation,  various 
methods  of  irrigation,  and  certain  definite  irrigation  pro- 
jects, whereas  in  a  dictionary  the  information  given 
would  include  the  spelling  and  derivation  of  the  word, 
how  it  should  be  pronounced  or  divided  into  syllables, 
and  the  various  meanings  it  may  have  or  have  had  in  the 
past.  That  is  to  say,  while  the  one  aims  to  cover  the 
whole  field  of  human  knowledge,  the  other  simply  treats 
of  words — their  meaning,  derivation,  spelling,  pronun- 
ciation, syllabication,  grammatical  usage,  and  so  on. 

The  present  day  unabridged  English  language  dic- 
tionaries often  contain  much  material  that  is  encyclo- 
pedic in  nature.  In  addition  to  the  ordinary  words  of  the 
language  they  include  proper  names,  foreign  words  and 
phrases,  slang,  colloquialisms,  obsolete  words,  abbrevia- 
tions and  arbitrary  signs.  They  also  have  rather  detailed 
explanations  and  elaborate  illustrations.  The  appendices 
found  in  such  quantities  in  older  dictionaries  are  almost 
entirely  lacking  in  the  more  recently  published  works,  the 
tendency  being  to  enter  the  words  in  their  alphabetical 
place  in  the  body  of  the  work. 

Following  are  listed  the  more  important  English  lan- 
guage dictionaries: 

87 


120-121        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

120.  Webster,  Noah.   Webster's  new  international 
dictionary  of  the  English  language,  based  on  the  Inter- 
national dictionary  of  1890  and  1900.    Springfield,  Mass. 
Merriam,  c!913  and  1918. 

Main  part  consists  of  the  usual  dictionary  material,  in- 
cluding also  foreign  phrases,  abbreviations  and  noted 
names  of  fiction.  Pages  are  divided:  upper  part  con- 
taining main  words  of  the  language;  lower  part,  in 
smaller  type,  containing  uncommon  and  obsolete  words, 
foreign  phrases,  abbreviations,  Christian  names,  noted 
names  in  literature,  and  in  general  those  words  which 
would  be  looked  for  less  frequently.  Appendix  contains 
Pronouncing  gazetteer,  Pronouncing  biographical  dic- 
tionary, Arbitrary  signs  used  in  writing  and  printing,  and 
a  Classified  selection  of  pictorial  illustrations.  In  the 
Addenda  (c!918) — just  preceding  the  main  vocabulary — 
are  listed  new  words  including  recent  war  terms.  For 
general  literary  purposes,  perhaps  the  most  useful  of  the 
dictionaries. 

In  the  "Reference  history  edition"  is  a  supplementary 
section  entitled  "Reference  history  of  the  world"  by  J.  C. 
Ridpath  and  H.  E.  Scudder,  revised  and  enlarged  by 
E.  A.  Grosvenor. 

121.  Funk  and  Wagnalls  new  standard  dictionary 
of  the  English  language.    N.  Y.  Funk,  c!913. 

All  the  information,  including  proper  names,  is  given 
in  one  alphabet,  with  the  exception  of  foreign  words  and 
phrases,  population  statistics,  simplified  spelling  rules, 
and  disputed  pronunciation,  which  are  in  an  appendix. 
Etymology  or  derivation  is  given  after  the  definition. 
Good  for  recent  scientific  and  technical  words  and  for  re- 
form spelling.  The  only  one  of  the  general  dictionaries 

88 


DICTIONARIES  122-123 

listed  which  includes  antonyms  as  well  as  synonyms.  A 
rival  to  Webster's  new  international  dictionary  in  popu- 
larity, less  conservative,  and  not  as  good  for  obsolete 
words,  though  perhaps  more  quickly  consulted  for  present 
day  meanings.  Differs  from  Webster's  and  the  Century 
in  the  arrangement  of  definitions  in  that  the  common 
meaning  of  the  word  is  given  first  and  then  the  literal 
or  original  meaning,  while  in  the  other  two  the  order  is 
reversed. 

A  subscription  edition  contains  an  appendix  "History 
of  the  world  day  by  day." 

122.  Century  dictionary  and  cyclopedia.   Rev.  and 
enl.  eel.  N.  Y.   Century  co.   c!911.    12v. 

V.I -10,  Dictionary;  v.ll,  Cyclopedia  of  proper  names; 
v.12,  Atlas.  Supplement  in  the  back  of  each  volume 
(except  v.12)  giving  new  words  and  phrases,  new 
meanings  of  old  words  and  extensions  of  old  defini- 
tions. An  asterisk  (*)  above  a  word  in  the  main  part 
refers  to  information  in  the  supplement.  In  using  this 
dictionary  it  should  be  remembered  that  it  is  often  neces- 
sary to  look  in  two  places  in  each  volume.  V.ll  includes 
proper  names  in  geography,  biography,  history,  literature, 
mythology  and  art  with  pronunciation  and  a  brief  char- 
acterization. Useful  in  identifying  a  person,  place  or  lit- 
erary work.  Contains  much  encyclopedic  material  and  is 
the  most  comprehensive  of  the  American  dictionaries. 

123.  Murray,  Sir  James  Augustus  Henry,  ed.  New 
English  dictionary  on  historical  principles.  Oxford,  Clar- 
endon press,  1888-  v.l- 

Not  yet  completed.  Aims  to  give  a  history  of  every 
word  in  the  English  language  for  the  last  800  years. 

89 


124-127        GUIDE  TO  TIIK  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Scholarly,  not  for  general  use.  Such  common  words  as 
"get"  and  "on"  have  several  pages  devoted  to  them. 
Consult  for  the  full  treatment  of  derivation,  changes  in 
meanings  and  spellings  and  for  obsolete  words. 
Many  quotations  illustrating  meanings  of  words  in  dif- 
ferent periods.  No  illustrations.  No  indication  as  to 
division  of  words  into  syllables.  Often  referred  to  as  the 
Oxford  dictionary,  Murray's  dictionary  or  the  N.E.D. 
(New  English  Dictionary). 

124.  Smaller  dictionaries  for  desk  use  are: 
Webster,  Noah.     Webster's  collegiate  dictionary.    3d 

ed.  of  the  Merriam  series.  Springfield,  Mass.  Merriam, 
1919. 

Desk  standard  dictionary  of  the  English  language. 
New  ed.  N.  Y.  Funk,  1919. 

Fowler,  Henry  Watson  and  Fowler,  F.  G.  Concise 
Oxford  dictionary  of  current  English.  Oxford,  Claren- 
don press,  1914. 

Winston  simplified  dictionary.  Philadelphia,  Winston, 
c!919. 

SYNONYM    DICTIONARIES 

125.  Although  synonyms  for  a  word  are  often  given 
in  the  language  dictionaries,  it  is  sometimes  convenient 
to  know  where  a  special  treatment  of  them  may  be  found. 

126.  Allen,    F.    Sturges.     Allen's    synonyms    and 
antonyms.    N.  Y.  Harper,  c!920. 

Words  listed  and  characterized  as  "affected",  "book- 
ish", "formal",  "rare",  etc. 

127.  Crabb,  George.    Crabb's  English  synonymes. 
Rev.  and  enl.    N.  Y.    Harper,  c!917.    (Centennial  ed.) 

90 


DICTIONARIES  128-132 

Contains  groups  of  words  similar  in  meaning,  fol- 
lowed by  a  discussion  which  gives  distinctions  in  meaning. 
Alphabetical  arrangement.  Cross  references  in  the  body 
of  the  work  make  an  index  unnecessary.  An  old  work ; 
the  first  edition  published  over  a  hundred  years  ago. 

128.  Fernald,  James  Champlin.   English  synonyms 
and  antonyms.   New  and  enl.  ed.  N.  Y.  Funk,  1914. 

Similar  to  Crabb's  English  synonyms  but  contains  an- 
tonyms, and  more  synonyms.  Index. 

129.  Soule,  Richard.    Dictionary  of  English  syno- 
nymes.    New  ed.,  rev.  and  enl.  by  G.  H.  Howison.    Bos- 
ton, Little,  c!891. 

A  full  list  of  synonyms  but  no  discriminations  nor 
definitions. 

130.  March,  Francis  Andrew  and  March,  F.  A.  jr. 

Thesaurus  dictionary  of  the  English  language.    Philadel- 
phia, Historical  publishing  co.,  c!902. 

Very  long  lists  of  nouns,  verbs,  adverbs,  adjectives 
and  phrases  for  general  ideas.  Synonyms  and  antonyms 
in  parallel  columns.  No  index,  but  many  cross-references. 
The  entry  "modern.  Not  ancient,  NOVELTY-ANTIQ- 
UITY" means  that  synonyms  for  modern  will  be  found 
under  novelty. 

131.  Roget,   Peter   Mark.    Thesaurus   of   English 
words  and  phrases.    New  ed.,  rev.  by  S.  R.  Roget.   N.  Y. 
Longmans,  1916. 

Ideas  for  which  synonyms  are  given  arranged  by 
classes,  not  alphabetically.  Very  extensive  index. 

132.  Mawson,     Christopher     Orlando     Sylvester. 

Standard  thesaurus  of  English  words  and  phrases.   N.  Y. 
The  Kelmscott  society,  c!911. 

91 


133-134        GUIDK  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Based  on  and  arranged  similarly  to  Roget's  Thesaurus. 
Also  published  under  the  title  "Roget's  Thesaurus  of 
English  words  and  phrases". 

RHYMING  DICTIONARIES 

133.  Lathrop,  Lorin  Andrews,  ed.    The  rhymers' 
lexicon,  comp.  and  ed.  by  Andrew  Loring  [pseud.]  Lon- 
don, Routledge,  [1905]. 

134.  Walker,   John.     Rhyming   dictionary   of   the 
English  language;  rev.  and  enl.  by  J.  Longmuir.  Lon- 
don, Routledge,  1904. 


92 


135-136 


CHAPTER    XIV 
BIOGRAPHY 

135.  The  reference  books  limited  to  biography  are 
collective  biographical  dictionaries  which  contain t  biog- 
raphies of  many  people  in  one  book  or  set  of  books.    The 
general  encyclopedias  are  useful  for  biography,  and  the 
cyclopedias  or  dictionaries  pertaining  to  special  subjects, 
e.g.  Grove's  Dictionary  of  music,  frequently  include  lives 
of  people  prominent  in  their  particular  fields.    Some  col- 
lections  of  biography  dealing  with  specific  subjects  or 
localities  are  kept  in  the  book  stacks,  but  they  are  listed 
in  the  card  catalog  under  the  subject;  e.g.  Scientists,  or 
Maine — Biography.   Magazines  sometimes  contain  excel- 
lent biographical  accounts  which  are  written  in  a  more 
interesting  style  than  the  articles  in  reference  books,  and 
are  valuable  for  supplementing  them.     The  most  exten- 
sive treatment  of  a  very  famous  person's  life,  however, 
is  in  the  individual  biographies  kept  in  the  book  stacks 
and  found  through  the  card  catalog.     For  the  sort  of 
subject  heading  used  for  individual  biography  see  sec- 
tion 41. 

136.  Thomas,  Joseph.   Universal  pronouncing  dic- 
tionary of  biography  and  mythology.    New  4th  ed.  thor- 
oughly rev.     Philadelphia,  Lippincott,  1915. 

A  general  biographical  dictionary  containing  brief  ar- 
ticles on  eminent  persons,  also  mythological  characters. 
Pronunciation  of  names  is  indicated.  Arranged  alpha- 
betically. Usually  referred  to  as  Lippincott's  Biograph- 
ical dictionary. 

93 


137-138        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

137.  Dictionary  of  national  biography;  ed.  by  Les- 
lie Stephen  and  Sidney  Lee.     N.  Y.  Macmillan,   1885- 
1900.    63v. 

— Supplement;  ed.  by  Sidney  Lee.   N.  Y.  Mac- 
millan, 1901.    3v. 

—Index  and  epitome ;  ed.  by  Sidney  Lee.  N.Y. 
Macmillan,  1903. 

—Errata.    N.  Y.  Macmillan,  1904. 

— Second  supplement;  ed.  by  Sir  Sidney  Lee. 
N.Y.  Macmillan,  1912.     3v. 

— Second  supplement;  index  and  epitome;  ed. 
by  Sir  Sidney  Lee.     N.  Y.  Macmillan,  1913. 

Biographies  of  famous  people  of  the  British  Empire 
who  are  not  living.  Long  articles  signed  by  initials 
which  are  explained  in  the  front  of  each  volume.  The 
bibliographical  references  at  the  ends  of  the  articles 
are  an  important  feature.  Alphabetical  arrangement. 
The  first  supplement  contains  biographies  accidentally 
omitted  from  the  main  part,  and  biographies  of  persons 
who  died  too  late  to  be  included  in  the  main  work.  The 
second  supplement  includes  biographies  of  persons  who 
died  between  Jan.  22,  1901  and  Dec.  31,  1911.  One  index 
and  epitome  to  the  main  part  and  the  first  supplement, 
and  another  to  the  second  supplement  contain  concise 
summaries  of  the  biographies  and  references  to  the  vol- 
umes and  pages  where  the  articles  in  full  are  given. 

138.  Appleton's    cyclopaedia    of    American    biog- 
raphy; ed.  by  J.  G.  Wilson  and  John  Fiske.    Rev.  ed. 
N.  Y.  Appleton,  1900.     7v.  in  6.' 

— v.8;   ed.   by  J.   E.   Homans.     N.   Y.    Press 
association  compilers,  1918. 

94 


BIOGRAPHY  139 

Biographies  of  prominent  Americans,  also  foreigners 
closely  connected  with  American  history.  Alphabetical 
arrangement,  except  when  several  members  of  one  fam- 
ily are  included  the  arrangement  is  by  priority  of  birth. 
A  list  of  the  authors  of  some  of  the  more  important  ar- 
ticles is  in  the  front  of  each  of  the  first  six  volumes.  In 
the  back  of  v.6  is  a  subject  and  personal  index  to  v.1-6. 
Names  which  are  the  titles  or  sub-titles  of  articles  are 
referred  to  in  this  index  only  when  they  appear  in  other 
articles.  V.7,  bound  with  v.6,  is  a  supplement  contain- 
ing biographies  of  additional  persons,  a  list  of  pen-names, 
nicknames,  and  sobriquets,  and  an  analytical  index  to  v.7. 
V.8,  a  supplementary  volume  including  recent  names,  is 
not  arranged  alphabetically  but  has  an  index.  V.9  has 
been  announced.  Many  portraits. 

139.  National  cyclopaedia  of  American  biography. 
N.  Y.  White,  1893-1921.  17v. 

A  conspectus  of  American  biography,  being 

an  analytical  summary  of  American  history  and  biog- 
raphy, containing  also  the  complete  indexes  of  the  Na- 
tional cyclopaedia  of  American  biography  (v.1-13).  N.  Y. 
White,  1906. 

Biographies  of  distinguished  people  of  the  U.  S.  The 
arrangement  is  not  alphabetical.  A  personal  index  and  a 
topical  index  to  v.1-13  are  in  the  volume  called  A  con- 
spectus of  American  biography,  which  also  contains  lists 
of  government  officials,  editors  of  magazines  and  news- 
papers, pseudonyms,  public  statues  in  the  U.  S.,  prom- 
inent Americans  grouped  professionally,  etc.  The  supple- 
ments, v.14-17,  include  additional  names  and  indexes. 
V.14  is  also  called  supplement  v.l.  A  revised  edition  of 
v.2  was  published  in  1921.  Numerous  portraits. 

95 


140-142        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

140.  Who's  who;  an  annual  biographical  diction- 
ary 1849-date.    London,  Black,  1849-date. 

Very  concise  biographical  information  about  prom- 
inent living  Englishmen  and  a  few  well  known  people 
of  other  nations.  Post-office  address  is  usually  given  for 
each  person.  Arranged  alphabetically.  A  companion 
volume  is  Who  was  who,  containing  the  biographies  of 
persons  no  longer  living,  who  were  formerly  listed  in 
Who's  who. 

141.  Who's  who  in  America,  a  biographical  dic- 
tionary of  notable  living  men  and  women  of  the  United 
States,  1899/1900-date.    Chicago,  Marquis,  1899-date. 

Published  every  two  years.  Very  brief  biographical 
facts  concerning  noteworthy  living  people  of  the  U.  S. 
Resembles  Who's  who  in  the  kind  of  information  given 
for  each  person.  Alphabetical  arrangement.  Beginning 
with  the  volume  for  1916/1917  the  pronunciation  of  the 
most  difficult  surnames  is  indicated  in  the  front.  In  a 
geographical  index  the  names  of  all  persons  included  in 
the  book  are  arranged  by  states  and  under  states  by 
towns. 

142.  A  few  of  the  other  books  on  the  "Who's  who" 
principle  are  as  follows: 

For  localities; 

Book  of  Chicagoans. 

Canadian  men  and  women  of  the  time. 

Chie?     (For  Italians). 

Qui  etes-vous?     (For  Frenchmen). 

Wer  ist's?     (For  Germans). 

Who's  who  in  New  York. 


96 


BIOGRAPHY  142 

For  special  classes  of  persons  or  professions; 
International  who's  who  in  music. 
Rus. 

Who's  who  in  science  (international). 
Who's  who  in  the  theater. 
Woman's  who's  who  of  America. 

Occasionally  a  Who's  who  is  included  in  yearbooks 
and  annuals  pertaining  to  special  subjects  or  countries, 
such  as  Who's  who  in  China,  in  the  China  year  book; 
and  Who's  who  in  art,  in  the  American  art  annual. 


143 


CHAPTER    XV 
GEOGRAPHY 

143.  Two*  important  reference  books  in  geography 
are  the  gazetteer  and  the  atlas.  The  former  is  a  geo- 
graphical dictionary  containing  in  alphabetical  order  de- 
scriptions of  the  countries,  places,  mountains,  rivers,  etc. 
of  the  world.  The  atlas  is  a  volume  of  maps.  The  gen- 
,  eral  atlas,  containing  modern  political  maps  showing  the 
present  boundaries  of  countries,  is  most  frequently  used 
for  finding  the  location  of  places.  If  the  index  is  very 
satisfactory  it  not  only  gives  the  number  of  the  map  but 
also  the  approximate  location  of  the  place  on  that  map 
by  means  of  letters  and  figures ;  e.g.  85B2.  Capital  let- 
ters are  placed  about  two  inches  apart  at  the  top  and 
bottom,  and  figures  at  the  left  and  right  of  each  map, 
or  vice-versa;  thus  fixing  the  location  of  a  certain  place 
within  a  small  square,  as  follows : 


X 


ABC 

85=map  number     B2=location  of  place  in  central  square. 

Books  of  travel  and  guide  books  which  include  de- 
scriptions of  places,  and  sometimes  maps,  are  entered  in 


98 


GEOGRAPHY  144-147 

the  card  catalog  under  the  name  of  the  place;  e.g. 
Alaska — Description  and  travel.  Separate  maps  are 
entered  under  subject  in  the  card  catalog;  e.g.  Chicago- 
Maps. 

144.  Lippincott's  new  gazetteer.   A  complete  pro- 
nouncing  gazetteer   or   geographical    dictionary    of   the 
world  .  .  .  ed.  by  Angelo  Heilprin  and  Louis  Heilprin. 
Philadelphia,  Lippincott,  c!922. 

First  edition  was  published  in  1855.  Brief  descrip- 
tions of  countries,  cities,  towns,  rivers,  mountains,  etc. 
of  the  world,  and  pronunciation  of  the  names.  Alpha- 
betical arrangement.  Statistics  of  population  for  the 
states,  counties,  cities,  etc.  of  the  U.  S.  according  to  the 
14th  census,  1920. 

145.  Mill,  Hugh  Robert,  ed.    International  geog- 
raphy.   N.  Y.  Appleton,  c!899. 

Chapters  on  general  geographic  subjects  as  well  as 
on  each  continent  and  country  by  prominent  geographic 
authorities.  Many  small  maps  and  diagrams.  Minute 
index. 

146.  Chisholm,  George  Goudie.  Handbook  of  com- 
mercial geography.  8th  ed.  London,  Longmans,  1918. 

For  various  commodities  such  as  wheat,  potatoes, 
wool,  rice,  spices,  furs,  coal,  copper,  paper,  glass,  soap, 
etc.  gives  the  conditions  or  history  of  their  production 
and  the  localities  where  the  greatest  amount  of  each  is 
produced.  Also  takes  up  the  various  countries  and  their 
products.  Trade  routes  of  the  world  are  especially 
treated.  Appendix  gives  statistical  tables.  Index. 

147.  U.   S.   Superintendent  of  documents.     Price 
list.    Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

No.  35,  Geography  and  explorations. 

99 


148-150        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

ATLASES 

GENERAL 

148.  Century  atlas  of  the  world.   Rev.  and  enl.  ed. 
N.  Y.  Century,  c!911. 

Modern  political  and  a  few  historical  maps.  Of  a 
more  convenient  size  to  handle  than  many  atlases,  but 
with  smaller  maps.  An  index  to  modern  maps  in  the 
back,  which  includes  population  figures ;  an  index  to  his- 
torical ones  near  the  front.  Published  as  v.12  of  the 
Century  dictionary. 

149.  Rand  McNally  &   Co.    Commercial  atlas  of 
America.    Chicago,  Rand,  1922. 

An  annual  publication.  Large  maps  of  the  states,  im- 
portant cities  and  outlying  possessions  of  the  U.  S.,  the 
Canadian  provinces,  Newfoundland,  Mexico,  Central 
America,  Panama,  Bermuda,  the  West  Indies,  Cuba,  and 
all  the  continents.  Lists  of  steamship  lines  and  railroads. 
On  the  maps  of  cities  transportation  lines,  public  build- 
ings and  depots  are  designated,  but  in  many  cases  the 
streets  are  unnamed.  Consult  the  alphabetical  table  of 
contents  to  find  the  page  references  for  the  maps.  Sepa- 
rate indexes  with  many  of  the  maps  give  population  fig- 
ures and  other  data  concerning  each  place,  including 
names  of  railroads,  electric  lines,  express  companies,  etc. 
indicated  by  numbers,  letters  or  signs  explained  on  the 
map  itself,  at  the  end  of  the  index,  or  at  the  bottom  of 
each  index  page. 

150.  — Commercial  atlas  of  foreign  coun- 
tries.  Chicago,  Rand,  1921. 

An  annual  companion  volume  to  the  Commercial  atlas 
of  America.  Large  scale  maps  of  the  countries  and  chief 

100 


GEOGRAPHY  151-152 

political  divisions  of  the  world  outside  of  the  United 
States  of  America.  Alphabetical  table  of  contents.  The 
general  index  to  the  maps  includes  population  statistics 
as  well  as  brief  historical  and  industrial  notes  concern- 
ing many  of  the  places. 

151.  Stieler,  Adolf.   Stieler's  atlas  of  modern  geog- 
raphy.   .    .    Adapted  for  the  use  of  the  English  speaking 
public  by  B.  V.  Darbishire.  9th  eel.  Gotha,  Perthes,  1909. 

The  first  edition  of  this  standard  German  work  was 
published  nearly  a  century  ago.  Excellent,  detailed  mod- 
ern maps.  The  explanations  of  signs,  abbreviations,  etc. 
are  given  on  the  face  of  each  map  in  the  German  lan- 
guage, and  on  the  back  of  each  in  four  languages,  Eng- 
lish, Spanish,  French,  and  Italian.  The  spelling  of  the 
place  names  on  each  large  scale  map  is  that  of  the  coun- 
try ;  i.e.  names  in  France  are  in  the  French  form.  A 
very  minute  index  in  which  the  German  forms  of  names 
are  used ;  e.g.  Italy  is  under  Italien. 

152.  Mawson,     Christopher     Orlando     Sylvester. 
Doubleday,  Page  &  co's  geographical  manual  and  new 
atlas.     Garden  city,  Doubleday,  1917. 

Both  a  geography  and  an  atlas.  Contains,  besides 
modern  political  maps,  excellent  maps  showing  vegeta- 
tion, economic  conditions,  physical  features,  climate,  pop- 
ulation, communications,  commercial  languages,  the  war 
zones;  and  for  the  U.  S.  automobile  routes,  parcel  post 
zones,  standard  time.  Alphabetical  list  of  maps  near 
the  beginning.  Index  to  the  war  maps,  p.  4-5,  8-9 ;  index 
to  the  cities  and  towns  of  the  U.  S.,  with  their  popula- 
tion statistics,  p.343-80,  index  to  the  principal  cities  and 


101 


153-155        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

towns  (exclusive  of  the  U.  S.),  p.  381-85;  general  index 
to  the  text,  p.  -386-92. 

153.  Bartholomew,  John  George.    Advanced  atlas 
of  physical  and  political  geography.     London,  Oxford 
university  press,  1917. 

Maps  of  volcanoes,  earthquakes,  altitudes,  rainfall 
and  winds,  temperature,  political  divisions,  vegetation, 
commerce,  industries,  geology,  races  and  density  of  pop- 
ulation. In  the  front  is  a  list  of  the  maps  in  the  order 
of  their  appearance  in  the  book,  and  an  alphabetical  list 
of  countries  with  the  numbers  of  the  maps  on  which  they 
are  shown.  In  the  back  is  a  general  index  of  places 
which  refers  to  countries  and  not  to  map  numbers,  neces- 
sitating the  use  of  this  index  in  connection  with  the  al- 
phabetical list  of  countries  in  the  front.  The  places  are 
located  on  the  maps  by  degrees  of  latitude  and  longitude, 
given  in  the  general  index. 

154.  -  Atlas  of  economic  geography.     Lon- 
don, Oxford  university  press,  1914. 

Small  general  and  regional  maps,  including  maps  of 
temperature,  rainfall,  altitude,  vegetation,  industries,  den- 
sity of  population,  languages,  trade  routes,  and  commer- 
cial products.  Explanatory  text  in  the  front.  List  of 
maps,  p.  Ixv-lxvi.  No  index. 

HISTORICAL 

155.  For  descriptions  of  the   following  atlases  see 
sections  172-175. 

Shepherd,  William  Robert.  Historical  atlas.  N.  Y. 
Holt,  1911. 

Cambridge  modern  history,  v.14,  Atlas.  Cambridge, 
Eng.  University  press,  1912. 

102 


GEOGRAPHY  156-158 

Poole,  Reginald  Lane.  Historical  atlas  of  modern 
Europe.  Oxford,  Clarendon  press,  1902. 

Droysen,  Gustav.  Allgemeiner  historischer  hand- 
atlas.  Bielefeld,  Velhagen,  1886. 

MAPS 

156.  U.  S.  Geological  survey.  Topographic  sheets. 
Washington,  U.  S.  Geological  survey. 

"The  Geological  survey  is  making  a  topographic  map 
of  the  United  States.  The  sheets  of  which  it  is  com- 
posed are  projected  without  reference  to  political  divi- 
sions, and  are  designated  by  some  prominent  town  or 
natural  feature  found  on  them...  A  description  of  the 
topographic  map  is  printed  on  the  reverse  side  of  each 
sheet.  Nearly  two-fifths  of  the  area  of  the  country,  ex- 
cluding outlying  possessions  has  been  mapped,  every 
state  being  represented.  Massachusetts,  Connecticut, 
Rhode  Island,  New  Jersey,  and  the  District  of  Columbia 
are  completely  mapped."  Price  list  53. 

157.  U.  S.  Post  office  department.    Rural  delivery 
county  maps.    Washington,  U.  S.  Post  office  department. 

158.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.  Price  list. 
Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

No.  53,  Maps. 


103 


159 


CHAPTER    XVI 
HISTORY 

159.  The  student  of  history  generally  distinguishes 
two  kinds  of  printed  material:  primary  and  secondary. 
The  former, 'sometimes  called  simply  "Sources,"  consists 
of  documents  of  governments  concerned  with  the  event  in 
question  and  writings  of  people  who  participated  in  or 
witnessed  it.  These  are  found  not  only  in  the  numerous 
"source  books"  (collections  of  such  material)  but  also  in 
annual  cyclopedias,  periodicals,  and  newspapers,  and 
through  government  document  indexes  (see  sections  113- 
118,  96-100,  376-380)  and  special  bibliographies.  Sec- 
ondary material  comprises  the  publications  based  upon 
primary  or  other  secondary  sources;  i.e.  the  ordinary 
textbook,  treatise,  or  encyclopedia  article. 

For  both  kinds  of  material  one  may  look  in  the  card 
catalog  not  only  for  such  headings  as  France — History — 
Early  period-987,  but  also  for  the  names  of  rulers, 
statesmen,  military  leaders,  etc.  of  the  period  desired. 
Books  on  different  phases  of  great  wars  are  entered  un- 
der the  name  of  the  war,  if  it  involves  several  nations; 
e.g.  European  war — Economic  aspects,  or,  if  it  involves 
only  one  or  two,  under  the  name  of  each  country  as  one 
of  the  period  divisions  of  its  history;  e.g.  Great  Britain 
— History — Civil  war,  1642-49.  To  distinguish  the  pri- 
mary sources  from  the  other  material  one  should  read 
the  author  and  'title  on  each  catalog  card  carefully  and 
observe  the  date  and  place  of  publication. 

104 


HISTORY  160-161 

In  addition  to  the  general  encyclopedias,  biographical 
dictionaries,  and  magazine  indexes,  the  following  special 
reference  books  are  useful  in  preparing  reports  and  bib- 
liographies on  topics  in  history. 

160.  Larned,  Josephus  Nelson.    History  for  ready 
reference  from  the  best  historians,  biographers  and  spe- 
cialists.   Springfield,  Mass.    Nichols,  1895-1910.    7v. 

— Companion    volume.      Springfield,    Nichols, 
1913. 

A  cyclopedia  of  universal  history,  composed,  not  of 
articles  written  especially  for  it,  but  of  selections  of  mate- 
rial quoted  from  the  works  of  many  good  authorities, 
with  exact  references  to  the  books  from  which  they  were 
taken,  followed  by  short  lists  of  references  to  other  books. 
A  few  historical  maps.  Arranged  alphabetically,  with  the 
information  given  usually  under  the  name  of  the  place 
most  concerned,  but  with  many  cross  references  from 
persons,  events,  etc.  Under  place  the  arrangement  is 
chronological.  Constitutions  of  countries  and  some  states 
are  given  in  English  under  the  word  Constitution.  V.5 
includes  a  supplement  containing  translations  from  Ger- 
man and  French  works,  topics  omitted  from  previous  vol- 
umes, chronological  and  genealogical  tables.  V.6-7,  also 
supplementary,  cover  the  history  of  1894-1900  and  1901- 
1910  and  are  comprised  of  extracts  from  government 
documents  and  records  of  contemporary  writers.  The 
Companion  volume  contains  appendices  which  include 
genealogical  tables  of  European  rulers  and  great  historical 
families,  and  a  selected  bibliography. 

161.  Cambridge  modern  history.  Cambridge,  Eng. 
University  press.    1902-12.    14v. 

105 


162  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

"The  general  history  of  Europe  and  her  colonies  since 
the  fifteenth  century  is  ...  treated  in  twelve  volumes." 
Preface.  Contents:  v.l,  Renaissance;  v.2,  Reformation; 
v.3,  The  wars  of  religion;  v.4,  Thirty' years  war;  v.5,  Age 
of  Louis  XIV;  v.6,  Eighteenth  century;  v.7,  United 
States;  v.8,  French  Revolution;  v.9,  Napoleon;  v.10, 
Restoration;  v.ll,  Growth  of  nationality;  v.12,  The  latest 
age. 

All  chapters  contributed  by  specialists.  Valuable  bib- 
liographies included  at  the  ends  of  volumes.  Each  vol- 
ume has  a  table  of  contents  giving  authors  and  outlines 
of  chapters,  and  a  list  of  the  bibliographies ;  also  an  index. 

V.13  contains  genealogical  tables  and  lists  of  rulers, 
presidents,  governors,  conferences,  universities,  etc.  and 
a  general  index  to  the  set. 

V.14  is  an  historical  atlas,  with  maps  "designed  to 
illustrate  political  divisions  .  .  .  territorial  changes,  wars 
by  land  or  sea,  the  growth  of  particular  States,  the  course 
of  religious  changes,  and  the  history  of  colonial  expan- 
sion." Preface.  An  introduction  summarizing  the 
changes  made  in  the  map  of  the  world  through  the  period 
covered  describes  the  maps  and  is  followed  by  an  Index 
of  places  mentioned  in  it.  Maps  are  listed  in  Table  of 
contents.  Index  to  places  on  the  maps  is  at  the  end  of 
the  volume. 

New  Schaff-Herzog  encyclopedia  of  religious  knowl- 
edge contains  many  historical  articles,  with  excellent  bib- 
liographies. See  section  215. 

OUTLINES 

162.  Ploetz,  Karl  Julius.  Ploetz's  manual  of  uni- 
versal history,  from  the  dawn  of  civilization  to  the 

106 


HISTORY  163-164 

outbreak  of  the  great  war  of  1914,  tr.  and  enl.  by  W.  H. 
Tillinghast,  with  additions  covering  recent  events.  Bos- 
ton, Houghton,  1919. 

An  outline  of  history,  arranged  first  by  period  and 
then  by  country.  Minute  index  preceded  by  a  Supple- 
ment containing  an  outline  of  events  of  the  European 
War,  June  28,  1914-Nov.  11,  1918.  Genealogical  tables 
embodied  in  the  text.  * 

163  Putnam,  George  Palmer,  comp.  Tabular 
views  of  universal  history  ;  a  series  of  chronological  tables, 
presenting,  in  parallel  columns,  a  record  of  the  more  note- 
worthy events  in  the  history  of  the  world  from  the  earliest 
times  down  to  the  present  day,  together  with  an  -alpha- 
betical index  of  subjects.  .  .  Reissue,  continued  to  Jan- 
uary, 1919 ;  with  historical  chart,  maps,  and  general  tables. 
N.  Y.  Putnam,  c!919 

HISTORICAL  NOTEBOOKS 

164.  These  are  useful  for  short  explanations  of  his- 
torical allusions,  outlines  of  the  history  of  cities,  dates 
of  famous  events  and  inventions,  lists  of  rulers,  battles, 
etc. 

Brewer,  Ebenezer  Cobham.  Historic  note-book ;  with 
an  appendix  of  battles.  Philadelphia,  Lippincott,  1896. 

Little,  Charles  Eugene.  Cyclopedia  of  classified  dates. 
N.  Y.  Funk,  1900. 

Harper's  book  of  facts,  a  classified  encyclopaedia  of 
the  history  of  the  world  .  .  .  from  4004  B.C.  to  1906  A.R 
with  .  .  .  references  to  subjects  in  ...  science,  literature, 
art,  and  government,  ed.  by  Charjton  T.  Lewis.  N.  Y. 
Harper,  1906. 

107 


165-167        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Haydn,  Joseph  Timothy.  Haydn's  dictionary  of  dates 
and  universal  information  relating  to  all  ages  and  nations, 
ed.  by  Benjamin  Vincent.  25th  ed.  N.  Y.  Putnam,  1911. 

SOURCES 

165.  Miller,   Marion  Mills,   ed.    Great  debates  in 
American  history,  from  the  debates  in  the  British  Par- 
liament on  the  colonial  stamp  act  (1764-1765)  to  the  de- 
bates in  Congress  at  the  close  of  the  Taft  administration 
(1912-1913.)     N.   Y.   Current   literature   publishing  co. 
c!913.    14v. 

The  introduction  of  each  volume  is  by  a  distinguished 
statesman  or  publicist.  Extracts  from  debates  and 
speeches  are  connected  by  narrative  paragraphs.  Illus- 
trated by  portraits  and  reprints  of  political  cartoons.  Gen- 
eral indexes  in  v.14:  one  of  subjects  and  the  other  of  per- 
sons. Table  of  contents  in  each  volume  notes  favorable 
and  unfavorable  speeches. 

166.  Annual  register,  1758-date,  described  in  sec- 
tion 115,  is  especially  useful  for  sources  of  American  his- 
tory in  colonial  and  revolutionary  periods. 

167.  Appleton's     annual     cyclopaedia,     1861-1902. 
N.  Y.  Appleton,  c!863-1903. 

A  record  of  events  of  each  year  with  encyclopedic 
articles  on  subjects  of  interest  at  the  time,  including  biog- 
raphy. Besides  original  articles,  there  are  President's 
messages  and  proclamations,  diplomatic  correspondence, 
orders  and  reports,  and  important  laws.  Useful  espe- 
cially for  Civil  War  and  Reconstruction  periods.  Each 
volume  is  arranged  alphabetically  by  large  subjects  with 

108 


HISTORY  168-171 

an  index  in  the  back.     There  is  also  an  index  for  each 
of  the  three  series  of  the  set: 

Series  1,  15v.  1861-1875;  index  in  separate  volume. 

2,  20v.  1876-1895 ;  index  in  back  of  1895v. 

3,  7v.  1896-1902;  index  in  back  of  1902v. 

168.  The  New  York  Times  index,  v.l-date.  N.Y. 
New  York  Times,  1913-date. 

Issued  quarterly.  Minute  subject  index  to  current 
events  as  recorded  in  New  York  Times,  giving  references 
to  the  Times  by  date  of  issue,  page,  and  column.  Forms 
an  index  to  dates  which  may  be  used  in  looking  up  ma- 
terial in  other  newspapers  also. 

169.  U.    S.    Superintendent   of   documents.     Price 
'list.     Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

No.  50,  American  history  and  biography. 

No.  65,  Foreign  relations :  Diplomacy,  international 
law,  Mexico,  European  War. 

These  lists  of  documents  which  the  Superintendent 
of  documents  has  for  sale  include  many  references  to 
government  sources  for  United  States  history. 

BIBLIOGRAPHIES 

170.  Besides  the  lists  of  books  in  the  history  refer- 
ence  books   already   described,  several  excellent  special 
bibliographies  for  history  are  described  in  the  chapter  on 
Bibliography. 

ATLASES 

171.  A  few  historical  maps  are  included  in  some 
general  atlases,  in  general  encyclopedias,  and  in  histories 
and  historical  reference  books ;  e.g.  Century  atlas,  Charles 

109 


172-175        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Downer  Hazen,  Modern  European  History,  and  Larned, 
History  for  Ready  Reference.  There  are,  in  ad- 
dition, however,  several  good  atlases  made  especially  for 
use  in  studying  history.  In  these  the  maps  are  generally 
arranged  chronologically  according  to  the  period  they  il- 
lustrate and  are  found  through  the  table  of  contents.  The 
index  of  places  in  an  historical  atlas  is  not  as  a  rule  of 
so  much  importance  to  the  student  as  the  index  in  an  or- 
dinary atlas. 

172.  Shepherd,  William  Robert.    Historical  atlas. 
N.  Y.  Holt,  1911. 

Small  maps  covering  history  from  1450  B.C.  to  the 
20th  century.  Especially  good  for  war  campaigns,  treaty 
adjustments,  development  of  commerce,  racial  and  re- 
ligious distribution  of  peoples.  Contents  and  index. 

173.  Poole,  Reginald  Lane,  ed.    Historical  atlas  of 
modern  Europe  from  the  decline  of  the  Roman  empire; 
comprising  also  maps  of  parts  of  Asia,  Africa,  and  the 
New  world,  connected  with  European  history.     Oxford, 
Clarendon  press,  1902. 

Larger  maps  than  in  most  of  the  historical  atlases, 
with  valuable  explanatory  text  by  various  authorities. 
More  maps  of  the  British  Isles  than  of  any  other  one 
country. 

174.  Cambridge  modern  history,   v.14,  Atlas.    See 
section  161. 

175.  Droysen,    Gustav.     Allgemeiner    historischer 
handatlas.     Bielefeld,  Velhagen,  1886. 

One  of  the  standard  historical  atlases,  but  difficult  to 
use  without  a  knowledge  of  German. 

110 


HISTORY  176-178 

CLASSICAL  ANTIQUITIES 

176.  Peck,  Harry  Thurston,  ed.    Harper's  diction- 
ary of  classical  literature  and  antiquities.     [Ed.  2.]  N.  Y. 
American  book  co.  c!896. 

Best  popular  cyclopedia  of  Greek  and  Roman  history, 
geography,  antiquities,  biography,  literature,  and  mythol- 
ogy. Short  articles  with  selected  bibliographies.  Alpha- 
betical arrangement  usually  under  Latin  title,  with  cross 
reference  from  the  English  equivalent.  Many  illustra- 
tions and  a  few  maps.  Appendix  contains  a  few  addi- 
tional articles  and  Tables  of  Greek  and' Roman  weights 
and  measures. 

177.  Smith,  Sir  William.    A  dictionary  of  Greek 
and  Roman  antiquities.    Ed.  by. William  Smith,  William 
Wayte,  G.  E.  Marindin.    3d  ed.  rev.  and  enl.     London, 
Murray,  1890-91.    2v. 

First  edition,  published  in  1842,  has  been  thoroughly 
revised.  More  than  fifty  writers  who  contributed  to  the 
work  are  listed  at  the  beginnings  of  the  volumes.  Ar- 
ticles signed  by  initials.  More  detailed  than  Harper, 
but  no  articles  on  persons  or  places.  At  the  end  of  v.2 
are  Tables  of  measures,  weights  and  money,  Greek,  Latin 
and  English  indexes  and  an  appendix  of  supplementary 
material. 

178.     Dictionary  of  Greek  and  Roman  biog- 
raphy and  mythology.    London,  Taylor,  1844-49. 

Includes  biographies  of  "all  persons  of  any  impor- 
tance which  occur  in  the  Greek  and  Roman  writers,  from 
the  earliest  times  down  to  the  extinction  of  the  Western 
Empire  in.  .  .476.  .  .and.  .  .of  the  Eastern  Empire  by  the 
capture  of  Constantinople  by  the  Turks  in...  1453." 

Ill 


179-180        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Preface.  Christian  writers  as  well  as  classical.  Articles 
signed  by  initials.  Illustrations  are  reproductions  of  coins 
showing  the  heads  of  famous  persons.  Chronological 
tables  and  lists  of  kings  in  the  back  of  v.3 ;  also  list  of 
genealogical  tables  with  references  to  the  volumes  and 
pages  where  they  may  be  found. 

179.  Whibley,  Leonard.    A   companion  to   Greek 
studies.    3d  ed.  rev.    Cambridge,  Eng.    University  press, 
1913. 

Sandys,  Sir  Jonn  Edwin.  A  companion  to  Latin 
studies.  2d  ed.  Cambridge,  Eng.  University  press,  1913. 

Chapters  by  different  authorities  on  Greek  or  Roman 
geography,  history,  literature,  art,  mythology,  and  public 
and  private  life,  etc.  Bibliographies  are  for  guidance  of 
students.  Illustrated.  Good  to  use  when  information 
is  desired  on  broad  subjects,  which  the  classical  diction- 
aries distribute  alphabetically  under  various  specific 
terms.  Detailed  table  of  contents  and  four  indexes  in 
each  book:  1,  Persons,  deities  and  races;  2,  Places;  3, 
Scholars  and  modern  writers;  4,  Greek  (or  Latin)  words 
and  phrases. 

ENGLAND 

180.  Low,  Sidney  James  and  Pulling,  F.  S.    Dic- 
tionary of  English  history.    London,  Cassell,  1911. 

Concise  articles  on  English  history  and  institutions, 
including  biographies  of  historical  personages.  Some  ar- 
ticles signed  by  initials  and  followed  by  bibliographies. 
Arranged  alphabetically  by  broad  subjects.  Minute  in- 
dex. Translation  of  Magna  Carta  follows  the  Prefaces. 
A  few  portraits. 


112 


HISTORY  181-184 

181.  Annual  register,  described  in  section  115,  should 
be  consulted,  especially  for  source  material  in  the  18th 
to  20th  centuries. 

UNITED  STATES 

182.  Harper's  encyclopaedia  of  United  States  his- 
tory from  458  A.D.  to   1912.    New  ed.  rev.  and  enl. 
N.  Y.  Harper,  c!912.    lOv. 

Popular  cyclopedia  of  the  subject.  A  special  feature 
is  the  source  material  contained;  viz.  extracts  from  jour- 
nals and  reprints  of  documents,  treaties,  orations  and 
presidential  messages  and  proclamations.  Includes  bio- 
graphical articles.  Authors  of  some  articles  mentioned 
in  editor's  introduction  to  the  article.  Arranged  alpha- 
betically. 'Many  illustrations  and  small  maps. 

183.  Hodge,   Frederick  Webb,   ed.    Handbook  of 
American  Indians  north  of  Mexico.     Washington,  Gov- 
ernment printing  office,  1907-10.  2v.    (U.  S.  Bureau  of 
American  ethnology.    Bulletin  30.) 

Treats  of  history,  archaeology,  customs,  arts,  indus- 
tries, and  institutions  of  Indians  north  of  Mexico,  includ- 
ing Eskimo  and  also  allied  Mexican  Indians.  Descrip- 
tion of  every  stock,  confederacy,  tribe  or  tribal  division, 
with  the  origin  of  every  name  treated  and  a  list  of  its 
synonyms.  Brief  biographies  of  noted  Indians.  Ar- 
ranged alphabetically.  Illustrated. 

184.  For  source  material  on  United  States  history 
consult   Miller,  Debates,   Applet  on' s  annual  cyclopaedia 
and  Annual  register. 

Publications  of  American  historical  societies  are  fre- 
quently of  value.  For  an  index  to  them,  see  Griffin, 
Bibliography  of  American  historical  societies  (section 
386.) 

113 


185-187 


CHAPTER    XVII 
SOCIOLOGY 

185.  The  books  listed  in  this  chapter  under  the  head- 
ing of  "sociology"  are  taken  from  the  fields  of  political 
science,  law,  economics,  statistics  and  customs.  Referring 
back  to  the  chapter  on  Encyclopedias,  it  will  be  seen  that 
annual  cyclopedias  and  almanacs  also  include  lists  of  gov- 
ernment officials,  digests  of  state  and  federal  laws  on  cer- 
tain subjects,  such  as  child  labor,  and  texts  of  important 
laws. 

186.  Statesman's    year-book,    1864-date.     London, 
Macmillan,  1864-date. 

Following  introductory  tables  of  comparative  statistics 
and  a  few  maps  of  current  interest  are  concise  descrip- 
tions and  statistics  of  the  governments,  industries,  and 
resources  of  the  countries  of  the  world.  British  empire 
is  given  first,  followed  by  the  United  States  and  then  by 
the  other  countries  in  alphabetical  order.  Bibliography 
of  official  publications  and  other  books  for  each  country. 
Full  index. 

187.  Cyclopedia  of  American  government,  ed.  by 
A.  C.  McLaughlin  and  A.  B.  Hart.  N.  Y.  Appleton,  1914. 
3v. 

Articles  on  the  theory  and  principles  of  government 
and  constitutional  law  as  well  as  actual  forms  of  Ameri- 
can government  and  politics,  national,  state,  and  local. 
Treats  some  aspects  of  foreign  states  which  are  especially 
interesting  to  American  readers.  Many  small  topics,  ex- 

114 


SOCIOLOGY  188-190 

planations  of  such  allusions  as  "Kitchen  Cabinet."  Longer 
articles  are  usually  signed,  sometimes  only  by  initials  ex- 
plained in  the  front  of  v.l.  Selected  bibliographies.  Ar- 
ranged alphabetically,  with  many  cross  references.  Ana- 
lytical index  in  v.3,  which  is  useful  in  finding  everything 
in  the  cyclopedia  on  a  subject. 

188.  Lalor,  John  Joseph,  ed.    Cyclopaedia  of  po- 
litical science,  political  economy  and  of  the  political  his- 
tory of  the  United  States.  Chicago,  Rand,  1882-84.  3v. 

Not  recent,  but  useful  for  political  history.  Articles 
are  usually  long,  written  by  specialists,  and  frequently 
have  bibliographies.  Alphabetical  arrangement  by  broad 
subjects. 

189.  Palgrave,  Sir  Robert  Harry  Inglis,  ed.    Dic- 
tionary of  political  economy.     London,  Macmillan,  1894- 
1910.   3v. 

Historical  and  theoretical  articles  on  economic  sub- 
jects, including  foreign  as  well  as  British  phases.  Signed 
by  initials  of  contributors,  whose  names  are  given  at  the 
end  of  each  volume.  Arranged  alphabetically.  Appendix 
in  v.3  contains  developments  in  economics  since  first  pub- 
lication of  the  work.  Index  to  Appendix  follows  Index 
to  main  part. 

190.  Bliss,   William   Dwight  Porter   and   Binder, 
R.  M.  ed.  New  encyclopedia  of  social  reform.  New  ed. 
N.  Y.  Funk,  1908. 

For  the  general  reader  and  student.  Includes  his- 
torical, biographical  and  statistical  material  as  well  as 
argumentative  articles  both  favoring  and  opposing  re- 
forms in  political,  economic  and  social  conditions.  Most 
of  the  longer  articles  are  signed.  Selected  bibliographies. 

115 


191-193        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Alphabetical  arrangement.  Cross-references  to  other 
articles  in  the  book  are  generally  put  at  the  first  of  the 
article.  Index  includes  both  authors  and  subjects  of  the 
articles. 

191.  American  year  book,  a  record  of  events  and 
progress,  1910-1919.     N.  Y.  Appleton,  1911-1920. 

For  ten  years  a  very  useful  annual  review  of  Ameri- 
can events  and  progress  in  various  lines.  Although  hav- 
ing ceased  publication  with  the  1919  volume,  it  is  no 
longer  valuable  as  an  annual  encyclopedia  in  providing 
material  supplementary  to  general  encyclopedias,  it  is 
still  a  useful  reference  book  for  topics  in  sociology  on 
account  of  its  special  information  year  by  year 'in  politics, 
government,  and  legislation. 

Authors'  names  are  given  for  most  of  the  articles. 
The  earlier  volumes  contain  bibliographies.  Statistics 
are  included.  "Arranged  in  thirty-one  departments,  in 
which  are  grouped  articles  on  related  subjects."  Preface. 
Full  table  of  contents  and  minute  index  in  each  volume. 

192.  Public  affairs  information  service.    Bulletin, 
v.l-date.    N.  Y.  Public  affairs  information  service,  1915- 
date. 

Published  weekly,  with  bi-monthly  and  annual  cumu- 
lations. Indexes  books,  society  publications,  government 
documents,  and  periodicals  for  subjects  in  political  sci- 
ence, economics,  commerce,  and  finance.  Lists  bibliogra- 
phies and  trade  directories. 

193.  Wilson,  H.  W.     firm,     publishers.     Debaters' 
handbook   series;  Abridged  debaters'  handbook   series; 
Handbook  series ;  University  debaters'  annuals. 

116 


SOCIOLOGY  194-195 

About  sixty  small  volumes  on  different  subjects  of 
current  interest  in  economics,  sociology  or  political  sci- 
ence. The  three  series  first  listed  contain  extracts  from 
books,  magazines,  and  pamphlets,  with  good  bibliog- 
raphies of  the  subjects.  The  first  two  series  also  contain 
briefs.  The  last  mentioned  series  gives  the  texts  of  actual 
debates,  with  briefs  and  bibliographies. 

194.  Much  descriptive  and    statistical    material    is 
given  in  the  following  year  books,  of  which  the  British 
are  official  publications  of  the  governments  of  the  res- 
pective colonies. 

Australia  official  year  book  Victorian  year  book 

Canada  year  book  Argentine  year  book 

Indian  year  book  China  year  book 

Newfoundland  year  book  French  year  book 

New  South  Wales  official  Japan  year  book 

year  book  Mexican  year  book 

New  Zealand  official  year  Russian  year  book 

book  South  American  year  book 
South  African  year  book 

195.  U.    S.    Superintendent  of   documents.     Price 
list.    Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

The  following  lists  include  titles  of  government  doc- 
uments, which  may  be  procured  for  comparatively  low 
prices,  on  many  subjects  of  political  science,  economics 
and  sociology: 

No.  10,  Laws:  Federal,  state,  and  international. 

No.  20,  Public  domain,  public  lands,  conservation, 
railroad  land  grants,  etc. 

No.  28,  Finance:  Banking,  postal  savings,  coinage, 
liberty  loans. 

117 


196  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

No.  32,  Insular  possessions  and  Cuba. 

No.  33,  Labor:  Child  labor,  cost  of  living,  recon- 
struction, employers'  liability,  insurance,  wages,  women 
wage  earners,  strikes. 

No.  37,  Tariff  and  taxation. 

No.  54,  Political  science:  Prohibition,  District  of 
Columbia,  woman  suffrage,  elections. 

No.  60,  Alaska. 

No.  61,  Panama  Canal:  Canal  zone,  Republic  of 
Panama,  Columbia  treaty,  Nicaragua. 

No.  67,  Immigration:  Alien  enlistment,  Chinese,  Jap- 
anese, Negroes,  citizenship,  naturalization,  and  illiteracy. 

OFFICIAL  DIRECTORIES 

196.  U.  S.  Congress.  Official  Congressional  direc- 
tory. Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

Two  or  three  editions  for  each  session  of  Congress. 
Biographical  sketches  of  members  of  Congress,  the  Pres- 
ident and  his  Cabinet,  and  the  Supreme  Court.  Lists  of 
members  of  Congressional  committees  and  commissions, 
the  judiciary,  and  the  diplomatic  and  consular  service 
between  the  United  States  and  foreign  countries,  and 
press  representatives  in  Congress.  Official  duties  and 
personnel  of  the  executive  departments  and  their  bureaus 
and  of  miscellaneous  federal  commissions  and  boards. 
Description,  plan,  and  directory  of  the  Capitol  building. 
Alphabetical  "Contents"  in  front  of  volume.  Alphabetical 
list  of  members  of  Congress,  with  their  addresses,  near 
the  back,  followed  by  maps  of  Congressional  districts. 
"Individual  Index"  at  the  end  is  an  alphabetical  list  of 
names  and  addresses  of  all  other  persons  mentioned  in 
the  book. 

118 


SOCIOLOGY  197-200 

197.  Many  states  also  issue  directories  or  manuals 
corresponding  to  the  Congressional  directory,  with  vary- 
ing titles  such  as  manual,  directory,  blue  book,  red  book, 
year  book,  etc.    They  usually  contain  the  state  constitu- 
tion, lists  and  biographical  sketches  of  members  of  legis- 
lature and  executive  departments,  duties  of  departments, 
and  census  and  electoral  statistics.     Sometimes  they  in- 
clude also  information  of  a  more  general  nature  concern- 
ing the  state,  its  history,  resources,  industries,  institu- 
tions and  politics.    They  may  be  illustrated  by  portraits, 
maps  and  other  pictures. 

CONSTITUTIONS  AND  LAWS 

198.  Dodd,  Walter  Fairleigh,  ed.    Modern  consti- 
tutions; a  collection  of  the  fundamental  laws  of  twenty- 
two  of  the  most  important  countries  of  the  world,  with 
historical  and  bibliographical  notes.     Chicago,  Univ.  of 
Chicago  press,  1909.    2v. 

Translations,  arranged  alphabetically  by  country. 
Good  analytical  index. 

199.  Wright,  Herbert  Francis,  ed.    The  constitu- 
tions of  the  states  at  war,  1914-1918.    Washington,  Gov- 
ernment printing  office,  1919. 

More  up-to-date  than  the  above.  Includes  about  the 
same  number  of  countries,  but  selected  on  a  different 
basis,  so  that  more  of  the  lesser  countries  appear,  with 
omission  of  the  important  countries  which  remained  neu- 
tral. 

200  Kettleborough,  Charles,  ed.  The  state  con- 
stitutions and  the  federal  constitution  and  organic  laws 

119 


201-203        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

of  the  territories  and  other  colonial  dependencies  of  the 
United  States  of  America.    Indianapolis,  Bowen,  1918. 

Arrangement:  United  States,  followed  first  by  the 
states  and  second  by  the  dependencies,  alphabetically. 
Index  is  really  a  table  of  contents  of  the  constitutions. 

•     201.     U.   S.  Laws,  statutes,  etc.    U.   S.  compiled 
statutes,  1918.  St.  Paul,  West  publishing  co.  1918. 

—1919  supplement.     St.  Paul,  West  publish- 
ing co.     1919. 

Often  referred  to  as  Mallory's  Statutes.  A  compact 
edition  of  U.  S.  statutes  of  a  general  and  permanent  na- 
ture in  force  July  16,  1918.  Includes  Declaration  of  In- 
dependence, Articles  of  Confederation,  Northwest  Ter- 
ritorial Government  Act,  and  the  Constitution,  a  chron- 
ological table  of  laws,  and  an  alphabetical  list  of  the  pop- 
ular names  of  acts.  General  index.  Supplement  con- 
tains statutes  passed  from  June  14,  1918  to  March  4, 
1919. 

202.  Similar  compilations  of  general  laws  in  force 
are  published  for  each  state  under  the  varying  titles  of 
Compiled,    Revised,    or   Annotated    Code,    Statutes,    or 
Laws.     Some  are  authorized  by  the  state,  while  others, 
like  U.S.  compiled  statutes,  are  issued  unofficially. 

203.  U.  S.  Congress.  Congressional  record.  Wash- 
ington, Government  printing  office. 

Daily  record  of  the  debates  and  proceedings  of  Con- 
gress. Index  issued  every  two  weeks.  Bound  volumes 
issued  at  end  of  session,  with  index  covering  whole  ses- 
sion. Numerical  list  of  bills  at  the  end  of  each  index 
gives  page  references  in  the  Record,  by  which  passage 
of  the  bills  through  Congress  may  be  traced. 

120 


SOCIOLOGY  204-206 

STATISTICS 

204.  Great  care  must  be  taken  in  trying  to  prove 
any  point  by  statistics,  first,  that  they  are  accurate,  and 
second,  that  in  comparing  statistics  they  shall  be  based 
on  like  conditions.    It  is  often  difficult,  if  not  impossible, 
to  find  in  print  as  recent  statistics  as  are  desired.    Alma- 
nacs usually  give  the  most  recent  statistics,  but  they  are 
not  always  reliable.    Government  bureaus  may  be  expect- 
ed to  publish  the  most  accurate  statistics,  but  their  fig- 
ures are  very  frequently  a  year  or  more  old  before  they 
are  published.     Certain  statistical  reference    books    are 
based  on  official  returns  and  they  are  listed  below  with 
some  of  the  government  statistical  reports  of  a  general 
nature.     The  Statesman's  year-book,  is  also  very  often 
referred  to  for  statistics  connected  with  particular  coun- 
tries. 

205.  Mulhall,  Michael  George.    Dictionary  of  sta- 
tistics.   4th  ed.  rev.  to  November  1898.     London,  Rout- 
ledge,  1903. 

Comparative  tables  of  statistics  of  all  countries,  in 
two  parts :  "the  first  comprising  all  known  statistical  data 
from  the  time  of  the  Emperor  Diocletian  down  to  the 
year  1890,  the  second  embracing  so  far  the  final  decade 
of  the  century."  Preface,  Feb.  2,  1899.  Each  part  is 
arranged  alphabetically  by  subjects.  Minute  index. 

206.  Webb,  Augustus  Duncan.    The  new  diction- 
ary of  statistics.     London,  Routledge,  1911. 

Supplementary  to  Mulhall,  which  it  resembles  in  ar- 
rangement. Preface  is  well  worth  reading  before  at- 
tempting to  use  any  statistics. 

121 


207-208       GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

UNITED  STATES 

207.  U.  S.  Bureau  of  foreign  and  domestic  com- 
merce.   Statistical  abstract  of  the  United  States,  1878- 
date.     Washington,    Government   printing   office,    1879- 
date. 

Comparative  statistical  tables  for  varying  numbers  of 
years  of  the  population,  resources,  commerce,  social  and 
economic  conditions  of  the  United  States.  A  few  statis- 
tics for  foreign  countries.  Source  of  each  table  usually 
given.  Detailed  table  of  contents  and  minute  index. 

208.  U.  S.  Bureau  of  the  census.    Census  of  the 
United  States.    Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

Compiled  and  published  every  ten  years  since  1790. 
Statistics  and  monographs  on  population,  industries,  and 
resources  of  the  United  States. 

As  it  usually  takes  a  year  or  two  to  prepare  the  re- 
turns from  a  Census  for  publishing  in  a  permanent  form, 
the  Bureau  issues  certain  parts  of  the  statistics  in  the 
form  of  bulletins ;  a  separate  one  for  each  of  the  main 
subjects:  agriculture,  manufactures,  mines  and  quarries, 
and  population,  for  each  state,  with  a  few  summaries  for 
the  country. 

The  last  Census  completely  published  was  the  Thir- 
teenth, taken  in  1910  and  published  in  1913  in  llv.  Con- 
tents: v.1-3,  Population;  v.4,  Occupation;  v.5-7,  Agri- 
culture; v-8-10,  Manufactures;  v.ll,  Mines  and  quarries. 
Includes  many  charts,  diagrams,  maps,  etc.  Complete 
Tables  of  contents  in  each  volume,  but  no  index. 

The  Abstract  of  the  Thirteenth  census  "presents 
condensed  statistics  for  the  United  States  as  a  whole .  . . 
It  is  issued  in  53  editions — one  without  supplement,  and 
each  of  the  others  including  a  supplement  for  some  one 
state,"  (or  dependency)  which  "contains  full  and  detailed 

122 


SOCIOLOGY  209-211 

statistics  for  the  state  and  its  counties".     U.  S.  Census 
bureau.   Circular  of  information.    1917,  p.  106. 

The  Statistical  atlas  of  the  United  States,  1914,  il- 
lustrates by  means  of  charts,  maps,  and  diagrams  the 
statistics  of  population,  agriculture,  manufactures,  etc. 
which  are  given  in  the  Thirteenth  census  reports.  Index 
to  illustrations  as  well  as.  Table  of  contents. 

CUSTOMS 

209.  In  addition  to  the  special  books  noted  below, 
handbooks  of  general  information  (see  chapter  on  Liter- 
ature) may  be  consulted  for  the  customs  of  certain  holi- 
days and  seasons  and  the  legends  connected  with  famous 
people.    Books  of  travel  furnish  material  on  national  cus- 
toms and  may  be  found  through  the  card  catalog  by  look- 
ing under  the  name  of  the  country  with  subheadings 
Description  and  travel  and  Manners  and  customs.     Dic- 
tionaries of  classical  antiquities  should  be  consulted  for 
the  ancient  Greeks  and  Romans  (see  sections  176-79). 

210.  Walsh,  William  Shepard.  Curiosities  of  popu- 
lar customs  and  of  rites,  ceremonies,  observances,  and 
miscellaneous      antiquities.      Philadelphia,      Lippincott, 
c!897. 

Compiled  largely  from  older  books,  but  containing 
also  American  and  Oriental  customs  not  usually  found  in 
the  English  books  of  this  nature.  Lives  and  legends  of 
saints  included.  Arranged  alphabetically.  A  few  illus- 
trations. 

211.  Chambers,  Robert,  ed.     The  book  of  days,  a 
miscellany  of  popular  antiquities  in  connection  with  the 
calendar.     London,  Chambers,  1869.     2v. 

123 


212-213        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

A  great  variety  of  information,  including  biographical 
and  historical  anecdotes,  arranged  in  the  order  of  the 
days  of  the  year.  Events  and  traditions  connected  with 
special  days  may  be  found  under  the  day.  For  other  in- 
formation it  is  necessary  to  use  the  index  in  v.2. 

212.  Brand,  John.    Observations   on  the  popular 
antiquities  of  Great  Britain;  rev.  and  enl.  by  Sir  Henry 
Ellis.    London,  Bell,  1888-95.    3v. 

First  prepared  in  1795.  First  volume  contains  cus- 
toms and  ceremonies  connected  with  special  days ;  the 
second,  those  connected  with  special  occasions;  and  the 
third,  omens  and  superstitions.  General  index  to  specific 
subjects  in  v.3. 

213.  Hazlitt,   William    Carew.     Faiths   and    folk- 
lore; a  dictionary  of  national  beliefs,  superstitions  and 
popular  customs . . .  forming  a  new  ed.  of  the  Popular  an- 
tiquities of  Great  Britain  by  Brand  and  Ellis.     London, 
Reeves,  1905.  2v. 

A  later  edition  of  Brand  and  similar  to  it  in  scope, 
but  arranged  alphabetically. 


124 


214-216 


CHAPTER    XVIII 
RELIGION 

214.  Encyclopaedia  of  religion  and  ethics,  ed.  by 
James  Hastings,  with  the  assistance  of  J.  A.  Selbie,  and 
other  scholars.     N.  Y.  Scribner,  1908-22.  12v. 

"The  Encyclopaedia  will  contain  articles  on  all  re- 
ligions of  the  world  and  on  all  the  great  systems  of 
ethics.  It  will  aim,  further,  at  containing  articles  on 
every  religious  belief  or  custom,  and  on  every  ethical 
movement,  every  philosophical  idea,  every  moral  prac- 
tice. Such  persons  and  places  as  are  famous  in  the  his- 
tory of  religion  and  morals  will  be  included."  Preface, 
v.\.  "Much  attention  is  given  to  social  topics  which  have 
an  ethical  or  religious  aspect."  Preface,  v.2.  Signed 
articles  with  bibliographies.  Arranged  alphabetically. 

215.  Schaff,  Philip.    The  new  Schaff-Herzog  en- 
cyclopedia of  religious  knowledge.     S.  M.  Jackson,  ed- 
itor-in-chief. N.  Y.  Funk,  c!908-14.   13v. 

Includes  religious  biographies  and  articles  on  relig- 
ions, sects,  theology,  church  history,  etc.  Most  of  the 
articles  are  signed  and  have  bibliographies.  Alphabetical 
arrangement.  V.I 3  contains  a  general  index  to  the  set 
which  is  useful  for  finding  all  the  important  references 
on  a  subject. 

216.  Bible.    Riverside  parallel  Bible  .  .  .  being  the 
version  set    forth    A.D.   1611,    commonly    called    King 
James's  version;  arranged  in  parallel  columns  with  the 
revised  versions  of  1881  and  1885.     Boston,  Houghton, 
n.d. 

125 


217-220        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

217.  Hastings,  James,  ed.   Dictionary  of  the  Bible. 
N.  Y.  Scribner,  c!898-1904.    5v. 

Signed  articles  on  persons,  places,  antiquities,  archae- 
ology, theology,  contents,  and  literature  of  the  Bible; 
brief  bibliographies.  The  arrangement  in  v.1-4  is  alpha- 
betical. V.5  is  an  "extra"  volume,  containing  articles  not 
alphabetically  arranged  and  indexes  to  the  entire  set.  An 
alphabetical  list  of  articles  included  in  the  "extra"  vol- 
ume is  in  the  front. 

218.  Young,   Robert.    Analytical   concordance  to 
the  Bible.    22d  American  ed.  rev.  throughout  by  W.  B. 
Stevenson.     N.  Y.  Funk,  1919. 

An  alphabetical  index  of  the  principal  words  used  in 
the  Bible,  with  exact  references  to  the  passages  in  which 
each  word  is  found. 

'219.  Julian,  John,  ed.  Dictionary  of  hymnology. 
Rev.  ed.  with  new  supplement.  London,  Murray,  1907. 

Articles  on  hymn  writers,  the  origin  and  history  of 
Christian  hymns,  and  various  phases  of  hymnology  signed 
by  initials  and  arranged  alphabetically.  In  the  back  are 
indexes  to  the  main  part,  to  the  appendices,  and  to  the 
supplement  by  first  lines  of  hymns  in  English  and  other 
languages,  and  by  names  of  authors,  translators,  etc. 

220.  Catholic  encyclopedia;  an  international  work 
of  reference  on  the  constitution,  doctrine,  discipline  and 
history  of  the  Catholic  church.  N.Y.  R.  Appleton, 
c!907-14.  16v.  V.16  published  by  the  Encyclopedia 
press. 

"It  differs  from  the  general  encyclopedia  in  omitting 
facts  and  information  which  have  no  relation  to  the 
Church.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  not  exclusively  a  church 

126 


RELIGION  221 

encyclopedia,  nor  is  it  limited  to  the  ecclesiastical  sciences 
and  the  doings  of  the  churchmen.  It  records  all  that 
Catholics  have  done,  not  only  in  behalf  of  charity  and 
morals,  but  also  for  the  intellectual  and  artistic  develop- 
ment of  mankind."  Preface.  Signed  articles  arranged 
alphabetically;  bibliographies.  V.16  contains  additional 
articles  and  an  analytical  index  to  the  complete  work. 
Illustrated. 

221.  Jewish  encyclopedia  .  .  .  prepared  under  the 
direction  of  Cyrus  Adler  .  . .  [and  others].  Isidore  Singer, 
managing  editor.  N.  Y.  Funk,  1901-1906.  12v. 

"It  endeavors  to  give  ...  a  full  and  accurate  account 
of  the  history  and  literature,  the  social  and  intellectual 
life,  of  the  Jewish  people — of  their  ethical  and  religious 
views,  their  customs,  rites,  and  traditions  in  all  ages  and 
in  all  lands..  It  also  offers  detailed  biographical  informa- 
tion concerning  representatives  of  the  Jewish  race  who 
have  achieved  distinction  in  any  of  the  walks  of  life."' 
Preface.  The  articles  are  signed  by  initials  and  arranged 
in  alphabetical  order.  Bibliographies  and  illustrations. 


127 


222-224 


CHAPTER    XIX 
LITERATURE 

222.  In  the  field  of  literature  there  are  many  ex- 
cellent works  of  reference,  the  most  generally  used  of 
which  are  listed  below.    Often,  however,  information  can 
be  more  quickly  or    satisfactorily    secured    from    other 
books  in  the  Reference  collection,  such  as  general  en- 
cyclopedias, biographical  dictionaries,  and  periodical  in- 
dexes, or  from  books  in  the  stacks,  such  as  histories  of 
literature,  books  on  the  various  forms  of  literature,  bio- 
graphical and  critical  material  about  an  author,  and  the 
texts  of  his  works.      (See   section  40-44   for  headings 
used  in  the  catalog  for  such  material.) 

223.  Cambridge  history  of  English  literature,  ed. 
by  A.  W.  Ward  and  A.  R.  Waller.    N.  Y.  Putnam,  1907- 
17.    14v. 

Separate  chapters  by  specialists.  Full  bibliographies 
arranged  by  chapters  at  the  end  of  each  volume.  No 
general  index. 

224.  Cambridge  history  of  American  literature,  ed. 
by  William   Peterfield  Trent,  John  Erskine,   Stuart  P. 
Sherman,  Carl  Van  Doren.    N.  Y.  Putnam,  1917-21.    4v. 

Similar  in  plan  and  arrangement  to  the  Cambridge 
history  of  English  literature,  v.3  and  4  paged  continu- 
ously with  the  bibliographies  and  a  single  index  in  v.4. 


128 


LITERATURE  225-226 

COLLECTIONS   AND   DICTIONARIES 

GENERAL 

225.  Warner,  Charles  Dudley,  ed.    Library  of  the 
world's  best  literature,  ancient  and  modern.     N.  Y.  Hill, 
c!902.     46v. 

Consists  mainly  of  selections  from  the  writings  of 
the  more  important  authors  of  all  countries  and  all  times. 
Good  biographical  and  critical  discussions  precede  the 
selections  from  each  author.  Arrangement  is  alphabeti- 
cal by  author  discussed.  In  some  cases,  when  the  name 
of  the  author  is  unknown  or  would  have  no  special  sig- 
nificance, the  material  is  grouped  under  nationality,  per- 
iod, or  special  topic;  for  example,  Egyptian  literature, 
Anglo-Saxon  literature,  folksong,  Arabian  nights,  etc. 
Special  volumes :  Songs,  hymns,  and  lyrics ;  Dictionary 
of  authors,  Synopses  of  noted  books,  Guide  to  systematic 
reading.  Illustrated  by  portraits  of  authors  discussed. 

In  a  revised  and  enlarged  edition  "World's  best  liter- 
ature" (Editors,  J.  W.  Cunliffe  and  A.  H.  Thorndike. 
N.  Y.  Knickerbocker  press  for  the  Warner  library  co., 
1917.  30v.)  some  new  names  have  been  added  and  the 
treatment  of  some  authors  such  as  Roosevelt  and  Mark- 
Twain  extended  when  their  work  since  the  publication 
of  the  first  edition  makes  their  treatment  inadequate. 

226.  Stedman,  Edmund  Clarence  and  Hutchinson, 
E.  M.,  ed.  Library  of  American  literature.    N.  Y.  Web- 
ster, c!887-90.     llv. 

Extracts  from  the  writings  of  Americans  from  the 
beginning  of  the  colonial  period  to  1888.  Broad  in 
scope,  including  much  material  which  illustrates  the  polit- 
ical or  social  life  of  the  nation,  but  which  is  not 

129     ' 


227-229        GUIDE  TO  T^E  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

literature  in  the  usual  sense.  No  criticism.  Arrangement 
is  chronological.  Brief  biographies  of  all  authors  repre- 
sented in  the  work  are  given  in  v.ll.  General  index  in 
v.ll  is  by  author,  subject,  or  form  of  literature,  sermons 
being  indexed  under  Theology,  letters  under  Corres- 
pondence, poems  under  Poetry,  stories  under  Fiction,  etc. 
Illustrated  with  portraits. 

227.  Chambers,   Robert.    Chambers's  cyclopaedia 
of  English  literature.    New  ed.  by  David  Patrick.    Phila- 
delphia, Lippincott,  1902-04.    3v. 

Gives  biographies  and  selections  from  typical  writings 
of  the  most  important  English  authors.  Also,  two  sec- 
tions entitled  "English  literature  in  the  British  dominions 
beyond  the  seas"  and  "American  literature."  Arranged 
chronologically.  A  general  index  in  v.3. 

ANTHOLOGIES 

228.  Carman,    Bliss,    ed.     World's    best    poetry. 
Philadelphia,  Morris,  c!904.  lOv. 

An  anthology  arranged  by  broad  subjects,  as  Home, 
Friendship,  Love,  Sorrow  and  consolation,  National 
spirit,  Tragedy,  Humor,  Nature,  etc.  Essays  at  the  front 
of  each  volume  on  subjects  relating  to  poetry.  Portraits 
and  other  illustrations.  V.10  is  a  dictionary  of  quota- 
tions but  also  contains  general  indexes  to  the  whole  work 
under  authors,  titles  and  first  lines. 

229.  Ward,  Thomas  Humphry,  ed.  English  poets. 
N.  Y.  Macmillan,  1908-18.   5v. 

A  chronological  arrangement.  Brief  biographical 
sketches  and  good  critical  essays  by  authorities  precede 

130 


LITERATURE  230-233 

the  selections   from   each  author.     No  American   poets 
are  included.    Index  of  poets  and  of  critics  in  v.5. 

230.  Bryant,  William  Cullen,  ed.    New  library  of 
poetry  and  song.     Rev.  and  enl.    N.  Y.  Fords,  c!900. 

A  collection  of  poems,  English  or  American  with  a 
few  translations,  arranged  by  large  subjects.  Index  of 
authors  in  the  front  of  the  book,  and  an  index  of  titles, 
of  first  lines,  and  of  poetical  quotations  in  the  back  of  the 
book. 

231.  Stevenson,  Burton  Egbert,  ed.    Home  book 
of  verse,  American  and  English,  1580-1918,  with  an  ap- 
pendix  containing  a   few   well   known   poems   in   other 
languages.    3d  ed.  rev.  and  enl.   N.  Y.  Holt,  1918. 

Especially  valuable  in  including  work  of  modern  poets. 
Arranged  by  broad  subjects  with  an  index  under  authors, 
first  lines  and  titles. 

232.  Stedman,   Edmund   Clarence,   ed.     American 
anthology,  1787-1900.     Boston,  Houghton,  1901. 

A  collection  of  poems  arranged  by  period.  Short 
biographies  of  the  poets  represented,  including  the  titles 
of  their  leading  works,  are  given  at  the  back  of  the  book. 
Index  of  first  lines,  titles  and  poets. 

233.  —Victorian  anthology,  1837-1895.    Bos- 
ton, Houghton,  c!895. 

A  selection  from  British  poetry  written  during  the 
reign  of  Queen  Victoria.  Arranged  in  broad  chrono- 
logical divisions  with  the  work  of  colonial  poets  in  a 
separate  division.  Under  each  period  poems  are  ar- 
ranged according  to  their  type.  Brief  biographical  notes 
of  poets  represented  are  included  in  the  back  of  the  book. 
Index  of  first  lines,  titles  and  poets. 

131 


234-237        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

ORATIONS 

234.  Reed,    Thomas    Brackett,    ed.     Modern    elo- 
quence. Philadelphia,  Morris,  1901-03.    15v. 

V.l-10  are  limited  to  speeches  delivered  during  the 
last  century.  V.l-3,  After-dinner  speeches;  v.4-6,  Lec- 
tures; v.7-9,  Occasional  addresses;  v.10,  Anecdotes,  ar- 
ranged by  classes.  V.I  1-15,  Political  oratory,  from  all 
periods.  Brief  introductions  before  each  speech  give  the 
circumstances  which  occasioned  it.  General  index  to 
v.1-10  in  v.10;  to  v.11-15  in  v.15. 

235.  Brewer,  David  Josiah,  ed.   World's  best  ora- 
tions.    St.  Louis,  Kaiser,  1900.  lOv. 

Includes  in  full  selected  speeches  of  the  world's 
greatest  orators  from  the  earliest  period  to  modern  times 
and  extracts  from  speeches  of  others  of  less  importance. 
Alphabetically  arranged  by  names  of  orators.  A  general 
index  in  v.10  for  authors,  subjects  and  titles ;  also  a  num- 
ber of  special  indexes. 

ESSAYS 

236.  Brewer,  David  Josiah,  ed.    World's  best  es- 
says.. St.  Louis,  Kaiser,  1900.    lOv. 

General  plan  corresponds  to  that  used  in  his  World's 
best  orations.  Indexes  are  in  v.10. 

COLLECTIONS  OF  LITERARY  CRITICISM 

237.  Allibone,  Samuel  Austin.    Critical  dictionary 
of  English  literature  and  British  and  American  authors. 
Philadelphia,  Lippincott,  c!854-71.   3v. 

— Supplement,  by  J.  F.  Kirk.    Philadelphia, 
Lippincott,  c!891.    2v. 

132 


LITERATURE  238-240 

Includes  a  great  many  names,  and  gives  under  each 
a  short  biographical  sketch,  full  list  of  works,  and  ref- 
erences— with  extracts  in  some  cases — to  criticisms  pub- 
lished in  books  and  periodicals.  The  supplementary  vol- 
umes bring  the  work  down  to  1888.  Some  of  the  later 
authors  are  included  both  in  the  main  work  and  in  the 
supplement.  Arrangement  is  alphabetical  by  author. 

238.  Moulton,  Charles  Wells,  ed.    Library  of  lit- 
erary criticism  of  English  and  American  authors.    Buf- 
falo, Moulton  pub.  co.,  1901-05.   8v. 

Similar  to  Allibone  in  scope  and  purpose.  Fewer 
authors  are  included,  but  more  criticisms  are  given  under 
each.  Arrangement  is  chronological.  For  each  author, 
there  is  given  brief  biographical  information,  comment 
on  the  personality  of  the  author,  criticisms  of  the  sepa- 
rate works  in  the  order  of  their  publication,  followed  by 
criticisms  of  his  work  in  general.  The  first  of  the  two 
indexes  in  v.8  is  of  the  authors  criticized ;  the  second, 
of  the  authors  of  the  criticisms. 

HANDBOOKS 

239.  Handbooks  of  general  information  are  useful 
in  identifying  literary,  biographical  or  mythological  al- 
lusions, and  in  finding  a  brief  statement  of  plots  or  leg- 
ends.    There  are  a  great  number  of  these  books,  many 
of  them  covering  much  the  same  field,  but  no  two  dupli- 
cating each  other.     The  arrangement  is  usually  alpha- 
betical and  the  title  often  shows  the  scope  of  the  par- 
ticular work. 

240.  Brewer,  Ebenezer  Cobham.    Reader's  hand- 
book of  famous   names  in  fiction,  allusions,  references, 

133 


241-243        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

proverbs,  plots,  stories  and  poems.    New  eel.,  rev.  and  enl. 
Philadelphia,  Lippincott,  c!898. 

One  of  the  most  satisfactory  of  the  handbooks. 

241.  Brewer,    Ebenezer    Cobham.    Dictionary    of 
phi^ase  and  fable.  New  ed.  enl.  Philadelphia,  Lippincott, 
c!896. 

Similar   to   Reader's   handbook,   but   includes   rather 
smaller  subjects  and  explanations  of  phrases, 

242.  Century  cyclopedia  of  names;  a  pronouncing 
and  etymological  dictionary.     Rev.  and  enl.  ed.     N.  Y. 
Century,  c!911. 

(For  description  of  this  volume  see  note  on  Century 
dictionary,  section  122). 

243.  Walsh,  William  Shepard.    Heroes  and  heroines 
of  fiction ;  classical,  mediaeval,  legendary.     Philadelphia, 
Lippincott,  c!915. 

—Heroes    and    heroines    of    fiction ;    modern 
prose  and  poetry.    Philadelphia,  Lippincott,  c!914. 

—Handy-book    of   literary   curiosities.     Phila- 
delphia, Lippincott,  1893. 

Edwards,  Eliezer.    Words,  facts,  and  phrases.    Phila- 
delphia, Lippincott,  pref.  1881. 

Frey,  Albert  Romer.    Sobriquets  and  nicknames.   Bos- 
ton, Houghton,  1895. 

Phyfe,  William  Henry  Pinkney.     Five  thousand  facts 
and  fancies.     N.  Y.  Putnam,  1901. 

Reddall,  Henry  Frederic.    Fact,  fancy  and  fable.  Chi- 
cago, McClurg,  c!889. 

Spence,  Lewis.    Dictionary  of  medieval  romance  and 
romance  writers.    London,  Routledge,  t1913]. 

Thorne,  Robert.    Fugitive  facts ;  a  dictionary  of  rare 
and  curious  information.     N.  Y.  Burt,  c!889. 

134 


LITERATURE  243 

Wheeler,  William  Adolphus.  Explanatory  and  pro- 
nouncing dictionary  of  the  noted  names  of  fiction,  in- 
cluding also,  familiar  pseudonyms,  surnames  bestowed  on 
eminent  men,  and  analogous  popular  appellations  often 
referred  to  in  literature  and  conversation.  23d  ed.  Bos- 
ton, Houghton,  1894. 

—Who  wrote  it?  An  index  to  the  authorship 
of  the  more  noted  works  in  ancient  and  modern  litera- 
ture; ed.  by  C.  G.  Wheeler.  Boston,  Lee,  c!881. 


135 


244-246 


CHAPTER    XX 

LITERATURE  (Continued) 
QUOTATIONS 

244.  Collections  of  quotations  are  useful  in  finding 
quotations  on  a  certain  subject  or  appropriate  to  a  cer- 
tain occasion,  the  source  of  a  particular  quotation,  the 
correct  form  of  a  quotation,  or  the  lines  of  an  author 
that  are  most  often  quoted. 

245.  Bartlett,  John.  Familiar  quotations.   10th  ed., 
rev.  and  enl.  by  N.  H.  Dole.   Boston,  Little,  1914. 

Quotations  from  prose  and  poetry  from  the  earliest 
times  down  to  the  present.  Gives  exact  reference  to 
author  and  work  from  which  the  quotation  is  taken. 
Arrangement  is  chronological  under  English  and  Ameri- 
can authors  with  supplementary  pages  giving  miscellan- 
eous and  translated  quotations.  Index  of  authors  in  the 
front  and  index  by  important  words  of  the  quotation  in 
the  back.  One  of  the  most  complete,  accurate,  and  sat- 
isfactory of  the  collections. 

246.  Hoyt,  Jehiel  Keeler.    Cyclopedia  of  practical 
quotations,  English,  Latin,  and  modern  foreign  languages. 
New  ed.,  rev.,  corrected  and  enl.   N.  Y.  Funk,  c!896. 

Arranged  alphabetically  by  subjects,  and  under  each 
subject  alphabetically  by  author.  Main  part  of  the  work 
devoted  to  quotations  in  English.  Special  sections  give 
quotations  from  foreign  languages  with  English  transla- 
tion. Topical  index  and  list  of  authors  quoted.  Indexes 
English  and  foreign  language  quotations  giving  reference 


LITERATURE  247-251 

not  only  to  the  page  but  also  to  the  exact  position  on 
the  page  where  a  quotation  will  be  found.  Most  useful 
collection  for  quotations  by  subjects. 

247.  Walsh,  William  Shepard.     International  en- 
cyclopedia of  prose  and  poetical  quotations  from  the  lit- 
erature of  the  world.     Philadelphia,  Winston,  c!908. 

Arranged  in  one  alphabet  by  subject.  An  index  of 
topics  with  cross  references,  and  a  list  of  authors  quoted, 
is  given  at  the  beginning  of  the  book;  an  index  of  im- 
portant words  at  the  end. 

248.  Allibone,  Samuel  Austin.   Poetical  quotations 
from    Chaucer   to   Tennyson.     Philadelphia,    Lippincott, 
c!873. 

Only  English  quotations  are  included.  Arranged 
alphabetically  by  subject.  Indexed  by  authors,  subjects, 
and  first  lines. 

249.  —Prose    quotations    from    Socrates    to 
Macaulay.     Philadelphia,  Lippincott,  c!875. 

Brief  quotations  from  the  prose  literature  of  the 
world.  Arranged  alphabetically  by  subject.  Index  of 
authors  and  subjects. 

250.  Bent,  Samuel  Arthur.   Familiar  short  sayings 
of  great  men ;  with  historical  and  explanatory  notes.  Rev. 
and  enl.  ed.     Boston,  Houghton,  c!887. 

Contains  only  oral  utterances  with  the  exception  of 
some  passages  from  letters,  journals,  proclamations,  and 
addresses.  Arranged  alphabetically  by  author  quoted. 
Index  of  sayings. 

251.  Day,  Edward  Parsons.  Day's  collacon  ;  an  en- 
cyclopaedia of  prose  quotations.    London,  Low,  1883  ? 

137 


252-256       GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Prose  quotations  arranged  alphabetically  by  subjects. 
No  index  to  quotations,  but  an  index  to  subjects  in  the 
front  of  the  book  and  a  biographical  index  of  authors. 

252.  Swan,  Helena.    Dictionary  of  contemporary 
quotations  (English).     London,  Sonnenschein,  1904. 

"Roughly  speaking,  the  poems  from  which  these  quo- 
tations are  taken  date  from  after  1850."  Preface.  Sub- 
ject arrangement.  Author  index. 

253.  Christy,    Robert.      Proverbs,    maxims,    and 
phrases  of  all  ages.     N.  Y.  Putnam,  c!887.     2v. 

Arrangement  alphabetical  by  subject.  Index  of  sub- 
jects in  v.2. 

254.  Hazlitt,  William   Carew.    English  proverbs 
and  proverbial  phrases.    London,  Reeves,  1907. 

255.  Edmund,  Peggy  and  Williams,  H.  W.  Toast- 
er's  handbook;   jokes,   stories   and   quotations.     White 
Plains,  N.  Y.,  Wilson,  1914. 

Aims  to  assist  the  toast  writer  by  supplying  him  with 
a  story,  definition  or  verse  (for  the  most  part  humorous). 
Arranged  alphabetically  by  subject.  A  second  collection, 
More  toasts,  by  Marion  Dix  Mosher,  on  the  same  plan 
but  with  entirely  new  selections,  is  being  published. 

256.  Concordances  to  the  Bible   (see  section  218) 
afford  the  best  means  of  identifying  Biblical  quotations. 
Special  author    concordances,    when    available,    furnish 
more  complete  treatment  of  their  authors  than  books  of 
general  quotations  can  give;  e.g.  John  Bartlett's  Concor- 
dance to  Shakespeare,  and  similar  publications  for  Burns, 
Cowper,  Keats,  Shelley,  Tennyson,  Wordsworth,  and  so 

138 


LITERATURE  257-259 

on.  There  are  also  special  author  dictionaries  that  are 
useful  in  identifying  references  to  the  characters,  places, 
etc.,  mentioned  in  an  author's  works. 

INDEXES  TO  GENERAL  LITERATURE 

257.  The  "A.  L.  A."  index;  an  index  to  general  lit- 
erature. 2d  ed.  enl.  and  brought  down  to  January  1,  1900. 
Boston,  American  library  association,  c!901. 

— supplement,  1900-10.    Chicago,  American  li- 
brary association  publishing  board,  1914. 

A  subject  index  to  books  of  essays  and  travel,  society 
and  government  publications,  and  volumes  of  a  miscel- 
laneous content  that  are  most  commonly  found  in  the 
libraries  of  this  country  and  that  are  especially  useful 
for  reference  work.  Information  given :  author  and 
brief  title  of  book,  volume  and  page.  An  alphabetical 
author  list  of  the  books  indexed  is  in  the  back  of  the 
main  work  and  in  the  front  of  the  supplement. 

258.  Baker,  Ernest  Albert.    Guide  to  the  best  fic- 
tion in  English.     New  ed.  enl.  and  rev.     London,  Rout- 
ledge,  1913. 

A  selected  list  of  the  best  English  and  American  fic- 
tion and  the  best  foreign  fiction  translated  into  English 
(a  few  titles  had  not  been  translated)  with  brief  note 
as  to  the  contents  and  style  of  each  book.  Arranged  ac- 
cording to  the  nationality  of  the  author  and  then,  under 
periods,  alphabetically  by  author.  Index  is  by  authors, 
titles,  subjects,  characters,  localities,  and  historical  names 
and  allusions. 

259. Guide  to  historical  fiction.     London, 

Routledge,  1914. 

139 


260-261        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

A  list  of  about  5,000  novels  in  English  which  in  any 
way  picture  the  life  of  the  past.  Brief  note  as  to  scene, 
plot,  characters,  and  so  on,  of  each  novel.  Arranged  first 
by  the  country  furnishing  the  setting  of  the  novel  and 
then  chronologically  by  historical  period.  Index  of  au- 
thors, titles,  subjects,  historical  characters,  places,  events, 
etc.  Standard  work  in  the  field. 

260.  Firkins,    Ina    Ten    Eyck.     Index    to    short 
stories.    White  Plains,  N.  Y.  Wilson,  1915. 

Refers  to  stories  by  the  more  important  English  and 
American  authors  and  by  a  few  foreign  authors  whose 
stories  have  been  translated  into  English.  Indexes  stories 
published  in  collected  editions  and  in  separate  volumes 
of  an  author's  works,  in  periodicals,  and  in  collections  of 
literature.  Arranged  alphabetically  by  author  and  title, 
with  the  author's  name  in  heavy  type.  References  to  the 
books  and  magazines  in  which  the  story  may  be  found 
are  given  only  under  the  author's  name. 

261.  Granger,  Edith,  ed.   Index  to  poetry  and  reci- 
tations.    Rev.  and  enl.  ed.     Chicago,  McClurg,  1918. 

Indexes  "four  hundred  and  fifty  volumes,  comprising 
standard  and  popular  collections  of  poetry,  recitations 
(both  prose  and  verse),  orations,  drills,  dialogues,  selec- 
tions from  drama,  etc."  Preface.  The  book  is  divided 
into  three  parts:  title,  author  and  first  line  indexes. 
The  title  index  is  the  main  part  and  references  are  given 
he.re  by  means  of  symbols  to  the  various  books  in  which 
the  selection  may  be  found.  In  the  front  is  a  Key  to 
symbols  to  which  the  call  numbers  are  usually  added  to 
indicate  the  volumes  the  library  owns. 

140 


LITERATURE  262-264 

262.  Book  review  digest,  1905-date.   N.  Y.  Wilson, 
1905-date. 

Monthly  numbers  with  semi-annual  and  annual  cumu- 
lations. Lists  the  more  important  books  of  general  in- 
terest published  during  the  period  covered  by  the  volume. 
Gives  exact  reference — with  often  a  brief  digest — to  re- 
views published  about  each  book  (selected  from  about 
sixty  English  and  American  publications).  Indicates  the 
number  of  words  in  each  article  and,  by  the  use  of  +  (for 
favorable)  and — (for  unfavorable),  shows  the  reviewer's 
estimate  of  the  book.  Arranged  alphabetically  by  au- 
thors with  an  index  under  subject,  title  and  pseudonym. 
The  index  in  the  monthly  issue  covers  all  the  numbers 
since  the  last  cumulation.  Cumulated  index  in  v.17. 
(1921)  covers  1917-1921. 

263.  Booklist;    a   guide   to   the   best   new   books, 
1905-date.     Chicago,  American  library  association  pub- 
lishing board,  1905-date. 

Published  monthly  (except  for  two  months  of  the 
year) .  Planned  primarily  as  an  aid  in  book  selection  for 
a  medium  sized  public  library  but  useful  as  a  guide  to 
important  new  books.  Gives  brief  descriptive  notes. 

264.  United   States  catalog;  books  in  print  Jan- 
uary 1,  1912.     Minneapolis,  Wilson,  1912. 

—Supplement;  books  published  1912-17.  N.  Y. 
Wilson,  1918. 

—Supplement;  Jan.   1918- June   1921.     N.  Y. 
Wilson,  1921. 

A  list  of  all  the  books  in  print  in  the  U.  S.  Jan.  1, 
1912,  and  a  supplement  for  all  books  published  from 
1912  to  June  1921.  Arranged  alphabetically  under 

141 


265-267        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

author,  subject  and  title  of  the  book.  Gives  publisher  and 
price  for  each.  In  the  back,  is  a  directory  of  publishers 
giving  their  street  addresses. 

265.  Cumulative    book   index,    1898-date.     N.    \. 
Wilson,  1898-date. 

Supplemenls  the  United  States  catalog  (above)  and 
keeps  it  up-to-date. 

266.  Ayer,  N.  W.  and  Son.    American  newspaper 
annual    and    directory,    1881-date.     Philadelphia,  Ayer,. 
1881-date. 

A  list  of  American  (including  Canadian,  Cuban,  and 
the  West  Indian)  newspapers  and  periodicals  with  infor- 
mation concerning  the  circulation,  names  of  editors, 
frequency  of  issue,  page  size,  publishers  and  prices,  date 
of  establishment,  politics  or  other  distinctive  features. 
Arrangement  is  alphabetical  under  states  and  then  towns. 
Classified  list  of  publications  in  the  back;  e.g.,  Daily  news- 
papers, Religious  publications,  Agricultural  publications, 
Trade  publications,  etc.  Alphabetical  index  in  later  vol- 
umes. Contains  other  miscellaneous  material  such  as 
postal  information,  proof-readers'  marks,  population  sta- 
tistics, etc. 

267.  Severance,  Henry  Ormal.  A  guide  to  the  cur- 
rent periodicals  and  serials  of  the  United   States  and 
Canada.     4th  ed.     Ann  Arbor,  Mich.  Wahr,  1920. 

An  alphabetical  list  of  periodical  publications  giving 
frequency  of  publication,  price,  publisher  and  place  of 
publication.  Classified  list  of  periodicals  in  the  back, 
including  a  list  of  trade  journals. 


142 


268-270 


CHAPTER    XXI 

FINE  ARTS 
ARCHITECTURE 

268.  Sturgis,  Russell.    Dictionary  of  architecture 
and  building ...  by  Russell  Sturgis  and  many  architects, 
painters,   engineers,   and  other  expert  writers.      N.   Y. 
Macmillan,  c!901.    3v. 

Descriptions  of  famous  buildings,  articles  on  the  ar- 
chitecture of  various  countries,  biographies  of  architects 
as  well  as  more  technical  material.  Some  articles  are 
very  short,  hardly  more  than  definitions,  others  are  long 
and  signed.  Arranged  alphabetically  and  illustrated. 

269.  Longfellow,  William  Pitt  Preble,  ed.    Cyclo- 
paedia of  works  of  architecture  in  Italy,  Greece  and  the 
Levant.     N.  Y.  Scribner,  1903. 

Descriptions  of  important  architectural  works  in  Italy, 
Greece,  and  the  Levant  arranged  alphabetically  by  places. 
Illustrations. 

PAINTING 

270.  Bryan,  Michael.    Bryan's  dictionary  of  paint- 
ers and  engravers.     New  ed.  rev.   and  enl.  under  the 
supervision  of  G.  C.  Williamson,    London,  Bell,  1903-05. 
5v. 

Biographies  of  painters  and  engravers,  exclusive  of 
those  living  at  the  time  of  publication,  and  lists  of  their 
most  important  works  with  the  name  of  the  gallery  or 
museum  containing  the  original.  Some  of  the  articles 

143 


271-272        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

are  signed  by  the  initials  of  the  authors.  The  arrange- 
ment is  alphabetical  by  names  of  artists  only.  Full  page 
reproductions  of  famous  paintings.  First  edition  was  is- 
sued in  1816. 

271.  Champlin,  John  Dennison,  ed.    Cyclopedia  of 
painters  and  paintings.     Critical   editor,  C.  C.   Perkins, 
C1885-87.    4v. 

Brief  biographical  facts  concerning  painters,  with 
lists  of  their  works.  Under  the  names  of  famous  paint- 
ings are  very  short  descriptions,  usually  including  the 
name  of  the  artist,  the  size  of  the  painting,  the  date 
when  painted  if  known,  and  the  name  of  the  gallery  or 
museum  containing  the  original.  Alphabetically  arranged 
by  names  of  artists  and  pictures.  Illustrations  are  merely 
outlines. 

MUSIC 

272.  Grove,  Sir  George,  ed.    Grove's  dictionary  of 
music  and  musicians;  ed.  by  J.  A.  F.  Maitland.     N.  Y. 
Macmillan,   1904-10.  5v. 

— American  supplement ;  being  the  sixth  vol- 
ume of  the  complete  work.  W.  S.  Pratt,  editor.  C.  N. 
Boyd,  associate  editor.  N.  Y.  Macmillan,  1920. 

A  standard  work  on  the  subject  but  especially  good 
for  English  and  American  music  and  musicians.  The 
articles  in  v.1-5  are  signed  by  the  initials  of  the  authors 
and  arranged  alphabetically.  V.6,  the  American  supple-' 
ment,  is  in  two  divisions :  first,  a  historical  introduction 
concerning  the  development  of  music  in  America,  and 
second,  a  dictionary  of  American  music  and  musicians 
arranged  in  the  usual  alphabetical  order. 

144 


FINE  ARTS  273-275 

273.  Hubbard,  William  Lines,  ed.    American  his- 
tory and  encyclopedia  of  music.     Toledo,  Squire,  c!908- 
10.    12v. 

Contents:  v.1-2,  Operas;  v.3,  Foreign  music;  v.4,  In- 
struments ;  v.5-6,  Musical  biographies ;  v.7,  American 
music ;  v.8,  Oratorios  and  masses ;  v.9,  Theory  of  music ; 
v.10,  Musical  dictionary;  v.  11-12,  Essentials  of  music. 
General  index  in  v.12  refers  to  volumes  by  letters. 

274.  University   musical   encyclopedia,   by    many 
eminent  editors,  experts,  and  special  contributors.    N.  Y. 
University  society,  c!910-14.    12v. 

Contents:  v.1-2,  History  of  music;  v.3-4,  Great  com- 
posers ;  v.5,  Religious  music ;  v.6,  Vocal  music  and  musi- 
cians;  v.7,  The  opera;  v.8,  Theory  of  music;  v.9-10,  Dic- 
tionary of  music;  v. 11-12,  Musicians'  practical  instructor. 
No  general  index. 

275.  Riemann,  Hugo.  Dictionary  of  music.  4th  ed 
rev.  and  enl.   Translation  by  J.   S.   Shedlock.    London, 
Augener,  1908. 

Biographies  of  musicians,  definitions  of  musical  terms, 
articles  on  musical  instruments,  forms,  etc.  Alphabetical 
arrangement. 


145 


276-278 


276.  Thorpe,  Sir  Thomas  Edward.  A  dictionary  of 
applied   chemistry.      Rev.   and  enl.   ed.    London,   Long- 
mans, 1921-     v.l-  To  be  in  6v. 

A  cyclopedia  of  chemistry  in  its  application  to  arts 
and  manufactures.  Long  articles  by  authorities.  Many 
are  signed  by  initials  and  are  followed  by  good  bibliog- 
raphies. Abbreviations  used  in  bibliographies  explained 
in  front  of  each  volume.  Arrangement  alphabetical  by 
small  subjects.  Illustrated. 

277.  Chemical  catalog  company,  inc.  New  York. 
The  condensed  chemical  dictionary ;  a  reference  volume 
for  all   requiring  access  to  a  large  amount  of  essential 
data  regarding  chemicals.     N.  Y.     The  author,  1919. 

Prepared  for  the  non-technical  user,  it  is  also  a  time- 
saver  for  chemists.  Arranged  alphabetically.  Explana- 
tion of  terms  and  symbols  used,  in  the  front.  Condensed 
information  given:  [chemical]  derivation,  color  and 
properties,  constants,  grades,  method  of  purification,  con- 
tainers, uses,  fire  hazard,  railroad  shipping  regulations. 
Appendixes:  tables  of  weights  and  measures,  tempera- 
tures for  Fahrenheit  and  Centigrade  compared,  specific 
gravity  equivalents,  definitions  of  units,  transportation  of 
dangerous  articles  other  than  explosives. 

278.  Glazebrook,  Sir  Richard,  ed.   A  dictionary  of 
applied  physics.     London,  Macmillan,  1922-  v.l-  To  be 
in  5v. 

146 


SCIENCE  279-280 

Aims  to  make  easily  available  the  most  recent  knowl- 
edge of  the  principles  and  methods  of  physics  which 
form  the  basis  of  such  subjects  as  aeronautics,  design 
and  construction  of  optical  instruments,  clocks,  engines, 
etc.  Each  volume  on  a  separate  branch  of  the  subject 
has  its  own  alphabetical  arrangement  by  broad  topics, 
but  with  analytical  cross  references.  Articles  signed  by 
authorities.  Bibliographies  and  illustrations. 

279.  U.  S.  Geological  survey.  World  atlas  of  com- 
mercial geology.    Washington,  U.  S.  Geological  survey, 
1921-  Pt.  1- 

,  Part  1.  Distribution  of  mineral  production  contains 
for  each  group  of  minerals  a  map  of  the  world  showing 
production  and  consumption,  1913;  maps  of  the  conti- 
nents showing  production  in  1913;  and  a  map  of  the 
United  States  showing  production  in  1918;  with  descrip- 
tive text  and  statistics. 

Part  2.  Water  power  of  the  world,  contains  maps 
of  the  world  showing  altitude  of  land,  mean  annual 
precipitation  and  water  power  and  maps  of  the  continents 
showing  developed  water  power  in  1920  and  water  power 
resources ;  with  a  general  account  of  the  water  power 
resources  of  the  world,  their  present  development  and 
possible  interrelation  with  mineral  deposits  and  indus- 
tries. 

280.  — Geologic  atlas  of  the  United   States, 
no.l-date.     Washington,  U.  S.  Geological  survey,  1894- 
date. 

"Issued  in  parts  called  folios.  Each  folio  includes 
topographic,  geologic,  economic  and  structural  maps  of 

147. 


281-283        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

t. 

a  'quadrangle'  or  small  section  of  the  country,  together 
with  other  illustrations,  and  a  general  description." 
Kroeger. 

281.  Gannett,  Henry.    A  dictionary  of  altitudes  in 
the   United    States.    4th   ed.     Washington,   Government 
printing  office,  1906.   (U.  S.  Geological  survey.  Bulletin 
274.) 

Arranged  alphabetically  by  state  and  then  by  place. 
Elevation  in  feet  given  and  abbreviation  denoting  author- 
ity. Sources  of  information  listed  in  introductory  note, 
with  explanation  of  the  abbreviations  of  names  of  rail- 
roads used  as  authorities. 

I 

282.  Gray,  Asa.    Gray's  new  manual  of  botany,  a 
handbook  of  the  flowering  plants  and  ferns  of  the  central 
and   northeastern   United    States   and   adjacent   Canada. 
7th  ed.     N.  Y.  American  book  co.    c!908. 

Classified  arrangement  of  plants  by  families  and 
species,  with  analytical  key  in  front  and  Glossary  and 
minute  index  in  back  of  book.  Illustrations  small,  show- 
ing details  rather  than  general  appearance  of  plants. 

283.  Mathews,  Ferdinand  Schuyler.   Field  book  of 
American  wild  flowers.     New  ed.  rev.  and  enl.     N.  Y. 
Putnam,  c!912. 

Field  book  of  American  trees  and  shrubs. 

N.  Y.  Putnam,  c!915. 

Two  small  and  popular  handbooks  containing  short 
descriptions  of  the  plants,  arranged  by  families.  Very 
profusely  illustrated,  including  many  colored  plates.  In- 
dex of  Latin  and  common  names  in  the  back  of  each 
book  and  keys  to  families  by.  leaves  are  also  provided. 

148 


SCIENCE  284-287 

4 

The  Field  book  of  flowers  contains  a  color  index,  while 
the  Field  book  of  trees  has  insjtead  a  key  for  identifica- 
tion by  bark  and  maps  showing  distribution  in  the  United 
States. 

284.  Hough,  Romeyn  Beck.  Handbook  of  the  trees 
of  the  northern  states  and  Canada  east  of  the  Rocky 
Mountains.   Lowville,  N.  Y.   The  author,  1907. 

For  each  tree  are  given  a  brief  description,  including 
commercial  value,  and  fine  illustrations  from  photographs 
of  the  trunk,  leaves,  fruit,  winter  branchlet,  a  small  map 
of  the  United  States  shaded  to  show  distribution,  and  in 
"some  cases  a  cross  section  showing  grain  of  the  wood. 
Analytical  &eys,  glossary,  and  index. 

285.  Rogers,  Julia  Ellen.    The  tree  book.    Garden 
City,  N.  Y.   Doubleday,  1905. 

Description  of  trees,  and  chapters  on  forestry,  uses 
of  wood  and  life  of  trees.  Illustrations  show  shape  of 
tree,  leaves,  bark,  fruit,  and  winter  buds.  Some  colored 
plates.  Appendix  contains  special  lists  of  trees;  e.g. 
tallest  and  oldest  trees  in  the  world,  trees  with  bright 
autumn  foliage.  Good  index. 

286.  Atkinson,  George  Francis.    Studies  of  Ameri- 
can  fungi,   mushrooms,"  edible,   poisonous,  etc.    3d  ed. 
N.  Y.  Holt,  1911. 

Descriptions  and  photographs  of  mushrooms,  with 
chapters  on  cultivation,  uses,  and  cooking.  Glossary  and 
indexes  of  genera  and  species. 

287.  Hornaday,  William  Temple.    American  nat- 
ural history.    N.  Y.  Scribner,  1914.  4v. 

149 


288-290        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Popular,  but  authoritative,  work  describing  vertebrates 
of  North  America.  Classified  arrangement,  with  index  at 
end  of  v.4.  Many  illustrations. 

288.  Newton,  Alfred.    Dictionary  of  birds.    Lon- 
don, Black,  1893.   4v. 

Based  on  the  author's  articles  in  the  9th  ed.  of  the 
Encyclopaedia  Britannica,  with  a  large  number  of  addi- 
tional articles,  some  of  which  are  by  other  authorities. 
Includes  not  only  descriptions  of  particular  birds,  but 
also  articles  on  general  subjects  such  as  eggs,  geographi- 
cal distribution,  color  of  birds.  Arranged  alphabetically. 
Illustrated.  Index  in  v.4. 

289.  Chapman,  Frank  Michler.  Handbook  of  birds 
of  eastern   North  America.  Rev.  ed.     N.  Y.  Appleton, 
1912. 

Long  introduction  on  bird  life  in  general,  with  bib- 
liography of  ornithological  magazines,  followed  by  Key 
to  families  and  descriptions  of  birds  in  a  classified  ar- 
rangement. Bibliographical  appendix  lists  books  dealing 
with  birds  of  particular  states  arranged  alphabetically  by 
states.  Well  indexed  and  illustrated. 

290.  Holland,  William  Jacob.   The  butterfly  book. 
Garden  City,  N.  Y.    Doubleday,  c!898. 

-  The  moth  book.    Garden  City,  N.  Y.    Dou- 
bleday, c!903. 

Popular  handbooks,  with  introductory  chapters  on 
life  history  and  anatomy  of  the  insects  and  their  collect- 
ing and  classification,  with  a  bibliography.  Descriptions 
of  the  different  species.  Beautifully  illustrated  with  col- 
ored plates.  Minute  index  in  each  book. 

150 


SCIENCE  291 

291.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.  Price 
list.  Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

No.  15,  Geological  survey:  Works  on  geology,  min- 
eral resources,  and  water  supply. 

No.  39,  Birds  and  wild  animals.  North  American 
fauna,  game,  and  mice. 

No.  48,  Weather.  Scientific  studies  in  climate,  local 
records,  floods,  earthquakes,  use  of  kites  and  other  in- 
struments. 

No.  55,  National  museum  and  National  academy  of 
sciences,  reports,  bulletins,  and  proceedings. 

No.  57,  Astronomy. 


151 


292-294 


CHAPTER    XXIII 
AGRICULTURE 

292.  Bailey,    Liberty    Hyde,    ed.     Cyclopedia  -of 
American  agriculture.    N.  Y.  Macmillan,  c!907-09.    4v. 

Signed  articles  with  bibliographies.  Contents:  v.l, 
Farms;  v.2,  Crops;  v.3,  Animals;  v.4,  Farm  and  com- 
munity. Index  in  each  volume.  Well  illustrated. 

293.     Standard   cyclopedia  of   horticulture. 

N.  Y.  Macmillan,  1914-17.    6v. 

Signed  articles  on  the  different  species  of  plants 
grown  in  the  U.  S.  and  Canada,  the  standard  methods  of 
cultivation  for  the  staple  flowers,  fruits  and  vegetables, 
and  the  effective  arrangement  of  plant  materials.  Bibli- 
ographical references  in  abbreviated  form  are  explained 
in  the  front  of  v.l.  Mainly  an  alphabetical  arrangement. 
V.6  contains  supplementary  articles,  a  finding  list  of  bi- 
nomials, and  a  general  index  to  synonyms,  vernacular 
names,  and  miscellaneous  references  not  in  alphabetical 
order  in  the  cyclopedia.  Many  illustrations. 

294.  Agricultural  index,  1916-date.    N.  Y.  Wilson, 
1919-date. 

Volumes  for  1916-1918  and  1919-1921  are  continued 
by  numbers  cumulating  quarterly,  annually,  and  triennial- 
ly.  Indexes  agricultural  periodicals,  bulletins,  govern- 
ment reports,  and  occasionally  other  literature.  Arranged 
alphabetically  by  subjects.  Information  given  with  the 

152 


AGRICULTURE  295-296 

periodical  references:  title  of  the  article,  author's  name 
if  known,  abbreviated  title  of  the  periodical,  volume,  in- 
clusive page  reference,  exact  date.  Lists  of  publications 
indexed  with  abbreviations  used  are  in  the  front  of  each 
volume  or  number. 

GOVERNMENT  PUBLICATIONS 

295.  The  publications  of  the  U.  S.  Department  of 
agriculture  and   the   state   agricultural   experiment   sta- 
tions contain  a  great  deal  of  valuable  information,  and 
there  are  special  card  indexes  to  these  publications.    The 
Experiment  station  record,  described  in  section  305,  and 
the  Agricultural  index  are  often  used  in  research  work 
as  indexes  to  the  recent  literature  issued  by  the  agricul- 
tural experiment  stations  and  the  U.  S.  Department  of 
agriculture. 

CARD  INDEXES 

296.  U.  S.  Department  of  agriculture.   Card  index 
of  experiment  station  literature.    Washington,  U.  S.  De- 
partment of  agriculture,  1888-date. 

A  subject  index  on  half-size  catalog  cards  to  articles 
in  the  reports  and  bulletins  issued  by  the  state  agricultural 
experiment  stations.  The  cards  are  arranged  according 
to  a  decimal  system  of  classification  devised  by  the  U.  S. 
Office  of  experiment  stations.  In  looking  for  material 
on  a  subject  consult  first  the  printed  key  to  the  index 
(Circular  no.  23  of  the  U.  S.  Office  of  experiment  sta- 
tions or  Document  no.  $7  of  the  U.  S.  States  relations 
service)  and  find  the  number  standing  for  that  subject, 
then  turn  to  the  cards  bearing  the  number.  For  example, 

153 


297  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

if  references  on  Currants  are  wanted  one  will  find  by 
consulting  the  key  that  5  is  the  number  for  Plants.  This 
is  divided  into  .1  Field  crops;  .2  Horticulture.  The  lat- 
ter is  subdivided  into  .01  Vegetables ;  .02  Orchard  fruits  ; 
.03  Small  fruits.  Thus  the  complete  number  for  Small 
fruits  is  5.23.  The  cards  numbered  5.23  are  arranged  al- 
phabetically by  the  topics  in  heavy  type  on  the  first  line 
as  Blackberries,  Cherries,  Cranberries,  Currants.  Under 
each  topic,  e.g.  Currants,  Tests  of  varieties,  the  cards  are 
arranged  alphabetically  by  experiment  stations,  as  Colo- 
rado, Indiana,  Maryland,  and  then  chronologically  under 
stations,  e.g.  Colorado  Report  1889,  Colorado  Bulletin 
1900.  Information  given  on  each  card:  title  and  author 
of  the  article,  reference  to  the  bulletin  or  report  in  which 
it  appeared  and  to  the  Experiment  station  record  in 
which  an  abstract  of  the  article  may  be  found,  a  very 
brief  statement  of  its  contents  and,  in  the  upper  right 
hand  corner,  the  classification  number  according  to  which 
the  card  is  filed  in  the  index. 

297.  U.  S.  Department  of  agriculture.  Card  index 
to  publications  of  the  U.  S.  Department  of  agriculture. 
Washington,  Government  printing  office,  1899-1901 ;  Li- 
brary of  Congress,  1902-date. 

An  analytical  index  to  publications  of  the  U.  S.  De- 
partment of  agriculture.  The  cards  are  prepared  by  the 
Library  of  the  U.  S.  Department  of  agriculture  and 
printed  and  distributed  by  the  Library  of  Congress.  The 
arrangement  is  alphabetical  by  author,  subject  and  some- 
times title.  Information  given  on  each  card;  author, 
title,  date  and  pages  of  the  article  with  reference  to  the 
publication  in  which  it  appeared. 

154 


AGRICULTURE  298-301 

DOCUMENTS 

298.  Finch,    Vernor    Clifford    and    Baker,    O.    E. 

Geography  of  the  world's  agriculture.    Washington,  Gov- 
ernment printing  office,  1917. 

Sections  on  farm  products,  including  both  crops  and 
live  stock.  Brief  text  supplemented  by  maps  and  statisti- 
cal charts  showing  geographical  distribution. 

299.  U.  S.  Department  of  agriculture.    Yearbook, 
1894-date.       Washington,    Government    printing    office, 
1895-date. 

Each  volume  contains  signed,  illustrated  articles  of  a 
popular  character  on  practical  agricultural  subjects,  a  re- 
port by  the  Secretary  of  agriculture  on  the  Department's 
work  during  the  year  and  many  agricultural  statistics. 

300.  —Farmers'   bulletin,   no.  1 -date.     Wash- 
ington, Government  printing  office,   1889-date. 

Concise,  practical,  and  instructive  material  on  topics 
pertaining  to  agriculture  and  home  economics ;  e.g.  no 
1087,  Beautifying  the  farmstead;  no.  1089,  Selection  and 
care  of  clothing.  A  general  index  covering  Farmers' 
bulletins  no. 1-1000  has  been  issued. 

301.         Bulletin,      no.l-date.      Washington, 

Government  printing  office,  1913-date. 

This  series  of  popular  and  semitechnical  contributions 
from  the  bureaus,  divisions,  and  offices  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  agriculture  was  started  in  1913,  superseding  the 
series  of  bulletins  and  circulars  formerly  used  by  the 
various  bureaus,  divisions,  and  offices  of  the  Department 
separately.  Bulletins  which  are  too  technical  to  be  of 

155 


302-305        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

general  interest  are  called  "Professional  papers ;"  e.g. 
no. 724,  Drainage  methods  and  foundations  for  county 
roads;  no.772,  The  genera  of  grasses  of  the  United 
States. 

302.  U.  S.  Department  of  agriculture.  Department 
circular,  no.l-date.   Washington,  Government  printing 
office,  1919-date. 

Brief  pamphlets  on  matters  concerning  agriculture  and 
home  economics ;  e.g.  no. 3,  Drying  vegetables  and  fruits 
for  home  use;  no.66,  Organization  and  results  of  boys' 
and  girls'  club  work  (Northern  and  western  states). 

303.     — Office  of  the  secretary  circular,  no.l- 
date.  Washington,  Government  printing  office,  1896-date. 

These  short  pamphlets  from  the  office  of  the  Secre- 
tary of  agriculture  deal  with  the  work  of  the  Depart- 
ment or  some  phase  of  agriculture;  e.g.  no. 120,  Rules 
and  regulations  of  the  Secretary  of  agriculture  under  the 
food  products  inspection  /aw  of  October  i,  1918 ;  no.  127, 
The  " i f '-year  locust"  in  1919- 

304.     Journal  of  agricultural  research,  v.l- 

22.  Washington,  Government  printing  office,  1913-21. 

A  periodical  on  agricultural  science,  containing 
articles  by  scientific  workers  of  the  agricultural  experi- 
ment stations  and  the  Department  of  agriculture.  Too 
technical  to  be  of  general  interest. 

305.  —Experiment    station    record,   v.l-date. 
Washington,  Government  printing  office,  1889-date. 

A  monthly  publication,  consisting  mainly  of  abstracts 
and  reviews  of  the  world's  current  agricultural  literature. 
Useful  to  the  research  worker  as  an  index  to  the  ma- 
terial bearing  upon  agricultural  science  appearing  in 

156 


AGRICULTURE  306-307 

periodicals,  publications  of  the  U.  S.  Department  of  agri- 
culture, the  agricultural  experiment  stations  of  the  world, 
etc.  The  abstracts  are  classified  under  the  following  sub- 
jects :  Agricultural  chemistry — Agrotechny,  Meteorol- 
ogy, Soils — Fertilizers,  Agricultural  botany,  Field  crops, 
Horticulture,  Forestry,  Diseases  of  plants,  Economic 
zoology — Entomology,  Foods — Human  nutrition,  Animal 
production,  Dairy  farming — Dairying,  Veterinary  medi- 
cine, Rural  engineering,  Rural  economics,  Agricultural 
education,  Miscellaneous.  Minute  table  of  contents  in 
each  number;  index  of  names,  and  index  of  subjects  in 
each  volume.  Separate  indexes  for  v.1-12,  and  v. 13-25. 
Circular  62  of  the  Experiment  stations  office  of  the  U.  S. 
Department  of  agriculture  is  a  list  of  abbreviations  used 
for  publications  reviewed  in  the  Experiment  station 
record  with  the  names  of  the  publications  in  full. 

306.  U.  S.  Department  of  agriculture.    Weather, 
crops  and  markets,  v.l-date.   Washington,  Government 
printing  office,  1922-date. 

Weekly.  A  combination  of  three  former  publications 
of  the  U.  S.  Department  of  agriculture,  the  Market  re- 
porter, Monthly  crop  reporter  and  the  National  iveather 
and  crop  bulletin.  Contains  reviews  and  statistical  infor- 
mation concerning  prices  and  the  principal  markets  for 
farm  products,  reports  of  the  crop  estimating  service, 
and  summaries  of  weather  and  crop  conditions. 

307.  The  following  lists  are  convenient  guides  for 
ordering  personal   copies  of   the  Department's  publica- 
tions. 

U.  S.  Department  of  agriculture.  Monthly  list  of 
publications  of  the  Department  of  agriculture.  Washing- 
ton, Government  printing  office. 

157 


307  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

This  is  sent  regularly  to  all  who  request  it.  Many  of 
the  publications  entered  may  be  obtained  free  from  the 
Department  of  agriculture. 

U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.  Price  list. 
Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

No.  16,  Farmers'  bulletins,  Department  bulletins,  cir- 
culars, agriculture  year  books. 

No.  38,  Animal  industry. 

No.  39,  Birds  and  wild  animals. 

No.  40,  Agricultural  chemistry. 

No.  41,  Insects. 

No.  42,  Irrigation,  drainage,  and  water  power. 

No.  43,  Forestry. 

No.  44,  Plants. 

No.  46,  Soils  and  fertilizers. 

No.  68,  Farm  management. 


158 


308-309 


CHAPTER    XXIV 
HOME  ECONOMICS 

308.  For  the  lack  of  a  comprehensive  cyclopedia  of 
home  economics,  it  is  necessary  for  the  student  of  this 
subject  to  supplement  her  textbooks  and  treatises  by  ref- 
erence books  which  were  prepared  with  a  view  to  satis- 
fying the  needs  of  specialists  in  other  fields  than  her 
own.     She  will  find  material  of  interest  and  value,  es- 
pecially on  the  chemical  and  physiological  side  of  the  sub- 
ject, in  the  Experiment  Station  Record  and  the  Farmers' 
Bulletins  (see  sections  305  and  300.)  The  Industrial  Arts 
Index  (see  section  104)  may  be  used  to  find  magazine 
articles  and  bulletins  on  electric  equipment  and  textiles 
and  the  Agricultural  Index,  (see  section  294)  on  foods 
and  their  marketing,  canning  and  preserving.     The  fol- 
lowing reference  books,  chiefly  on  foods,  textiles,  cloth- 
ing, and  interior  decoration  contain  material  not  likely 
to  be  found  in  so  complete  or  convenient  a  form  either 
in  general  encyclopedias  or  in  home  economics  textbooks. 

309.  Lyford,  Carrie  Alberta.  Bibliography  of  home1 
economics.    Washington,     Government    printing    office, 
1919.     (U.  S.    Bureau    of    education.     Bulletin,    1919, 
no.46.) 

As  nearly  complete  a  bibliography  as  possible  of  sub- 
jects in  and  connected  with  home  economics.  Gives  au- 
thors, titles,  publishers,  place,  and  date  of  publication, 
number  of  pages,  and  price  for  each  book  or  pamphlet. 
Classified  arrangement. 

159 


310-313        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

310.  Lippincott,  J.  B.    firm  publishers.    Lippincott' s 
home  manuals,  ed.  by  Benjamin  R.  Andrews.     Philadel- 
phia, Lippincott. 

This  publisher's  series  of  books  by  good  authorities 
on  subjects  connected  with  the  home  is  well  illustrated 
and  contains  bibliographies:  Business  of  the  household, 
by  C.  W.  Taber;  Clothing  for  women,  by  L.  I.  Baldt; 
Home  and  community  hygiene,  by  Jean  Broadhurst; 
Housewifery,  by  L.  R.  Balderstone ;  and  Successful  can- 
ning and  preserving,  by  Ola  Powell. 

311.  Directory  of  agricultural  and  home  economics 
leaders,    United   States   and   Canada.    4th   ed.     Cam- 
bridge, Mass.  Wilson,  1922. 

Includes  the  personnel  of  home  economics  extension 
departments,  home  advisors  or  home  demonstration  agen- 
cies for  each  state.  Arranged  alphabetically  by  state. 

312.  Hopkins,    Albert    Allis,    ed.    The    Scientific 
American  cyclopedia  of  formulas.     N.  Y.  Munn,  c!910. 

Fifteen  thousand  formulas  compiled  from  Scientific 
American  and  drug  and  technical  journals.  Alphabetical 
arrangement  of  chapters  on  such  broad  subjects  as 
Cleansing  and  bleaching,  Glass,  Photography,  Preserving 
and  canning.  Individual  chapters  are  either  arranged 
alphabetically  or  have  an  outline  of  the  contents  at  their 
beginning.  The  minute  index  should  be  used  in  looking 
up  a  definite  subject.  Appendix  contains  miscellaneous 
formulas,  chemical  manipulations,  and  tables  of  weights 
and  measures. 

313.  Weinberg,    Louis.      Color  in    everyday    life. 
N.  Y.  Moffat,  1918. 

160 


HOME  ECONOMICS  314-316 

Chapters  on  esthetics  and  physics  of  color  and  prin- 
ciples of  color  combinations  and  contrasts,  with  their 
application  to  dress,  house  furnishing,  stage  setting,  etc. 
No  index,  but  full  table  of  contents. 

CLOTHING  AND  TEXTILES 

314.  Harmuth,  Louis.  Dictionary  of  textiles.  N.  Y. 
Fairchild,  1915. 

Definitions  of  terms  "relating  to  textiles  from  the 
fibres  to  the  finished  fabrics  and  everything  which  goes 
into  them  in  the  course  of  the  manufacture."  Preface. 
Includes  obsolete  fabrics  and  textiles  found  in  use  in  every 
country,  with  special  emphasis  on  French,  English,  and 
German.  Bibliography  follows  Preface.  Addenda  at 
the  end  contain  chiefly  Japanese  and  Philippine  terms'. 

315.  Costume  books  are  of  use,  not  only  to  students 
of  the  history  of  dress,  but  also  to  anyone  interested  in 
staging  historical  plays  or  pageants  or  in  fancy  dress  for 
social  affairs.    Books  of  smaller  size  similar  to  the  refer- 
ence books  listed  below  may  be  found  by  looking  in  the 
card  catalog  under  the  headings :  Costume,  Dress.    Illus- 
trations of  costume  are  also  often  found  in  books  of  travel 
and  in  the  National  Geographic  Magazine. 

316.  Planche,    James    Robinson.    Cyclopaedia    of 
costume.    London,  Chatto,  1876-79.    2v. 

V.I  is  a  dictionary  of  costume,  giving  definitions,  de- 
scriptions, and  illustrations  of  parts  of  dress  and  armor 
of  different  periods.  V.2  is  a  history  of  costume  in 
Europe  from  53  B.C.  through  the  eighteenth  century. 
Well  illustrated.  Index  to  both  volumes  at  the  end  of 
v.2. 

161 


317-320        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

317.  Kretschmer,   Albert.     Die   trachten   der  vol- 
ker .  .  .mit    text  von    Carl    Rohrbach.    3.aufl.    Leipzig, 
Schumann,  1906. 

First  half  of  book  is  a  history  of  costume  from  the 
early  Egyptians  to  modern  times ;  second  half  is  a  series 
of  colored  illustrations  of  costumes  of  all  nations  and 
times.  Text  is  in  German. 

318.  Racinet,  Albert  Charles  Auguste.  Le  costume 
historique.     Paris,  Firmin-Didot,  1888.    6v. 

Five  hundred  plates  showing  costumes  and  other  per- 
sonal effects  of  people  of  all  times  and  countries  and  also 
interior  scenes  in  ancient  and  medieval  homes.  A  de- 
scriptive article  accompanies  each  plate.  V.I  contains 
analytical  contents  of  the  work,  a  geographical  and  ethno- 
logical index,  a  glossary,  a  bibliography  of  costume,  and 
other  miscellaneous  material  on  the  subject.  Text  is  in 
French. 

INTERIOR  DECORATION  AND  FURNISHING 

319.  Eberlein,  Harold  Donaldson,  McClure,  Abbot, 
and  Holloway,  E.  S.    The  practical  book  of  interior 
decoration.     Philadelphia,  Lippincott,  1919. 

The  three  main  divisions  of  the  book  are :  history  of 
decoration,  practical  decoration  and  furnishing,  and 
period  decoration.  Profusely  illustrated. 

320.  Eberlein,    Harold    Donaldson   and    McClure, 
Abbot.   The  practical  book  of  period  furniture.    Phila- 
delphia, Lippincott,  c!914. 

Chronological  arrangement,  concluding  with  a  glos- 
sary, short  bibliography,  and  index.  Well  illustrated. 

Other  books  in  the  same  series  are  on  Oriental  rugs, 
arts  and  crafts,  etc. 

162 


HOME  ECONOMICS  321-323 

FOODS 

321.  Sherman,     Henry     Clapp.      Food     products. 
N.  Y.  Macmillan,  1914. 

Contains  chapters  on  "each  important  type  of  food, 
covering  (1)  an  account  of  its  production  and  prepara- 
tion for  market. ..  (2)  the  proximate  composition  and 
general  food  value,  (3)  questions  of  sanitation,  inspection, 
and  standards  of  purity,  (4)  special  characteristics  of 
composition,  digestibility,  nutritive  value  and  place  in  the 
diet."  Preface.  Bibliography  at  the  end  of  each  chap- 
ter. Appendix  includes  food  laws  and  table  of  100- 
Calorie  portions.  Illustrations  include  diagrams  of  meat 
cuts  and  statistical  tables.  Index. 

322.  Smith,  Joseph  Russell.   The  world's  food  re- 
'  sources.  N.  Y.  Holt,  1919. 

For  the  various  food  products  it  gives  information 
on  their  nutritive  value,  place  and  manner  of  production 
and  distribution.  Many  illustrations,  including  statistical 
tables,  charts,  and  maps.  Table  of  food  values  at  the 
end.  Index. 

323.  Ward,  Artemas,  comp.   Encyclopedia  of  foods 
and  beverages;  the  grocer's  encyclopedia.   N.  Y.    [Kemp- 
ster]  c!911. 

Information,  popular  rather  than  scientific,  not  only 
on  foods  and  beverages,  but  also  on  other  articles  handled 
by  grocers  and  on  food  values  and  the  care  of  food.  De- 
scription of  each  article  generally  includes  place,  season, 
and  method  of  production,  storage  care  and  preparation 
for  the  table.  Many  illustrations,  including  colored  plates. 
Arranged  alphabetically.  Appendix  contains  dictionary 

163 


324  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

of  food  names  in  English,  French,  German,  Italian  and 
Swedish,  culinary  and  bill-of-fare  terms,  and  tables  of 
weights  and  measures. 

324.  if.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.  Price 
list.  Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

No.  11,  Foods  and  cooking. 

No.  40,  Chemistry:  Technical  investigations  of  food, 
adulterations,  preservatives,  and  alcohol. 

No.  51,  Health:  Disease,  drugs,  sanitation,  water  pol- 
lution, care  of  infants. 


164 


325-328 


CHAPTER   XXV 
ENGINEERING 

325.  The  chief  sources  of  information  on  engineer- 
ing are  the  cyclopedias,  handbooks,  and  textbooks  of  en- 
gineering supplemented  by  the  technical  journals  and  the 
publications  of  engineering  societies. 

326.  Cyclopedia  of  engineering ;  a  general  reference 
work.    Editor-in-chief:  Louis  Derr.    Chicago,  American 
technical  society,  c!915.     7v. 

Condensed  treatises  on  the  different  branches  of  me- 
chanical and  electrical  engineering.  The  names  of  the 
authors  of  the  treatises  are  given  in  the  table  of  contents 
in  each  volume.  Separate  indexes  in  v.1-6;  general  index 
to  the  set  in  v.7. 

327.  Cyclopedia   of   civil   engineering;   a   general 
reference  work.     Chicago,    American   technical    society, 
c!916.    9v. 

Concise  treatises  on  the  various  divisions  of  civil  en- 
gineering. Use  the  table  of  contents  in  each  volume  to 
find  the  names  of  the  authors  of  the  treatises.  Separate 
indexes  in  v.1-8;  general  index  to  the  set  in  v.9. 

328.  International  library  of  technology;  a  series 
of    text-books.     Scranton,     International    textbook    co. 
c!901-   v.l- 

"The  volumes ...  are  made  up  of  instruction  papers, 
or  sections,  comprising  the  various  courses  of  instruction 

165 


329-330        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

for  students  of  the  International  correspondence 
schools."  Preface,  v.i$2.  The  series  is  not  limited  to 
engineering  but  includes  volumes  on  the  other  industrial 
arts,  also  related  subjects,  such  as  Banks  and  banking, 
History  of  architecture,  Principles  of  law,  Advertising, 
etc.  Many  illustrations.  An  index  in  each  volume  refers 
to  both  sections  and  pages. 

329.  Modern   shop   practice;   a   general   reference 
work.     Editor-in-chief;    H.    M.    Raymond.      Chicago, 
American  technical  society,  1916.  6v. 

"Practical  treatises  on  the  various  shop  subjects  have 
been  supplied  by  well-known  teachers  and  practical  men." 
Foreword,  v.i.  The  table  of  contents  in  each  volume 
gives  the  names  of  the  authors  of  the  treatises  included. 
Separate  indexes  in  v.1-5;  general  index  to  the  set  in  v.6. 

330.  Machinery's  encyclopedia;  a  work  of  refer- 
erence .  . .  comp.  and  ed.  by  Erik  Oberg  and  F.  D.  Jones 
...  in  collaboration  with  many  prominent  mechanical  and 
electrical  engineers.    N.  Y.  Industrial  press,  1917.    7v. 

"Deals  with  practical  mathematics  and  mechanics ; 
strength  of  materials ;  design  of  machine  details ;  ma- 
chine tools  and  machine  shop  practice ;  heat-treatment 
of  iron  and  steel;  forge  shop,  pattern  shop,  and  foundry 
practice;  metallurgy  of...  the  more  important.  .  .metals 
. . .  including  very  complete  treatises  on  electrical  machin- 
ery, gas  engines,  hydraulic  turbines,  steam  engines  and 
turbines,  boilers  and  accessories,  pumps,  air  compressors, 
^."...Editors'  preface,  v.i.  Some  of  the  articles  are 
signed  by  initials  explained  in  the  front  of  v.i.  Arranged 
alphabetically.  Use  the  general  index  in  v.7  to  find  all 
the  information  on  a  certain  subject  in  the  encyclopedia. 
It  refers  not  only  to  the  page,  but  also  to  that  section 

166 


ENGINEERING  331-333 

of  the  page  where  the  information  will  be  found;  e.g. 
IV,  285-3.  This  means  that  the  reference  is  in  v.4,  p.  285, 
upper  right  hand  corner. 

331.  Cyclopedia  of  applied  electricity;  a  general 
reference  work.     Chicago,  American    technical    society, 

1920.  8v. 

Discussions  of  the  generation  and  application  of  elec- 
trical energy  by  authorities  whose  names  are  found  in 
the  table  of  contents  in  each  volume.  Glossary  and  gen- 
eral index  to  the  set  in  v.8. 

332.  Automobile  engineering:  a  general  reference 
work ...  covering  the  construction,  care,  and  repair  of 
pleasure  cars,  commercial  cars,  and  motorcycles  with  es- 
pecial attention  to  ignition,   starting,  and  lighting  sys- 
tems, garage  design  and  equipment,  welding  and  other 
repair  methods.     Chicago,  American  technical   society, 

1921.  6v. 

Treatises  by  automobile  experts  whose  names  are 
given  in  the  table  of  contents  in  each  volume. 

HANDBOOKS 

333.  The  handbooks  on  the  various  engineering  spe- 
cialties are  small,  conveniently  arranged  volumes  which 
include    rules,    formulae,    and    other  concise    material, 
sometimes  difficult  to  find  elsewhere.     Below  are  listed  a 
few  of  the  more  important  ones. 

Marks,  Lionel  Simeon,  ed.  Mechanical  engineers' 
handbook.  N.  Y.  McGraw,  1916. 

Kent,  William.  Mechanical  engineers'  pocket-book. 
9th  ed.  thoroughly  rev.  with  the  assistance  of  R.  T.  Kent. 
N.  Y.  Wiley,  1916. 

Machinery's  handbook  for  machine  shop  and  drafting 
room.  N.  Y.  Industrial  press,  1914. 

167 


334  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Gillette,  Halbert  Powers  and  Dana,  R.  T.  Hand- 
book of  mechanical  and  electrical  cost  data.  N.  Y.  Mc- 
Graw,  1918. 

Standard  handbook  for  electrical  engineers.  F.  F. 
Fowle;  editor-in-chief.  4th  ed.  rewritten  and  greatly 
enl.  N.  Y.  McGraw,  1915. 

Fender,  Harold,  comp.  Handbook  for  electrical  en- 
gineers. N.  Y.  Wiley,  1917. 

Trautwine,  John  Cresson.  Civil  engineer's  pocket- 
book.  .  .rev.  by  J.  C.  Trautwine,  jr.,  and  J.  C.  Trautwine, 
3d.  20th  ed.  Philadelphia,  Trautwine,  1919. 

Merriman,  Mansfield,  ed.  American  civil  engineers' 
handbook.  4th  ed.  throughly  rev.  and  enl. ,  N..  Y.  Wiley, 
1920. 

Gillette,  Halbert  Powers.  Handbook  of  cost  data  for 
contractors  and  engineers.  2d  ed.  Chicago,  Clark,  1910. 

Ketchum,  Milo  Smith.  Structural  engineers'  hand- 
book; data  for  the  design,  and  construction  of  steel 
bridges  and  buildings.  2d  ed.  N.  Y.  McGraw,  1918. 

Hool,  George  Albert  and  others.  Concrete  engineers' 
handbook,  data  for  the  design  and  construction  of  plain 
and  reinforced  concrete  structures.  N.  Y.  McGraw, 
1918. 

Blanchard,  Arthur  Horace.  American  highway  en- 
gineers' handbook.  N.  Y.  Wiley,  1919. 

Peele,  Robert,  ed.  Mining  engineers'  handbook. 
N.  Y.  Wiley,  1918. 

INDEXES'  TO    ENGINEERING    PERIODICALS    AND 
U.  S.  GOVERNMENT  PUBLICATIONS 

334.  Industrial  arts  index,  1913-date.  N.  Y.  Wil- 
son, 1914-date.  For  description  see  section  104. 

168 


ENGINEERING  335-336 

335.  Engineering  index  annual,   1906-date.  N.  Y. 
Engineering  magazine,  1907-18,  American  society  of  me- 
chanical engineers,  1919-date. 

Indexes  foreign  as  well  as  American  technical  jour- 
nals and  publications  of  engineering  societies.  Before 
1919  the  references  are  grouped  under  divisions  of  en- 
gineering, such  as  Civil,  Electrical,  Mechanical,  etc., 
which  are  further  subdivided.  Beginning  with  1919  the 
arrangement  is  alphabetical  by  subject,  such  as  Machine 
shops,  Machine  tools,  Machinery,  etc.  Numerous  cross- 
references.  Information  given  with  each  item:  title  of 
the  article,  author's  name  if  known,  name  of  the  pub- 
lication in  which  the  article  appeared,  volume,  inclusive 
page  reference,  exact  date,  and  a  short  summary  of  the 
article.  Before  1919  the  number  of  words  in  the  article 
was  given  instead  of  the  volume  and  inclusive  page  ref- 
erence. The  Engineering  index  annual  is  compiled  from 
the  Engineering  index,  published  monthly  in  the  journal 
Mechanical  engineering. 

336.  U.   S.    Superintendent  of   documents.     Price 
list.    Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

No.  18,  Engineering  and  surveying. 

No.  45,  Roads. 

No.  58,  Mines. 

No.  64,  Standards  of  weight  and  measure. 


169 


337-339 


CHAPTER    XXVI 
COMMERCE  AND  GENERAL  BUSINESS 

337.  American  school  of  correspondence,  Chicago. 
Cyclopedia  of  commerce,  accountancy,  business  adminis- 
tration ;  prepared  by  a  corps  of  auditors,  accountants,  at- 
torneys, and  specialists  in  business  methods  and  manage- 
ment.   Chicago,  Amer.  school  of  correspondence,  c!909- 
li     lOv. 

DIRECTORIES 

338.  Kelly's  directory  of  merchants,  manufacturers 
and  shippers  of  the  world.     London,  Kelly's  directories, 
ltd.,  1887-date. 

Published  annually.  Lists  the  important  firms  inter- 
ested in  importing,  exporting,  manufacturing  and  kindred 
subjects  throughout  the  world.  Arranged  geographically 
and  classified  by  trades.  Contains  also  gazetteer  mate- 
rial, regulations  for  commercial  travellers  and  other  mis- 
cellaneous information.  Long  a  standard  in  its  field. 

339.  Hendricks'  commercial  register  of  the  United 
States  for  buyers  and  sellers.    N.  Y.  Hendricks,  c!890- 
date. 

Especially  devoted  to  the  interest  of  the  architectural, 
contracting,  electrical,  engineering,  hardware,  iron,  me- 
chanical, mill,  mining,  quarrying,  railroad,  steel  and  kin- 
dred industries.  The  greater  part  of  this  work  consists 
of  a  list  of  manufacturers  classified  by  articles  manufac- 

170 


COMMERCE  AND  BUSINESS  340-342 

tured,  the  arrangement  under  each  heading  being  alpha- 
betical under  the  firm's  name.  Special  sections  contain 
a  list  of  manufacturers  arranged  alphabetically,  a  list  of 
trade  names  and  an  index  to  trades. 

340.  Thomas'     register     of     American     manufac- 
turers. Ed.  12.  N.  Y.  Thomas,  c!921. 

The  main  part  of  this  work  consists  of  a  list  of  manu- 
facturers classified  by  articles  manufactured,  the  arrange- 
ment under  each  article  being  geographical  by  state  and 
city.  Addresses  and  financial  ratings  are  given.  The 
remainder  of  the  book  includes  manufacturing  firms  ar- 
ranged by  names — with  officers  of  companies  and  location 
of  branches — ,  a  list  of  trade  names  and  a  list  of  for- 
warders or  concerns  especially  well  equipped  to  promote 
and  handle  business  between  manufacturers  arul  others  in 
the  U.  S.  and  abroad.  Before  attempting  to  use  this  book 
it  is  well  to  read  the  "Instructions  for  the  use  of  this 
work"  printed  on  the  inside  of  the  front  cover. 

341.  In  addition  to  these  general  directories,  many 
businesses,  trades  and  professions  have  special  directories 
for  manufacturers  and  firms  in  their  special  fields.  These 
may  simply  give  names  and  addresses  or  they  may  contain 
catalog  information  from  the  various  firms.     There  are 
many  such  catalogs.     Examples  of  them  are:  Condensed 
catalogs  of  mechanical  equipment,  by  the  American  so- 
ciety of  mechanical  engineers ;  Sweet's  architectural  cata- 
log; Publishers'  trade  list  annual;  Merchandise  rating  reg- 
ister hardware  merchants  of  the  ^vorld  published  by  the 
Hardware  dealers'  magazine. 

342.  City  directories  and  telephone  directories  are 
often  valuable  reference  aids,  not  only  the  local  ones  but 

171 


343-345        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

also  those  of  other  cities  and  towns  with  which  one's 
business  brings  one  in  contact.  These  usually  contain,  in 
addition  to  the  alphabetical  list  of  residents,  a  list  classi- 
fied according  to  business  or  profession.  The  directories 
of  large  cities  such  as  New  York,  Chicago,  San  Fran- 
cisco, Washington,  and  St.  Louis  are  especially  useful. 

343.  There   are   also   professional   directories   pub- 
lished listing  people  of  a  certain  profession  or  business; 
physicians,  druggists,  lawyers,  etc.     for  example.     Busi- 
ness men  are  often  interested  in  those  which  cover  their 
own  and  related  fields. 

344.  It  is  neither  possible  nor  desirable  to  refer  here 
to  all  the  directories  published,  but  it  may  be  well  to 
cite  some  of  the  guideposts  to  publications  in  the  direc- 
tory field.    Important  sources  of  information  are:  W.  S. 
Thompson's  Directory  of  mailing  lists  obtainable  in  book 
and  pamphlet  form  telling  ivhere  to  get  them  and  their 
cost  (New  York,  Putnam,  1917)  ;  R.  L.  Polk  &  Com- 
pany's Directory  of  directories;  and  the  Association  of 
North  American  directory  publishers,  \yith  headquarters 
in  New  York  City. 

ADVERTISING 

345.  Grain's  market  data  book  and   directory  of 
class,  trade  and  technical  publications;  1921-date.     Chi- 
cago, G.  D.  Grain,  jr.,  c!920-date. 

Annual  publication.  Intended  for  those  having  to 
do  with  the  planning  and  placing  of  advertising.  Ar- 
ranged alphabetically  by  industry,  trade  or  profession. 
Gives  for  each  a  general  survey  of  the  field  and  a  list 
of  the  important  periodicals  in  the  field.  States  for  the 
publications  cited  the  advertising  rates,  the  special  class 

172 


COMMERCE  AND  BUSINESS  346-349 

appealed  to,  the  date  of  publication  and  of  closing  of 
forms,  the  type-page  size,  the  agency  discount  if  one  is 
offered,  the  subscription  price,  the  address,  and  usually 
the  date  of  establishment.  Well  indexed. 

346.  Ayer,  N.  W.  and  Son.    American  newspaper 
annual    and    directory,    1881-date.    Philadelphia,   Ayer, 
1881-date. 

For  descriptive  note,  see  section  266. 

BANKING  AND  FINANCE 

347.  Rand-McNally  Bankers'  directory  and  list  of 
attorneys;  the  original  "Bankers'  Blue  Book."     Chicago, 
Rand,  c!876-date. 

Two  editions  each  year,  in  January  and  July.  Lists 
banks  in  the  U.  S.,  Canada,  and  Mexico,  giving  for  each 
the  year  established,  the  names  of  officers,  financial  state- 
ment, etc.  Contains  other  miscellaneous  related  material 
such  as  national  bank  examiners  and  districts,  values  of 
foreign  coins,  clearing  houses  in  the  U.  S.  and  Canada, 
towns  accessible  to  banking  points,  banking  and  commer- 
cial laws,  maps,  etc. 

348.  Bankers     encyclopedia,     1895-date.       N.    Y. 
Bankers  encyclopedia,  c!895-date. 

Issued  semiannually  and  similar  in  content  to  the 
"Bankers'  Blue  Book"  listed  above. 

349.  Moody's  analyses  of  investments,  1909-date. 
N.  Y.  Moody's  investor's  service,  1909-date. 

Annual.  Continues  Moody's  analyse's  of  railroad  in- 
vestments. Later  issues  have  appeared  in  four  parts; 
Part  1,  Railroad  investments;  Part  2,  Industrial  invest- 
ments; Part  3,  Public  utility  investments;  Part  4, 

173 


350-352        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Government  and  municipal  securities.  Covers  investment 
fields  of  the  United  States  and  Canada  and  to  a  certain 
extent  of  foreign  countries.  Gives  for  each  entry  brief 
history,  management,  and  financial  statistics  relating  to 
bond  and  stock  records.  Security  ratings  are  a  special 
feature.  Moody's  Investors  service  supplements  the  an- 
nual volumes  with  monthly  reports  and  renders  special 
service  to  subscribers. 

350.  Poor's  manual  of  the  railroads  of  the  United 
States,  1868/69-date.    N.  Y.  Poor,  1868-date. 

Annual.  Includes  information  concerning  all  steam 
railroads  in  the  United  States  and  Canada  and  the  prin- 
cipal railroads  of  Mexico,  Cuba,  and  Central  America. 
Gives  historical  sketch,  names  of  officials,  and  financial 
and  operating  statistics.  Includes  maps. 

351.  Moody's  manual  of  railroads  and  corporation 
securities,    1900-date.      N.  Y.    Poor,    1900-date. 

Annual.  In  1919  consolidated  with  Poor's  manual 
of  industrials  and  Poor's  manual  of  public  utilities  with 
a  resulting  change  of  publication  office.  Gives  for  each 
company  included  such  information  as  brief  history,  cap- 
ital stock,  names  of  officers,  financial  statistics,  etc. 

352.  The  two  outstanding  commercial  rating  agen- 
cies in  the  United  States  are  Dun's  Mercantile  Agency 
and  the  Bradstreet  Company.    Both  limit  their  services 
to  private    subscribers,  however,  and — except    by    their 
journals — will  not  be  represented  in  public  or  college  li- 
braries.   Each  of  these  companies  publish  bound  volumes 

—Dun's  General  reference  book  and  Bradstreet's  Book 
of  ratings — listing  wholesale  and  retail  merchants,  job- 
bers and  manufacturers  in  the  United  States  and  Canada. 
They  also  on  application  render  a  special  service  to  their 

174 


COMMERCE  AND  BUSINESS  353-354 

subscribers  by  giving  information  as  to  financial  ratings 
of  firms  not  only  in  America  but  all  over  the  world. 
There  are  other  general  and  local  agencies  and  agencies 
in  special  fields  such  as  jewelery,  furniture,  hardware, 
etc. 

TRANSPORTATION 

353.  Official  guide  of  the  railways  and  steam  navi- 
gation lines  of  the  United  States,  Porto  Rico,  Canada, 
Mexico  and  Cuba,  also  time  tables  of  railroads  in  Central 
America.    N.  Y.  National  railway  pub.  co.,  1905-date. 

Monthly  numbers.  Gives  a  list  of  officials,  schedules 
and  usually  a  map  for  each  company.  An  index  of  rail- 
roads and  steamship  lines  is  given  in  the  front  of  each 
number.  In  the  back  there  is  an  index  of  points  reached 
by  water  routes  and  a  general  index  of  stations  indicating 
what  railroads  run  into  a  town  (with  the  number  of  the 
company's  time  table  to  be  consulted)  and  the  relative 
location  of  the  stations  if  there  is  more  than  one  railroad 
in  the  town.  Additional  indexes  to  the  stations  of  a 
particular  system  are  sometimes  included  along  with  the 
time-tables  for  the  system. 

354.  Exporters'  encyclopaedia,  1904-date.  Contain- 
ing full  and  authentic  information  relative  to  shipments 
for  every  country  in  the  world.    N.  Y.  Exporters'  encyc. 
co.,  c  1904-date. 

Published  annually.  Arranged  alphabetically  by 
country.  For  each  country  gives  brief  note  as  to  area, 
population,  commerce,  products,  etc.,  statistics  of  import 
and  export,  points  for  which  through  bills  of  lading  are 
issued,  consular  charges  or  regulations,  shipping  routes 
from  New  York,  etc.  Shipping  routes  from  Philadelphia, 
Boston,  Baltimore,  Newport  News,  Norfolk,  Savannah, 

175 


355-357        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Mobile,  New  Orleans,  Galveston,  San  Francisco,  Seattle, 
Tacoma,  Vancouver,  etc.,  are  given  separately.  Much 
miscellaneous  material  of  interest  to  the  exporter. 

355.  "Shipping  world"  yearbook:  a  desk  manual  in 
trade,  commerce,  and  navigation.  London,  "Shipping 
World,"  1887-date. 

Published  annually.  Gives  a  port  directory- and  tariffs 
for  the  various  countries  of  the  world.  Map  showing 
trade  routes  is  in  pocket  on  back  cover  of  book. 


U.  S.  GOVERNMENT  PUBLICATIONS 

356.  The  federal  government  publishes  some  of  the 
most  up-to-date  and  accurate   information  available  on 
conditions  in  the  United  States  and  abroad  of  interest 
to  American  business  men.     This  material  is  issued  by 
various   departments   and   bureaus  but  the   publications 
of  the  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce  are 
among  those  of  first  importance.    These  appear  in  a  num- 
ber of  series  of  which  the  following  are  the  most  gen- 
eral in  appeal  and  the  most  uniform  in  content  although 
other  series  and  special  numbers  of  other  series  often 
have  a  special  interest. 

357.  U.  S. — Foreign  and  domestic  commerce  bu- 
reau.   Commerce    reports,  a  weekly  survey  of   foreign 
trade,  Jan.  2,  1922-date.  Washington,  Government  print- 
ing office,  1922-date. 

Contains  reports  from  U.  S.  consular  offices  and  com- 
mercial agents  on  facts  of  commercial  importance  and 
on  business  conditions  throughout  the  world.  Continues 
a  daily  series  started  in  1898. 

176 


COMMERCE  AND  BUSINESS  358-359 

U.  S. — Foreign  and  domestic  commerce  bu- 
reau. Survey  of  current  business,  July  1,  1921- 
date ;  comp.  by  Bureau  of  census,  Bureau  of  foreign  and 
domestic  commerce,  Bureau  of  standards.  Washington, 
Government  printing  office,  1921-date. 

Monthly  supplement  to  Commerce  reports.  Gives  sta- 
tistics and  charts  showing  the  trend  of  business  and  in- 
dustry in  U.  S. 

—Foreign  commerce  and  navigation  of  the 
U.  S.,  1911/12-date.  Washington,  Government  printing 
office,  1912-date. 

Each  volume  gives  detailed  statistics  for  the  period 
covered  of  the  commerce  of  the  United  States  and  her  in- 
sular possessions,  with  comparative  statements  and  sta- 
tistics for  the  five-year  period  just  preceding.  Series — 
with  slightly  different  title  and  issuing  office — extends 
back  to  1837.  For  statistics  since  last  published  volume, 
see  Monthly  summary  of  foreign  commerce  of  the  United 
States  published  by  the  same  bureau. 

358.  U.  S. — Interstate  commerce  commission.  An- 
nual    report    on     the     statistics     of     railways     in     the 
United  States,  1887/88-date.     Washington,  Government 
printing  office,  1887-date. 

359.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.     Price  list. 
Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

No.  25,  Transportation 
No.  28,  Finance 
No.  32,  Insular  possessions 
No.  33,  Labor 

No.  59,  Interstate  commerce  commission  publications 
No.  60,  Alaska 
No.  61,  Panama  canal 
No.  62,  Commerce  and  manufactures 
177 


360-362 


CHAPTER    XXVII 
EDUCATION 

360.  Monroe,  Paul,  ed.    Cyclopedia  of  education. 
N.  Y.  Macraillan,  1911-13.  5v. 

A  comprehensive  work  by  authorities  on  education  as 
an  art  and  a  science,  including  also  biography  of  educa- 
tors, descriptions  of  higher  institutions  of  learning,  and 
the  history  and  present  systems  of  education  in  different 
countries,  states,  and  cities.  Articles  are  signed  by  ini- 
tials and  completed  by  excellent  bibliographies.  A  few 
illustrations.  Alphabetical  arrangement.  Analytical  in- 
dexes in  v.5  group  the  articles  in  their  logical  relations. 

361.  Watson,  Foster,  ed.    The  encyclopaedia  and 
dictionary  of  education.  London,   Pitman,   1921-22.  4v. 

Similar  in  scope,  arrangement  and  character  of 
articles  to  Monroe's  Cyclopedia  of  education,  but  more 
up-to-date,  though  distinctly  British  in  point  of  view. 
Not  so  strong  in  bibliographies.  Classified  index  and 
list  of  contributors  at  the  end  of  v.4. 

362.  U.  S.   Bureau  of  education.    Annual    report, 
1867-68,   1870-date.     Washington,  Government  printing 
office,  1867-date. 

From  1889  to  1917,  each  report  was  published  in  two 
volumes:  From  1913,  the  first  volume  in  each  year  con- 
tained a  review  of  the  progress  of  education  in  the  va- 
rious states  and  in  foreign  countries,  while  the  second 
volume  consisted  of  statistics  of  schools  and  other 

178 


EDUCATION  363-365 

educational  agencies  in  the  United  States.  Beginning 
with  1919,  it  was  decided  to  make  this  review  and  sum- 
mary biennial  instead  of  annual  and  to  publish  it  as  a 
bulletin.  The  annual  report  has  consequently  become 
merely  a  condensed  statement  of  the  activities  of  the 
Bureau  of  education  and  a  very  brief  interpretative  sur- 
vey of  the  progress  of  education.  In  addition  to  the  in- 
dex for  each  report,  there  is  a  general  index  for  1867- 
1907. 

363.  U.   S.   Bureau  of  education.    Bulletin,   1906- 
date.     Washington,  Government  printing    office,    1906- 
date. 

Issued  irregularly,  usually  about  fifty  a  year.  Each 
number  is  on  a  separate  topic  of  current  educational  in- 
terest, such  as  the  honor  system,  vocational  education, 
or  else  it  is  one  of  the  regular  publications  of  the  bureau, 
e.g.  the  Biennial  Survey,  mentioned  above,  or  the  Educa- 
tional directory. 

364.  —Educational       directory,       1912-date. 
Washington,  Government  printing  office,    1912-date. 

Issued  as  one  of  the  Bulletins  each  year.  Includes 
the  members  of  the  U.  S.  bureau  of  education  and  the 
educational  activities  of  other  United  States  departments, 
and  also  state,  county,  and  city  school  officers,  presidents, 
principals,  directors  or  deans  of  universities,  colleges, 
special  schools,  and  museums,  librarians,  and  educational 
organizations  and  periodicals.  Table  of  contents,  but  no 
index. 

365.  Patterson's  American  educational  directory, 
comp.  and  ed.  by  H.  L.  Patterson.     Chicago,  American 
educational  co.  1903-date. 

179 


366-367        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Published  annually.  First  part  of  book  is  a  geograph- 
ical list,  by  state  and  city,  of  public  school  officials  and 
"all  schools  and  colleges,  together  with  information  as  to 
the  kind  of  school,  class  of  students  admitted,  religious 
denomination,  year  established,  and  the  name  of  the  head 
of  the  institution."  Introduction.  Following  this  is  a 
list  of  schools  arranged  according  to  the  kind  of  school ; 
e.g.  law  schools;  a  geographical  list  of  libraries;  an  al- 
phabetical list  of  college  colors;  and  an  alphabetical 
"index"  of  schools,  giving  simply  their  location. 

366.  Minerva  jahrbuch.   Berlin,  Vereinigung  wiss. 
verl.   1892-date. 

Universitatum  et  eminentium  scholarum  Index 
generalis.  Paris,  Gauthier-Villars,  1919-date. 

Athena.    London,  Black,  1920. 

These  three  handbooks  contain  lists  of  the  universi- 
ties and  colleges  of  the  world,  with  the  names  of  their 
professors  and  lecturers  and  the  libraries,  observatories, 
museums,  etc.  connected  with  them.  Athena  is  limited 
to  English  speaking  institutions. 

367.  Baird,  William  Raimond.    Baird's  manual  of 
American    college    fraternities.     9th    ed,  N.    Y.     J.    T. 
Brown,  1920. 

Introductory  section  on  origin,  progress,  manners, 
customs,  and  peculiar  features  of  Greek-letter  fraterni- 
ties. Main  part  consists  of  histories  of  separate  frater- 
nities, with  pictures  of  their  badges,  list  of  chapters,  and 
famous  alumni  members.  Includes  men's  fraternities, 
women's  fraternities,  professional,  honorary,  local,  and 
inactive  fraternities.  Bibliography,  statistics,  and 

180 


EDUCATION  368-369 

directory  of  colleges  and  chapters.     Alphabetical  index 
of  fraternities. 

368.  U.  S.  Bureau  of  education.  Library.  Monthly 
record    of    current   educational    publications,  1912-date, 
Washington,  Government  printing  office,  1912-date. 

Lists  books  and  articles  on  educational  subjects  ap- 
pearing in  periodicals,  government  and  society  publica- 
tions. Arranged  under  broad  subjects.  Author  and 
subject  index  for  each  annual  volume. 

369.  U.    S.    Superintendent   of   documents.    Price 
list.  Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

No.  31,  Education,  including  agricultural  and  voca- 
tional education,  and  libraries. 


181 


370-371 


CHAPTER    XXVIII 
UNITED  STATES  PUBLIC  DOCUMENTS 

370.  According  to  the  Superintendent  of  Documents, 
"the  government  of  the  United  States  is  the  greatest  of 
all  modern  publishers".     The  government  printing  of- 
fice issues  as  public  documents  not  only  the  records  and 
proceedings  of  Congress,  but  also  the  results  of  the  in- 
vestigations of  thousands  of  scientists,  who  are  employed 
by  the  government  to  make  researches  in  many  branches 
of    science    and    industry.     These    include    agriculture, 
forestry,  irrigation,  shipping  and  railroad  problems,  en- 
gineering, aviation,  astronomy,  home  economics,  preven- 
tive medicine,  trade,  and  manufactures.    Maps  and  mag- 
azines are  published  by  the  government  as  well  as  mono- 
graphs, handbooks,  year  books  and  other  forms  of  liter- 
ature. 

Most  of  the  documents  are  sold  by  the  Superintendent 
of  Documents,  located  in  the  Government  Printing  Of- 
fice at  Washington.  As  the  Government  does  not  try  to 
make  a  profit  on  them,  it  charges  moderate  prices  to  cover 
only  the  expense  of  the  paper  and  printing,  and  more- 
over send  them  through  the  mails  without  postage. 

Useful  keys  to  the  departments  of  the  government  and 
their  publications  are  the  following: 

371.  Swanton,  Walter  I.  comp.    Guide  to  United 
States  government  publications.     Washington,   Govern- 
ment printing  office,  1918.     (U.  S.  Bureau  of  education. 

Bulletin,  1918,  No.  2.) 

i 

182 


U.  S.  PUBLIC  DOCUMENTS  372-373 

"This  Bulletin  is  divided  into  11  parts,  one  for  each 
of  the  10  executive  departments  of  the  Government  and 
one  part  for  the  miscellaneous  important  independent 
bureaus  and  commissions.  Each  part  is  divided  into  sec- 
tions, one  for  each  of  the  bureaus  under  the  department 
considered,  and  the  description  is  given  in  most  instances 
in  the  following  order :  Principal  administrative  officials, 
general  information  and  duties,  general  publications, 
method  of  distribution  of  general  publications,  an- 
nual and  other  periodical  publications,  lists,  indexes, 
mailing  lists,  maps,  and  correspondence.  At  the  begin- 
ning of  each  part  is  a  brief  description  of  the  department 
considered."  Introduction.  A  chart  following  the  title 
page  shows  the  relations  between  departments,  bureaus, 
divisions,  etc.  The  appendix  contains  various  lists  and 
a  directory  of  executive  departments  and  bureaus.  Index 
at  the  end. 

372.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.   Monthly 
catalog    United    States    public    documents,     1895-date. 
Washington,  Government  printing  office,  1895-date. 

Arranged  by  departments  alphabetically.'  Gives  price 
of  documents  or  indicates  by  symbols  those  which  are 
free  or  unobtainable.  Twelve  monthly  numbers  form  a 
volume  ending  with  the  June  number.  Minute  author 
and  subject  index  for  each  volume. 

373.  —Price  list  of  government  publications. 
Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

Lists  of  government  publications  on  various  subjects ; 
e.g.  Army,  Roads,  Fishes,  Government  periodicals,  with 
prices  of  each.  Each  subject  forms  a  separate  pamphlet 
bibliography. 

183 


374-375        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

374.  Depository    libraries. — Certain    libraries    are 
entitled  by  law  to  receive  deposits  of  all,  or  in  some 
cases  a  selection  of,  the  United  States  government  pub- 
lications."  The  "depository  libraries"  include  those  of  all 
states  and  territories  and  land-grant  colleges,  and  many 
others,  both  public  and  university.    These  libraries  may 
vary  somewhat  in  their  methods  of  shelving  and  record- 
ing government  documents,  but  many  of  them  classify 
and  catalog  a  large  proportion  of  them  like  other  books 
and  magazines.     A  few  of  the  documents  which  are  us- 
ually treated  in  this  way  have  been  listed  in  preceding 
chapters  on  Sociology,  Agriculture,  Education,  etc.  and 
they  are  of  course  found  also  in  libraries  which  are  not 
depository  libraries.    There  is  likely  to  be,  however,  in  a 
depository  library  a  separate  collection  known  as  the  Con- 
gressional Documents  or  Serial  Set,  which  like  a  collec- 
tion of  periodicals  requires  the  use  of  special  indexes  to 
make  its  contents  available  for  reference. 

375.  The    Congressional    Documents    and    Serial 
Number. — The    publications    authorized    printed    by 
Congress  include  the  Journals,  which  are  the  bare  min- 
utes of  the  proceedings  of  Congress ;  Reports  of  the  com- 
mittees of  the   Senate  and  House  of  Representatives ; 
Documents,  which  are  papers  originating  chiefly  in  the 
departments  of  the  federal  government  outside  of  Con- 
gress ;  and  the  Congressional  Record,  which  is  the  daily 
verbatim  report  of  all  that  is  spoken  in  Congress.     All 
except  the  last  are  published  in  a  series  called  the  Con- 
gressional Edition  or  Serial  Set.     The  volumes  of  this 
set  are  arranged  in  groups,  first,  according  to  Congress 
and    Session15   then   by    Senate   or    House,    and    finally 

16  There   is   a   new   Congress   every   odd   year  and   a   new    Session   every     ' 
year. 

184 


U.  S.  PUBLIC  DOCUMENTS  376-377 

according  to  Reports  or  Documents.  Beginning  with  the 
15th  Congress,  Dec.  1,  1817,  a  separate  number  has  been 
assigned  to  each  volume,  so  that  the  volumes  are  num- 
bered consecutively  throughout  the  set  from  the  above 
date  to  the  present  time,  no.  1  being  the  first  volume  of 
the  publications  of  the  15th  Congress  and  no.  6897  being 
the  number  of  the  first  volume  of  the  64th  Congress  in 
1915.  These  numbers  are  known  as  "serial  numbers," 
and  as  the  Congressional  Edition  is  shelved  according  to 
them,  any  volume  wanted  from  the  set  must  be  called  for 
at  the  Loan  Desk  by  its  serial  number.  The  serial  num- 
ber must  not  be  confused  with  the  document  or  report 
number  or  the  volume  number,  which  may  be  duplicated 
many  times  over  in  the  different  Congresses.  The  serial 
number  may  be  determined  by  the  use  of  the  Indexes  to 
the  U.  S.  public  documents. 

376.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.  Checklist 
of  United  States  public  documents,  1789-1909,  v.l.  Wash- 
ington, Government  printing  office,  1911. 

Checklist  to  the  Congressional  edition,  p.  3-169,  is  ar- 
ranged 1st  by  Congress,  2d  by  session,  3d  by  classes 
(Senate  or  House  reports  or  documents)  and  4th  by  vol- 
ume number  in  the  class.  Serial  numbers  are  given  in  a 
column  at  the  left.  The  rest  of  the  book  is  made  up  of  a 
classified  list  of  publications  issued  by  the  Executive  de- 
partments and  the  independent  publishing  offices  to  the 
end  of  1909,  noting  which  ones  are  also  in  the  Congres- 
sional Edition.  Index  to  the  classified  list  in  the  back. 

377.  Poore,   Benjamin   Perley.    Descriptive   cata- 
logue of  the  government  publications  of  the  United  States, 

185 


378-379        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

September  5,  1774-March  4,  1881.    Washington,  Govern- 
ment printing  office,  1885. 

Not  restricted  to  the  Congressional  Edition,  it  includes 
all  government  publications  for  these  years.  Arrange- 
ment strictly  chronological,  even  to  the  day.  Author  and 
subject  index  in  the  back.  Brief  abstract  of  each  docu- 
ment, but  no  serial  numbers. 

378.  Ames,  John  Griffith.  Comprehensive  index  to 
the  publications  of  the  United  States  government,  1881- 
93.    Washington,  Government  printing  office,  1905. 

Includes  department  as  well  as  Congressional  docu- 
ments. Arranged  by  subject,  with  an  author  index  in  v.2. 

379.  U.   S.   Superintendent  of  documents.    Cata- 
logue of  the  public  documents  of ...  Congress  and  of  all 
the  departments  of  the  government  of  the  United  States. 
.  .  .  the  "Comprehensive  index,"  March  4,  1893-June  30, 
1915.     Washington,   Government  printing  office,    1896- 
1918.   v.1-12. 

Often  called  by  the  title  Document  Catalogue,  which 
appears  on  the  binding  of  v.9-12. 

Issued  every  two  years,  one  volume  for  each  Con- 
gress. Includes  department  as  well  as  Congressional  pub- 
lications. Arranged  alphabetically  by  author  and  subject. 
The  serial  number  is  given  in  the  Congressional  docu- 
ments list,  which  is  found  in  regular  alphabetical  order 
with  the  letter  C  in  each  volume  and  is  arranged  simi- 
larly to  the  Checklist.  Since  July  1,  1899  the  serial  num- 
ber is  also  given  with  the  reference  in  bold-face  type, 
thus :  6640.  Often  several  editions  of  the  same 
document  are  listed,  the  Congressional  Edition  with  the 


186 


U.  S.  PUBLIC  DOCUMENTS  380-381 

serial  number  usually  being  given  last,  in  the  following 
manner : 

NICKLES,  JOHN  MILTON.  Bibliography  of  North  American 
geology,  1912,  with  subject  index.  1913.  I92p.  (Geolog- 
ical survey.  Bulletin  545.) 

— Same.    (H.  doc.  311,  63d  Cong.  2d  sess.     In  v.43; 
6640.) 

380.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.  Index  to 
the   reports  and  documents  of ...  Congress .  . .  being  the 
"Consolidated  index,"  December  2,  1895-November  21, 

1918.  Washington,   Government   printing   office,    1897- 

1919.  v.1-26. 

Usually  called  by  its  binders'  title,  Document  index. 

Supplements  the  Document  Catalogue  by  being  more 
up-to-date — a  new  volume  being  issued  for  each  session 
of  Congress — but  indexes  only  the  Congressional  Edition. 
Arranged  by  author  and  subject.  In  back  of  each  vol- 
ume are  numerical  lists  and  a  schedule  of  reports  and 
documents  giving  serial  numbers. 

381.  Directions  for  finding  serial  numbers. — 
Before  1895,  look  under  subject  in  Poore  or  Ames 

and  find  reference  like  this:  H.E.  48-1,  v.10,  no.l.  Look 
in  Checklist,  1789-1909  for  corresponding  serial  number 
under  48th  Congress,  1st  session,  House  executive  docu- 
ments, v.  10  and  find  at  the  left  the  serial  number  2190. 

1895-June  1899,  look  for  subject  in  Document  Cata- 
logue and  find  a  reference  similar  to  those  in  Ames.  Then 
turn  to  the  letter  C  in  the  Document  Catalogue  itself  and 
in  Congressional  documents  list,  find  a  schedule  similar  to 
the  one  in  the  Checklist.  Serial '  number  is  given  in 
brackets.  (Checklist  may  be  used  as  above  instead.) 

187 


381  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  .LIBRARIES 

July,  1899-June  30,  1915  (date  covered  by  last  vol- 
ume of  Document  Catalogue)  look  for  the  subject  in  the 
Document  Catalogue,  then,  if  the  serial  number  is  not 
given  in  bold-face  type  with  the  reference,  turn  to  the 
department  or  bureau  which  issued  the  document  orig- 
inally and  find  the  serial  number  in  bold-face  type  after 
the  title  and  imprint  of  the  document. 

July,  1915-Nov.  1918  (from  the  last  date  of  the  latest 
volume  of  the  Document  Catalogue  to  the  date  of  the 
latest  volume  of  the  Document  Index)  look  for  the  sub- 
ject in  the  Document  Index,  then  turn  to  the  back  of 
the  volume  and  find  serial  number  in  the  same  way  as  in 
the  Checklist,  either  in  Numerical  Lists  of  Reports  and 
Documents  or  in  the  Schedule  of  Volumes.  Serial  num- 
ber is  given  at  the  right  of  the  page. 


18S 


382-384 


CHAPTER    XXIX 
BIBLIOGRAPHY 

382.  Definition   and  kinds. — A  bibliography   is   a 
list  of  books  or  articles  by  a  certain  author  or  about  a 
certain  subject. 

383.  Author  bibliographies  may  be  divided   into 
two  classes:  one  lists  the  works  of  an  author  only  and 
the  other  includes  also  a  list  of  criticisms  of  his  work. 
The  former  is  used  chiefly  by  scholars  who  are  making  a 
study  of  an  author  or  want  information  about  the  edi- 
tions of  one  of  his  books.     The  latter  is  really  a  com- 
bination of  an  author  and  a  subject  bibliography,  in  which 
the  author  becomes  in  turn  a  subject.    Examples  of  these 
are  the  following: 

Slater,   John   Herbert.     Robert   Louis   Stevenson,   a 
bibliography  of  his  complete  works.    London,  Bell,  1914. 
List  of  first  and  early  editions  of  Stevenson's  work. 
Browne,  Nina  Eliza.     A  bibliography  of  Nathaniel 
Hawthorne.    Boston,  Houghton,  1905. 

Includes  both  editions  of   Hawthorne's  work   and  criticisms 
and  biographies  of  him. 

384.  Bibliographies  may  be  either  comprehensive 
or  partial.     The  former  attempts  so  far  as  possible  to 
list  everything  published.     It  is  more  useful  when  anno- 
tated ;   i.e.    when   it  includes   descriptions   of   the   books, 
with  estimates  of  their  value. 

Rand,  Benjamin,  comp.    Bibliography  of  philosophy, 
psychology  and  cognate  subjects.    N.  Y.  Macmillan,  1905. 

189 


385-386        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

(Baldwin,  J.  M.  Dictionary  of  philosophy  and  psychol- 
ogy, v.3.) 

A  very  extensive   subject  bibliography,  without  annotations. 

Larned,  Josephus  Nelson,  ed.  Literature  of  Ameri- 
can history;  a  bibliographical  guide.  Boston,  A.L.A.  pub- 
lishing board,  1902. 

Although  this  does  not  aim  to  list  everything  on  the  subject, 
it  is  fairly  comprehensive  as  it  includes  scholarly  and  elementary, 
good  and  bad  material.  Its  special  feature  is  critical  notes  writ- 
ten by  authorities  giving  the  value  of  the  books. 

385.  Partial   bibliographies. — The    compiler    of    a 
partial  bibliography  may   set  a  mechanical  limit  to  the 
material  he  will  include ;  e.g.  periodicals  only,  or  books 
and  articles  of  a  certain  period  or  in  a  certain  country  or 
library ;  or  he  may  select  the   references  either  with  a 
view  to  excluding  worthless  material  or  to  meeting  the 
needs  of  a  special  class  of  people.     A  bibliography  on 
the   manufacture    of   sugar   prepared   for  the  use   of   a 
woman's  club  would  be  quite  different  from  one  on  the 
same  subject  prepared  for  a  chemist.     Since  an  under- 
graduate student  is  not  expected  to  make  so  exhaustive 
a  study  of  the  literature  of  a  subject  as  a  graduate  stu- 
dent, he  will  find  a  selected  bibliography  of  the  most  prac- 
tical value.    As  Dr.  Francis  G.  Peabody  says,  "a  perfect 
(i.e.  complete)  bibliography  may  justify  pride  in  the  com- 
piler, but  may  provoke  despair  in  the  reader". 

386.  Some  bibliographies  with  mechanical  limits  to 
the  inclusion  of  references  are  the  following: 

Fish,  Daniel.  Lincoln  bibliography.  N.  Y.  Tandy, 
c!906. 

Limited  to  books  and  pamphlets  about  Lincoln. 

190 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  386 

Richardson,  Ernest  dishing.  An  alphabetical  subject 
index  ...  to  periodical  articles  on  religion,  1890-99. 
N.  Y.  Scribner,  1907. 

Limited   to  periodical   articles. 

Griffin,  Appleton  Prentiss  Clark.  Bibliography  of 
American  historical  societies  (the  United  States  and  the 
Dominion  of  Canada)  2d  ed.  rev.  and  enl.  Washington, 
Government  printing  office,  1907.  (American  historical 
association.  Annual  report,  1905.  v.2.) 

Might  be  regarded  as  a  collection  of  author  bibliographies 
for  American  historical  societies  considered  as  authors,  but  its 
very  minute  indexes  of  subject  and  (individual)  authors  and 
biographies  makes  it  a  subject  bibliography  of  references  to 
society  publications  only  on  American  history. 

Shearer,  Augustus  Hunt.  List  of  documentary  mate- 
rial relative  to  state  constitutional  conventions  1776-1912. 
Chicago,  Newberry  library,  1915. 

Documents,   excluding  books   in   trade   and  periodicals. 

U.  S.  Advisory  committee  for  aeronautics.  Bibli- 
ography of  aeronautics,  1909-1916.  Washington,  Govern- 
ment printing  office,  1921. 

Extensive  bibliography,  limited  only  by  dates  of  publications. 

British  science  guild.  A  catalogue  of  British  scien- 
tific and  technical  books.  London,  British  science  guild, 
1921. 

Aims  to  be  a  complete  list  of  scientific  and  technical  books, 
other  than  those  intended  for  primary  schools  or  similar  ele- 
mentary volumes,  in  print  in  the  United  Kingdom. 

New  York  public  library.  Armenia  and  the  Arme- 
nians. N.  Y.  New  York  public  library,  1919. 

Listed  all  printed  material  on  the  subject  in  that  library. 

191 


387-388        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

387.  Two  examples  of  bibliographies  with  selected 
references  are : 

Gross,  Charles.  The  sources  and  literature  of  English 
history  from  the  earliest  times  to  about  1485.  2d  ed.  rev. 
and  enl.  London,  Longmans,  1915. 

Worthless  books  are  excluded  except  for  a  few  listed  with 
warning  notes.  Annotations  and  full  index  make  it  one  of  the 
most  valuable  of  bibliographies. 

Charming,  Edward,  Hart,  A.  B.  and  Turner,  F.  J. 
Guide  to  the  study  and  reading  of  American  history. 
Rev.  and  augmented  ed.  Boston,  Ginn,  1912. 

The  requirements  of  teachers  and  students  of  history  in- 
fluence the  selection  and  arrangement  of  material  in  this  bibli- 
ography. 

388.  Bibliographies  vary  in  their  arrangement.    The 
references  may  be  arranged  alphabetically  by  author  as 
in  Fish,  Lincoln  bibliography;  or  by  subdivisions  of  the 
subject  as  in  Richardson,  Periodical  articles  on  religion; 
or  combining  author  and  subject  in  one  alphabet  in  dic- 
tionary catalog  form,  as  in  the  Bibliography  of  aeronau- 
tics. More  often,  however,  they  have  a  classified  arrange- 
ment.    The  classification  may  be  by  form,  i.e.  with  the 
books,  documents,  periodical  articles,  etc.  separated;  by 
the  point  of  view  of  the  authors,  e.g.  a  list  for  a  debating 
team  with  the  articles  supporting  the  affirmative  separated 
from  the  negative ;  or  by  the  natural  subdivisions  of  the 
subject.     In  some  lists  it  is  thought  best  to  have  the  ref- 
erences arranged  by  date  of  publication,  showing  the  de- 
velopment of  the  subject.     An  author  index  is  desirable 
except  for  the  bibliographies  arranged  by  author.     The 
following  are  examples  of  classified  bibliographies : 


192 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  389 

Franklin,  Margaret  Ladd.    The  case  for  woman  suf- 
frage. N.  Y.  National  college  equal  suffrage  league,  1913. 
For  each  class  of  references — books,   Congressional  reports, 
leaflets,  plays,  articles  in  periodicals — the  arrangement  is  chron- 
ological, the  first  book  reference  being  "ca,  380  B.C.  Plato". 

U.  S.  Library  of  Congress.  Select  list  of  references  on 
capital  punishment.  Washington,  Government  printing 
office,  1912. 

References   divided   into   favorable   and   opposed. 

Munro,  William  Bennett.  A  bibliography  of  munici- 
pal government  in  the  United  States.  Cambridge,  Mass. 
Harvard  university  press,  1915. 

Classified   arrangement    includes    such    topics    as    manager 
plan,  municipal  ownership,  censorship  of  amusements. 

389.  Catalogs  and  Indexes. — There  are  two  other 
kinds  of  lists  which  are  sometimes  called  bibliographies, 
but  which  have  certain  distinguishing  features  from  the 
bibliography  as  usually  defined.  One  is  the  catalog,  either 
of  a  library  or  of  all  books  published  by  a  certain  pub- 
lisher or  group  of  publishers.  A  portion  of  a  catalog 
may  be  taken  as  the  foundation  of  a  bibliography,  as  when 
one  copies  from  the  card  catalog  of  a  library  or  from  the 
U.  S.  Catalog  the  entries  which  are  found  under  a  given 
author  or  subject,  but  this  copied  part  in  itself  would 
make  neither  a  complete  nor  a  selected  bibliography, 
since  the  limitations  would  be  those  of  necessity  rather 
than  choice.  A  list  of  the  books  issued  by  the  publishers 
of  a  certain  country  is,  however,  called  a  "trade  bibliog- 
raphy," though  the  use  of  the  term  bibliography  in  this 
case  hardly  conforms  to  the  customary  definition. 

The  other  list  similar  to  a  bibliography  is  the  Index, 
of  which  examples  are  Readers'  guide,  Ames,  Compre- 

193 


390-392        GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

hensive  index  to  the. publications  of  the  U.  S.  government, 
and  Baker,  Guide  to  best  fiction.  These  are  limited  by 
form  of  material  included  rather  than  subject  matter;  i.e. 
as  irr  the  above  examples  to  periodicals,  documents,  or 
novels.  Indexes  and  catalogs  are  helps  in  preparing  bib- 
liographies, rather  than  bibliographies  in  themselves. 

HOW  TO  FIND  BIBLIOGRAPHIES 

390.  Encyclopedias.    One   of   the   features  which 
is  expected  of  the  modern  reference  book  is  bibliograph- 
ical information.     All  its  articles  on  subjects  of  impor- 
tance which  have  been  sufficiently  developed  to  have  a 
literature  are  followed  by  bibliographies. 

391.  Treatises.    Textbooks    and    treatises    of    the, 
day,  like  reference  books,  are  expected  to  furnish  bib- 
liographies,  which   are   called   by   the   various   titles   of 
Authorities,  Bibliography,  Book  list,  Reading  list,  Refer- 
ences, Sources,  etc.     These  bibliographies  are  found  in 
different  places  in  books :  near  the  front,  in  an  appendix, 
or  at  the  beginning  or  end  of  chapters.    Some  books,  es- 
pecially the  older  ones,  have  bibliographical  references 
in  footnotes  or  insets  in  the  margins,  instead  of  collected 
into  a  list.    Such  references  are  often  given  by  very  ab- 
breviated titles,  which  may  be  explained  in  full  in  a  list 
at  the  beginning  or  end  of  the  book  or  volume.     A  few 
examples  of  valuable  bibliographies  in  treatises  are  those 
in  Cambridge  History  of  English  Literature,  American 
Nation,  Sidney  Lee,  Queen  Victoria. 

392.  Periodicals.     Several    periodicals    in    special 
lines    contain    bibliographies    of    current    material;    e.g. 
American  City,  American  Gas  Association  Monthly.    Ex- 

194 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  393-394 

cellent  bibliographies  on  various  subjects  are  printed  in 
the  Bulletin  of  Bibliography,  issued  quarterly  by  the  F. 
W.  Faxon  Co.  of  Boston,  and  in  Special  Libraries,  a 
periodical  devoted  to  the  interests  of  technical  and  busi- 
ness libraries.  Municipal,  state,  and  federal  departments, 
bureaus,  and  libraries  are  responsible  for  a  great  many 
of  the  bibliographies  published.  Libraries  printed  about 
one  hundred  fifty  in  192116  and  the  U.  S.  government, 
about  three  hundred  in  the  year  ending  June  1921. 1T 
Many  of  these  come  out  in  bulletins,  but  some  are  sepa- 
rates. 

393.  Separate  bibliographies.    Besides  the  govern- 
ment agencies,   frequent  sources  of  separate  bibliogra- 
phies are  college  faculties,  societies,  and  the  publishers 
of  periodical  indexes. 

The  Library  of  Congress  issues  many  printed  and 
typewritten  bibliographies,  chiefly  on  economic,  political 
and  historical  subjects.  A  list  of  them  is  in  Swanton, 
Guide  to  government  publications,  p.  122-24. 

The  Drama  League  of  America  publishes  selected 
lists  of  plays  and  works  on  dramatic  subjects. 

The  H.  W.  Wilson  Co.  publishes  club  study  outlines, 
with  bibliographies,  as  well  as  the  Handbook  series.  (See 
section  193). 

Current  bibliographies  are  listed  by  subject  in  the 
Library  journal  and  the  Public  affairs  information  ser- 
vice bulletin. 

394.  Manuscript  and  typewritten  bibliographies. — 
In  using  printed  bibliographies  a  student  must  bear  in 
minq\  that  he  will  find  therein  some  references  which  are 

18  Bulletin    of    bibliography.    January-April,    1922.    p.    125-27. 
17  U.    S.    Superintendent    of    documents.    Monthly    catalogue    of    U.    S. 
documents.    Index,    1920-21,    nos.    307-318,    p.    xvi-xviii. 

195 


395-396       GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

not  in  the  library  in  which  he  happens  to  be  and  that 
he  will  have  to  cull  the  available  material  with  the  aid  of 
the  card  catalog  or  a  general  knowledge  of  the  resources 
of  the  library.  He  is  therefore  pleased  when  he  finds  that 
his  library  has  on  file  a  manuscript  or  typewritten  bibliog- 
raphy, which  contains  only  material  in  the  library  and 
which  has  call  numbers  or  other  designation  of  shelving 
noted  upon  it. 

HOW  TO  MAKE  A  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OR  REFERENCE 

LIST 

395.  In  many  courses  students  are  required  to  make 
bibliographies,  either  to  precede  or  accompany  papers. 
The  following  suggestions  are  made  for  preparing  ac- 
curate, consistent  and  well  selected  bibliographies. 

396.  Preliminaries.    It  saves  time  in  the  end  to 
consider  plans  and  investigate  the  subject  a  little  before 
beginning  the  actual  collecting  of  references  for  a  bib- 
liography.   Deciding  beforehand  upon  the  bibliograph- 
ical details  to  be  included  will  obviate  the  necessity  of 
returning  again  and  again  for  some  overlooked  item 
such  as  the  date  or  call  number.     A  satisfactory  bib- 
liography notes  references  with   sufficient  fulness  to 
identify  them  easily,  including  the  following: 

1.  In  reference  books:  author,  title,  edition  if  other 
than  the  first,  place  of  publication,  publisher,  and  date  of 
the  book;  and  the  author,  title,  volume,  and  inclusive 
pages  of  the  article. 

2.  In  other  books, 

a.  Whole  books:  call  number,  author,  title, "edi- 
tion if  other  than  the  first,  place  of  publication,  publisher, 
date,  and  number  of  pages  or  volumes. 

196 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  396 

b.  Parts  of  books:  call  number,  author,  edition 
if  other  than  the  first,  title,  place  of  publication,  publisher, 
and  date  of  the  book;  and  title  and  inclusive  pages  of  the 
chapter  or  section. 

c.  Periodical   articles :   the  title  of  the   period- 
ical and  the  volume,  inclusive  pages,  author,  and  title  of 
the  article,  with  the  date  of  the  issue  of  the  periodical 
(day  and  month  as  well  as  year). 

Even  though  the  bibliography  is  not  to  be  annotated, 
it  is  desirable  to  make  very  brief  notes18  indicating 
the  scope,  point  of  view,  and  relative  value  of  the  refer- 
ences as  an  aid  in  selecting  and  sorting  them  for  the  final 
copy.  Recording  the  references  each  on  a  separate  slip 
also  facilitates  the  arranging  of  them. 

Finally,  it  is  essential  before  preparing  a  bibliog- 
raphy to  understand  the  scope  of  the  subject.  Read 
an  account  of  it  in  a  reference  book,  or,  if  it  is  too  new 
a  subject  for  that,  read  as  general  a  magazine  article 
about  it  as  you  can  find.  Then  look  at  the  subject  from 
different  angles.  For  example,  consider  the  topic,  Eng- 
lish cathedrals.  This  may  be  regarded  from  the  view- 
point of  church  architecture  or  of  English  architecture, 
of  travellers'  descriptions  or  of  the  religious  history  of 
England,  or  of  the  present  government  and  usage  of  the 
Church  of  England.  You  should  consult  different  classes 
of  books  for  these  different  phases  of  the  one  subject  and 
you  may  think  of  several  headings  to  consult  in  the  cata- 
log and  indexes.  Be  on  the  lookout  always  for  biblio- 
graphical suggestions  in  books  and  articles  as  you  look 
them  over. 


18  cf.    Rice.    Lessons   on    the  use   of   books,   p.    110.14,    on    Note   taking. 
Ward.    Practical  use  of  books,    p.  77.78,  on  Taking  notes. 

197 


397  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

397.     Collecting  and  selecting  the  references: 

The  shorter  the  bibliography  the  more  necessary  it 
is  to  select  the  best  and  also  the  most  varied  material. 
Some  of  the  points  considered  in  judging  the  value  of 
books  for  reference  use  may  be  considered  likewise  in 
evaluating  them  for  a  bibliography.  The  brief  notes 
on  the  references  recommended  for  the  first  draft  of  the 
bibliography  should  help  in  keeping  the  list  well  bal- 
anced. If,  for  example,  you  find  on  comparing  references 
that  a  magazine  article  is  merely  an  uncritical  summary 
of  a  book  that  is  also  represented  among  your  slips,  you 
should  not  ordinarily  list  both  in  the  same  bibliography ; 
but  if,  on  the  other  hand,  you  find  that  it  is  truly  a  criti- 
cism by  a  man  equal  in  authority  to  the  author  of  the 
book,  you  would  have  good  reason  to  include  both  views 
of  the  subject. 

The  following  directions  may  serve  as  reminders  of 
the  possible  resources: 

Books. 

1.  Select  books  from  those  listed  in  the  card  catalog 
en  the  topic,  noticing  as  a  basis  of  selection  authors,  dates, 
publishers,  etc. 

2.  Examine  bibliographies  which  may  be  found  in 
them  for  new  titles. 

3.  List  articles  in  reference  books  and  their  bibliog- 
raphies. 

4.  Consult  the  bibliographies,  indexes,  and  special 
catalogs  available  on  the  subjects  which  include  the  dif- 
ferent phases  of  the  topic ;  e.g.  Gross,  Sources  of  Eng- 
lish History  and  Boston  Public  Library,  Books  on  Archi- 
tecture. 


198 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  398-399 

5.  Look  for  chapters  in  books  by  consulting  the 
"A.L.A."  Index  to  General  Literature  (see  section  257) 
and  Readers'  Guide  (see  section  98).  It  may  be  neces- 
sary to  look  for-  chapters  in  books  of  a  broader  scope 
than  the  special  topic  on  which  you  are  working ;  e.g. 
books  on  history  of  architecture  for  chapters  on  cathe- 
drals. 

Periodical  articles. 

Consult  the  magazine  indexes  to  find  articles  pub- 
lished in  periodicals.  (See  section  107)..  Carefully  ex- 
amine articles  to  see  whether  they  are  worth  including. 

398.  Arranging  and  copying  the  list. 

The  general  arrangement  of  the  list  varies  with  the 
subject,  but  whatever  method  of  entry  and  arrangement 
is  decided  upon  it  should  be  followed  consistently.  In  a 
short  bibliography,  which  does  not  require  a  special 
grouping  of  references  according  to  subdivisions  of  the 
subject,  a  convenient  arrangement  is  to  divide  the  refer- 
ences into  two  groups :  one  of  books  and  the  other  of 
periodical  articles,  and  then  arrange  the  first  group  alpha- 
betically by  authors,  and  the  second  group  alphabetically 
either  by  authors  of  the  articles,  or  by  the  titles  of  the 
periodicals.  In  case  of  anonymous  books  and  articles 
the  entries  and  arrangement  should  be  by  title.  After 
the  references  are  arranged,  copy  them  on  sheets,  with 
two  line  spaces  between  entries. 

399.  The  following  bibliographies  show  two  methods 
of  entering  and  arranging  the  same  material. 


199 


399  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

SAMPLE  BIBLIOGRAPHY  i. 

ENGLISH  CATHEDRALS' 

A  LIST  OF  REFERENCES 

BOOKS 

282  Abbey,   Charles  John  and  Overton,  John   Henry. 
Abie  The  English  Church  in  the  eighteenth  century. 
v.2                      London,  Longmans,  1878. 

v.2,  p48s-87.     Church  music;  cathedrals. 

726.6  Bond,  Francis. 

B64C4  The  cathedrals  of  England  and  Wales.  4th  ed. 

London,  Batsford,  pref.  1912.  493p. 

283  Cutts,  Edward  Lewes. 

Co8d4  Dictionary  of  the  Church  of   England.  4th   ed. 

London,   Society   for  promoting  Christian  knowl- 
edge, 1913. 
p. 122-31.  Cathedral. 

Encyclopaedia  Britannica.  nth  ed.  Cambridge,  Eng. 
University  press,  1910. 

v-5,  P-52I-23.     Cathedral  architecture,  by   R.  P. 
Spiers. 

914.2  Great  western  railway  company  of  England. 

G79C  The  cathedral  line  of  England :  its  sacred  sites 

and   shrines.     London,    Published   by  the   author, 

1908.     72p. 

726.6  Masse,  Henri  Jean  Louis  Joseph. 

M38c2  The  cathedral  church  of  Bristol.  2d  ed.     Lon- 

don, Bell,  1910.     H2p. 

726.6 

M38ca3  The  cathedral  church  of  Gloucester.  3d  ed.  Lon- 

don, Bell,  1910.     I33P. 

PERIODICALS 

Century.  New  series,  v.n,  p.724-35.  March  1887. 
The  cathedral  churches  of  England,  by  M.  G.  van 
Rensselaer. 

Living  age.  v.194,  p.367-7O.  6  Aug.  1892.  Curiosities 
in  our  cathedrals. 

780.5  Musician.     v.i4,  p. 178-79.  April  1909.     Observations 

MUS  about  some  English  cathedrals,  by  J.  L.   Erb. 

v.14 

200 


BIOGRAPHY  399 


SAMPLE  BIBLIOGRAPHY  2. 
ENGLISH  CATHEDRALS 

A  LIST  OF  REFERENCES 
BOOKS 

282  Abbey,  C.  J.  and  Overton,  J.  H. 

Abie  Church    music;    cathedrals.      (In    their    English 

v.2  Church  in  the  eighteenth  century.    London,  Long- 

mans, 1878.  2:485-87.) 

726.6  Bond,  Francis. 

B64C4  The  cathedrals  of  England  and  Wales.  4th  ed. 

London,  Batsford,  pref.  1912.    439P. 

283  Cutts,  E.  L. 

Cg8d4  Cathedral.      (In  his   Dictionary  of   the   Church 

of  England.    4th  ed.    London,  Society  for  promot- 
ing Christian  knowledge,  1913.     p. 122-31.) 

914.2  Great  western  railway  company  of  England. 

G79C  The  cathedral  line  of  England: 'its  sacred  sites 

and    shrines.     London,    Published    by  the   author, 

1908.     72p. 

726.6  Masse,  H.  J.  L.  J. 

The  cathedral  church  of  Bristol.  2d  ed.  London, 
Bell,  1910.  H2p. 

726.6 

The  cathedral  church  of  Gloucester.  3d  ed.  Lon- 
don, Bell,  1910.  I33p. 

Spiers,  R.  P. 

Cathedral  architecture.  (Encyclopaedia  Britan- 
nica.  nth  ed.  Cambridge,  Eng.  University  press, 
1910.  5:521-23.) 

PERIODICALS 

Curiosities  in  our  cathedrals.     (Living  age.  194:367- 
70.    6  Aug.  1892.) 

780.5  Erb,  J.  L. 

MUS  Observations    about    some    English    cathedrals. 

v.14  (Musician.     14:178-79.     April  1909.) 

Van  Rensselaer,  M.  G. 

The  cathedral  churches  6f  England.  (Century, 
n.s.  11:724-35.  March  1887.) 

201 


APPENDIX  I 
QUESTIONS  FOR  ORAL  REVIEW 

1.  What  is  meant  by  "classification"  as  applied  to  li- 

braries ? 

2.  What  system  of  classification  is  used  in  your  college 

library?    Name  the  main  classes. 

3.  Explain  the  terms  (1)  shelf  list,  (2)  card  catalog, 

(3)  reference  book,  (4)  reserve  book,  (5)  title 
page,  (6)  copyright,  (7)  scope  of  the  book,  (8) 
bibliography,  (9)  guide  card,  (10)  cross  refer- 
ence. 

4.  Distinguish  between  the  terms  (a)  subject  heading 

and  title  entry  in  the  card  catalog;  (b)  table  of 
contents  and  index  in  a  book;  (c)  call  number, 
classification  number  and  book  number. 

5.  Are  there  any  collections  of  books  for  general  read- 

ing in  this  library?  Describe  them. 

6.  Give  the  location  in  this  library  of  (1)  recent  num- 

bers of  popular  magazines,  (2)  slightly  older 
unbound  numbers  of  popular  magazines,  (3) 
bound  volumes  of  popular  magazines,  (4) 
bound  volumes  of  technical  magazines. 

7.  What  are   some  of  the  characteristics  of  a  good 

reference  book?  Show  how  some  work  of  ref- 
erence studied  in  this  course  fulfills  the  require- 
ments. 

8.  Name  the  three  most  important  encyclopedias  in 

English  and  characterize  them  briefly.  What 
purpose  do  annual  cyclopedias  serve? 

202 


APPENDIX  I :  QUESTIONS  FOR  ORAL  REVIEW 

9.  Name  and  describe  briefly  the  four  standard  un- 
abridged English  language  dictionaries,  giving 
distinctive  features  of  each. 

10.  What  three  classes  of  reference  books  are  repre- 

sented by  the  Century  dictionary? 

11.  If  you  were  buying  a  synonym  dictionary,  which 

one  would  you  select? 

12.  Where  would  you  expect  to  find  something  about  a 

prominent  American  living  today?  A  prominent 
Englishman?  An  actor?  A  musician?  A  person 
prominent  in  the  field  of  agriculture  in  the 

u.  s.? 

13.  Name  4  works  in  which  you  would  expect  to  find 

a  biographical  sketch  of  an  English  painter  who 
died  during  the  last  century.  Which  two  would 
give  the  best  bibliographies? 

14.  For  pronunciation  of  proper  names  of  people  where 

would  you  look? 

15.  For  pronunciation  of  names  of  places  where  would 

you  look? 

16.  If  you  wish  to  find  a  poem  and  can  remember  only 

the  first  line,  what  reference  book  would  you 
consult  first? 

17.  If  you  wish  to  find  a  short  story  where  would  you 

look  to  find  references  to  books  or  periodicals 
in  which  it  has  appeared? 

18.  Compare  the  last  annual  volumes  of  the  Book  re- 

view digest  and  Cumulative  book  index. 

19.  Where  would  you  find  the  price  and  publisher  of 

a  certain  book  if  you  knew  the  author,  the  title, 
or  the  subject? 

203 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

20.  Where  would  you  find  listed  books  published  last 

year  on  a  certain  subject?  references  to  reviews 
of  the  most  important  of  them? 

21.  What  index  to  general  periodical  literature  covers 

the  19th  century?  What  index  brings  it  down  to 
date?  Distinguish  between  the  two  in  arrange- 
ment and  information  given. 

22.  Name  several  indexes  to  periodicals  limited  to  spe- 

cial fields. 

23.  Where  would  you  look  for  criticism  of  a  book  by  an 

English  or  American  author  of  the  19th  century, 
e.g.  Thackeray's  Henry  Esmond?  Where  would 
you  look  for  criticism  of  books  of  the  20th 
century  ? 

24.  What   is   the   scope   of    Warner's    Library   of  the 

world's  best  literature?  For  what  would  you 
use  it? 

25.  Distinguish  as  to  scope  and  arrangement  between 

(a)  Statesman's  year-book,  (b)  Annual  register 
and  (3)  the  New  International  year  book. 

26.  Where  would  you  look  to  find  the  source  of  some 

familiar  quotation? 

27.  Name  a  standard  cyclopedia  or  dictionary    in    the 

field  of  architecture;  painting;  music;  edu- 
cation. 

28.  Name  several  works  in  which  you  could  find  popu- 

lation statistics  for  larger  American  cities. 

29.  Where  would  you  look  for  a  map  of  an  important 

city?  a  map  showing  the  products  of  a  certain 
country?  a  map  showing  changes  in  boundaries 
of  countries  during  a  particular  period? 

204 


APPENDIX  I :  QUESTIONS  FOR  ORAL  REVIEW 

30.  Where  would  you  look  for  the  description  of  some 

city? 

31.  Where  would  you  look  for  the  duties  of  a  depart- 

ment of  the  U.  S.  Government? 

32.  In  what  books  of  reference  would  you  look  for  an 

extensive  article  on  education  in  a  particular 
country,  e.g.  Norway? 

33.  Give  scope  and  arrangement  of  the  Cambridge  mod- 

ern history  and  mention  two  features  which 
make  the  work  especially  valuable. 

34.  Where  would  you  expect  to  find  an  article  about  a 

mythological  character  ?  a  noted  name  of  fiction  ? 

35.  What  class  of  books  would  you  consult  to  identify  a 

tree,  a  bird,  or  a  flower  ? 

REVIEW  QUESTIONS  ON  THE  CARD  CATALOG 

36.  In  what  order  are  author,  title  and  subject  cards 

filed  when  the  entry  word  is  the  same,  e.g.  steel  ? 

37.  How  are  cards  arranged  under  the  heading  "His- 

tory" for  the  more  important  countries,  e.g. 
U.  S. — History — Civil  war,  U.  S. — History — 
Revolution,  etc? 

38.  Under  what  heading  in  the  card  catalog  would  you 

look  for 

a.  publications  of  a  government,  e.g.  annual  re- 

port of  the  Department  of  Agriculture  of 
the  U.  S.? 

b.  publications  of  a  society,  e.g.  proceedings  of 
the  National  Education  Association? 

c.  periodicals;    e.g.    Atlantic    Monthly,    Engi- 

neering Magazine. 


205 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

39.  Give  the  complete  subject  heading  for 

a.  a  bibliography  on  the  cost  of  living 

b.  a  history  of  French  literature 

c.  a  book  of  travels  in  France 

d.  a  periodical  devoted  to  music 

e.  a  criticism  of  Tennyson's  In  memoriam 

40.  Write  the  first  lines  for  all  the  cards  which  would 

be  made  in  the  catalog  for 

a.  David  Copperfield,  by  Charles  Dickens 

b.  Seven  lamps  of  architecture,  by  John  Rus- 
kin 

c.  History  of  philosophy,  by  Alfred  Weber 


206 


APPENDIX  II 
SAMPLE  PROBLEM 

To  THE  INSTRUCTOR  : 

The  results  to  be  attained  by  the  students  from  working 
out  the  problems  are  (i)  familiarity  with  reference  books  and 
library  records  through  the  actual  use  of  them,  (2)  knowledge 
of  the  methods  of  looking  up  definite  facts,  and  (3)  ability 
to  record  references  in  an  accepted  bibliographical  form.  In 
all  cases  in  this  work  how  and  where  the  answers  to  the  ques- 
tions are  found  are  more  important  than  the  information  itself. 
Problems  should  therefore  bring  out  special  features  in  arrange- 
ment and  scope  of  the  books  consulted ;  e.g.  indexes,  supple- 
ments, appendices,  special  lists  and  tables. 

In  large  classes,  to  avoid  the  confusion  which  arises  when 
all  students  use  the  same  catalog  drawers  or  volumes  of  refer- 
ence books,  it  is  desirable  to  make  several  parts  for  each  ques- 
tion and  indicate  by  cancellation  or  checks  the  parts  to  be  an- 
swered by  each  student.  (Notice  the  use  of  the  check  in  the 
following  problem.) 

Usually  the  instructor  should  require  the  students  to  confine 
their  study  to  a  specified  part  of  the  manual  in  order  that  they 
may  concentrate  on  definite  reference  sources  and  become  fa- 
miliar with  them.  Occasionally,  however,  a  review  problem 
should  be  given  or  a  "review  question"  be  incorporated  in  the 
regular  problem,  in  answering  which  the  student  may  use  any 
of  the  library's  resources. 

Questions  should  be  in  such  a  form  that  the  student,  after 
consideration  of  them  in  connection  with  the  sections  on  which 
the  problem  is  based,  will  have  a  definite  idea  as  to  what  sources 
he  should  consult  first.  (It  is  necessary  to  urge  the  students 
to  read  carefully  the  assigned  sections  in  the  manual  before 
undertaking  to  work  the  problems.) 

Care  should  be  taken  to  select  and  word  the  questions  in 
such  a  way  that  the  student  will  be  unable  to  answer  all  of  them 

207 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

from  one  or  two  books  only  and  yet  will  be  able  to  find  satis- 
factory answers  which  leave  no  doubt  in  his  mind  that  he  has 
found  the  desired  information. 

In  general,  it  is  important  to  keep  the  viewpoint  and  previous 
preparation  of  the  students  in  mind  and  to  select  as  far  as  pos- 
sible subjects  for  questions  which  will  not  require  more  knowl- 
edge than  can  be  expected  of  the  average  undergraduate  and 
which  will  relate  to  his  interests  either  outside  or  within  the 
curriculum. 


Library  Science  12  Problem  10 

Section  E  Literature: 

April   15,   1922  Indexes  and 

Problem  due  April  22,  1922  Quotations 

Based  on  Guide,  ch.20,  sec.  244-67. 

In  questions  with  similar  parts  (e.g.  1,  b)  answer 
the  part  "that  is  checked  (V)- 

1.    Give  the  information  and  the  reference  to  where  you 
can  find 

a.  the  name  of  the  author  of  the  poem  entitled  The 
•   jumblies. 

E.  Lear. 

Granger,   Edith.    Index   to   poetry   and   recitations. 
Rev.  ed.     p.  156. 

b.  the  author  and  title  of  the  poem  whose  first  line 
is : 

"Boot,  saddle,  to  horse  and  away!" 

V  "Three  fishers  went  sailing  away  to  the  West" 
Kingsley.    The  three  fishers. 

Granger,   Edith.      Index   to   poetry  and  recitations. 
Rev.  ed.    p.p6?. 

208 


APPENDIX  II:  SAMPLE  PROBLEM 

c.    the  title  of  a  rather  familiar  poem  by  "Father 

Ryan"  about  Robert  Lee's  sword. 
The  sword  of  Robert  Lee. 

Granger,   Edith.     Index   to   poetry   and   recitations. 
Rev.  ed.     p.  552. 

2.  a.    What  is  the  title  of  the  volume  of  Emerson's 

works  in  which  his  essay  on  culture  appears? 
Conduct  of  life. 

b.  Where  did  you  find  this  information? 

The  "A.L.A."   index   to  general   literature.   2d  ed. 
P-I47- 

c.  Give  the  call  number  of  the  book  containing  this 
essay  if  it  is  in  the  library. 

814 
Emjco 

3.  a.    Of  whom  was  it  written  ''Her  home  is  on  the 

deep?" 

V  that  he  had  a  "clasp  of  things  divine?" 
Chaucer 
b.    Give  author  and  title  of  the  poem  from  which 

the  above  words  were  taken,  and  a  reference  to 

the  collection  of  quotations  used. 
Bro^vning>  E.  B.    Vision  of  poets. 
Bartlett,  John.   Familiar  quotations.    loth  ed.     p.6$7. 

4.  Where  can  you  find 

a.  the  name  of  the  author  of  the  short-story  entitled 
On  trial  ? 

Firkins,  I.  T.  E.    Index  to  short  stories,     p.  251 

b.  (  1  )  References  to  books  and  periodicals  in  which 

Bret  Harte's  Tennessee's  partner  has  been 
published  ? 


209 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

(2)  Give  the  title  of  a  periodical  and  the  volume 
of  Bret  Harte's  short-stories  in  which  this 
has  been  published. 

Overland  monthly. 
Luck  of  Roaring  Camp. 

5.  a.    Give  a  reference  to  a  list  of  reviews  of  Lytton 

Strachey's  Queen  Victoria  published  in  1921. 
Book  review  digest,  1921.     p. 410-11. 

b.    Is  the  review  in  the  American  historical  review 

entirely  favorable? 
No. 

6.  a.    Where  is  there  a  list  of  ten  or  more  novels  pic- 

turing the  Spanish  American  war?    \/  the  reign 
of  Terror  in  France? 
Baker,  E.  A.    Guide  to  historical  fiction,     p. 282. 

b.    Give  the  author  and  title  of  one. 
Dickens,  Charles.  A  tale  of  tzvo  cities. 

7.  Answer  the  following  questions  and  also  give  ref- 
erences to  books  used. 

a.  Who  is  the  publisher  and  what  is  the  price  of  the 
edition  of  Gulliver's  travels  which  is  illustrated  by 
Louis  Rhead. 

Harper.   $1.50. 

U.  S.  catalog,  1912-17.    p. 1984. 

b.  Who  is  the  author  of  Athletes  all? 
W.  C.  Camp. 

U.    S.    catalog;   Supplement,   Jan.    ipi8-June    1921. 
p.  1 02. 


210 


APPENDIX  II:  SAMPLE  PROBLEM 

c.    Give  author  and  title  of  a  book  published  this 

year  on  auction  bridge. 

Wynne  Ferguson.    1922  rules  and  latvs  of  auction 
bridge. 
Cumulative  book  index,  Jan.  1922.     p. 2 5,1 50. 

8.  a.    Where  do  you  find  a  list  giving  brief  plot  of  the 

best  Scandinavian  novels  from  1800  to  the  pres- 
ent day? 

Baker,  E.  A.    Guide  to  the  best  fiction  in  English. 

New  ed.     p.6i2-i^. 

b.  How  many  novels  by  Bjornson  are  listed? 
//. 

c.  What  country  furnishes  the  setting  for  his  novel 
Synnove  Solbakken? 

Nonvay. 

9.  Give  reference  to  a  book  containing  a  group  of  quo- 
tations on 

a.  libraries 

Hoyt,  J.  K.  Cyclopedia  of  practical  quotations.  New 
ed.  p.344-45- 

b.  sunflowers 
p.245-4*- 

10.    Answer  the  following  questions  and  give  reference 
to  where  you  found  the  information, 
a.    In  what  city  is  the  periodical  entitled  "Printers' 

ink"  published  and  what  is  the  subscription? 
Nezv  York.   $3. 

Severance,  H.  O.  Guide  to  the  current  periodicals 
and  serials  of  the  United  States  and  Canada.  4th  ed. 
P-374- 

211 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Ayer,  N.  W.  and  Son.  American  newspaper  annual 
and  directory.     1922.     p.6p8. 

b.    What  is  the  name  of  its  present  editor,  and  what 

are  the  circulation  statistics? 
John  Irving  Romer.   18,345. 

Ayer,  N.  W.  and  Son.   American  newspaper  annual 
and  directory.     1922.     p. 698. 

11.  a.  Compare  Hoyt's  Cyclopedia  of  practical  quota- 
tions and  Bartlett's  Familiar  quotations  in  regard 
to  general  arrangement. 

Hoyt:  arranged  alphabetically  under  subject  of  quo- 
tation. 

Bartlett :  arranged  chronologically  under  author  of 

quotation. 

b.  Give  a  question  (and  page  reference  to  the  an- 
swer) which  can  be  more  easily  and  satisfactorily 
answered  from  the  collection  made  by  Hoyt. 

Where  are  there  a  number  of  quotations  on  various 

rivers  of  the  world?    p- 530-33. 


212 


INDEX 
NOTE.    The  numbers  refer  to  sections,  not  to  pages. 


A.L.A.  index,  257 

Abbreviations,  87;  filing  in 
card  catalog,  65 

Advertising,  345-46 

Aeronautics,  bibliography,  386 

Agricultural  index,  294 

Agriculture,  292-307;  director- 
ies, 311 

Allen.  Synonyms  and  anto- 
nyms, 126 

Allibone.  Critical  dictionary  of 
English  literature,  237 ;  Poet- 
ical quotations,  248;  Prose 
quotations,  249 

Almanacs,  113-18 

Alphabetizing,  card  catalog,  62- 
76 

Altitudes,  281 

American  anthology,   232 

history   and   encyclo- 
pedia of  music,  273 

library  association  in- 


dex, 257 

literature,  224,  226,  232, 


237-38 

—  natural  history,  287 

newspaper  annual,  266 

school  of  correspond- 
ence.    Cyclopaedia    of    com- 
merce, 337 

—  year  book,  191 


Ames.  Comprehensive  index 
tci  the  publications  of  the 
U.S.  government,  378. 

Analytical  cards,  50-52 

Animals,  see  Zoology 

Annual  cyclopedias,  113-18,  167, 
191 

magazine  subject-in- 
dex, IOO 

register,  115 


Anthologies,  228-33 
Appendix  of   a  book,  85 
Appleton's  annual  cyclopaedia, 

167 

cyclopaedia  of  Ameri- 
can biography,   138 
Architects,  directories,  341 
Architecture,  268-69 
Argentine  year  book,  194 
Armenia,  bibliography,  386 

Arrangement  of  cards  in  the 
catalog,  62-76 

Art,  268-75 

Associations,  catalog  cards,  61 

Athena,  366 

Atkinson.  Studies  of  Ameri- 
can fungi,  286 

Atlases,  148-54,  call  number, 
23,no.  14;  explanation  of  in- 
dex, 143. 


213 


INDEX 


Atlases,  agricultural,  298;  geo- 
logical, 279-80 ;  historical, 

171-75 

Australia  official  year  book,  194 
Author  cards,  29;  filing,  64-69; 
government,    57 ;    institution, 
58-60;  joint  authors,  48;  so- 
ciety, 61 

-  numbers,    19 
Automobile  engineering,  332 
Ayer.       American     newspaper 
annual,  266 

"B",  use  instead  of  classifica- 
tion number  for  biography, 

17 

Bailey.  Cyclopedia  of  Ameri- 
can agriculture,  292;  Stand- 
ard cyclopedia  of  horticul- 
ture, 293 

Baird's  manual  of  American 
college  fraternities,  367 

Baker.  Guide  to  historical  fic- 
tion, 259;  Guide  to  the  best 
fiction,  258 

Bankers'  blue  book,  347 

—  directory,  347 

—  encyclopedia,  348 

Banking,  347-48 

Bartholomew.  Advanced  at- 
las of  physical  and  political 
geography,  153  ;  Atlas  of  eco- 
nomic geography,  154 

Bartlett.     Familiar  quotations, 

245 
Bent.  Familiar  short  sayings, 

250 
Bible,  216;  concordance,  218; 

dictionary,  217 


Bibliography,  annotated,  384; 
arrangement,  388 ;  author, 
383 ;  call  number,  23,  no.  19 ; 
catalog  subject  card,  45,  69; 
comprehensive,  384;  defined, 
382 ;  distinguished  from  cata- 
log and  index,  389;  how  to 
find,  39094,  192;  how  to 
make,  395-99 ;  partial,  385-87 ; 
selected,  387 

Binding  department,  3 

Biography,  call  number,  23,  no. 
16-18,  23;  catalog  subject 
cards,  41-42,  69,  135;  classi- 
fication'of,  17;  classical,  176, 
178;  reference  books,  135-42 

Birds,  288-89 

Blanchard.  American  highway 
engineers'  handbook,  333 

Bliss  and  Binder.  New  en- 
cyclopedia of  social  reform, 
190 

Book,  parts  of,  77-86 

—  number,  21 

—  of  clays,  211 

-  prices,  264-65 

-  review  digest,  262 

-  reviews,    262-63.     Sec 
also  Magazine  indexes,  96-98, 
and  Collections  of  criticism, 
237-38 

Booklist,   263 

Books,  arrangement,  19-23 
Botany,  282-86,  293 
Bradstreet  company,  352 
Brand.       Popular     antiquities, 

212 


214 


INDEX 


Brewer,  D.  J.  World's  best 
essays,  236;  World's  best  or- 
ations, 235 

-  E.   C.     Dictionary  of 
phrase  and  fable,  241 ;  His- 
toric note-book,    164;   Read- 
er's handbook,  240 

British  science  guild.  Catalogue 
of  British  scientific  and  tech- 
nical books,  386 

Brockhaus'  konversations-lexi- 
kon,  112 

Brooklyn  Eagle  almanac,  118 

Browne.  Bibliography  of  Na- 
thaniel Hawthorne,  383 

Bryan.  Dictionary  of  painters, 
270 

Bryant.  New  library  of  poetry 
and  song,  230 

Bulletin  of  bibliography,  103, 
392 

Business,  337-59 

Butterfly  book,  290 

"C",  use  instead  of  classifica- 
tion number  for  college  pub- 
lications, 17,  23,no.<? 

Call  numbers,   19-23 

-  slips,  8,  32 

Cambridge   history  of   Ameri- 
can literature,  224 

history  of  English  lit- 
erature, 223 

modern  history,    161 


Canada  year  book,  194 
Capital     punishment,     bibliog- 
raphy, 388 

Card  catalog,  26-76;  filing,  62- 
76 


Card  catalog  index  of  experi- 
ment  station    literature,   296 
-    to    publica- 
tions of  the  U.S.  Department 
of  agriculture,  297 
Carman.    World's   best   poetry, 

228 

Catalog  distinguished  from 
bibliography,  389.  See  also 
Card  catalog 

—  department,  3 
Catholic  encyclopedia,  220 
Census  of  the  U.S.,  208 
Century    atlas    of    the    world, 
148 

-  cyclopedia   of   names, 

122 

dictionary,  122 

Chambers.  Book  of  days,  211 ; 
Cyclopaedia  of  English  liter- 
ature, 227 

Champlin.  Cyclopedia  of  paint- 
ers, 271 

Channing,  Hart,  and  Turner. 
Guide  to  American  history, 

387 

Chapman.  Handbook  of  birds, 
289 

Checklist  of  U.S.  public  docu- 
ments, 376 

Chemical  catalog  co.  Con- 
densed chemical  dictionary, 

277 
•  Chemistry,  276-77 

Chicago  daily  news  almanac, 
liS 

China  year  book,  194 

Chisholm.  Handbook  of  com- 
mercial geography,  146 


215 


INDEX 


Christy,  Proverbs,  maxims  and 
phrases,  253 

Circulation     department.     See 
Loan  department 

City  directories,  342 

Classical  antiquities,   176-79 

Classification,  definition,  9;  no- 
tation, 10;  systems,  11-18 

Clothing,  314-18 

College  library,  2-8 

publications,     catalog 

cards,  58-60 

Color  in  everyday  life,  313 

Commerce,  337-59,  192 
-  reports,   357 

Commercial  atlas  of  America, 
149 

—  atlas  of  foreign  coun- 
tries, 150 

—  geology,  279 
register'  of  the   U.S., 


339 
Compiler  card,  49 

Comprehensive  index,  379 

-  Ames,  378. 
Concordances,  256 
Congressional  directory,   196 

documents,  374-75 

— '• record,  203 

Consolidated   index,  380 
Constitutions,   160,   198-200 
Copyright  date,  79 
Costume,  315-18 
Crabb.       English     synonymes, 

127 

Grain's  market  data  book,  345 
Criticising  a  book,  90 


Criticism,  call  number,  23,no. 
8,10-11;  catalog  subject 
cards,  43-44,  69-70;  collec- 
tions, 237-38;  in  magazines, 
93 ;  indexes,  262-63.  See  also 
Magazine  indexes,  96-98 

Cross  reference  cards,  35-37; 
filing,  73 

Cumulative  book  index,  265 

Curiosities  of  popular  customs, 
210 

Current  events,  index,  168; 
magazines,  93 

Customs,  209-13 

Cutter  classification,  12 

— numbers,  19 

Cyclopedia  of  American  agri- 
culture, 292 

of  American  govern- 
ment, 187 

of  applied  electricity, 


331 


327 


227 


of    civil   engineering, 

of  engineering,  326 
of  English  literature, 


Daily  news  almanac,  118 
Dates,  Dictionaries  of,  164.  See 

also  Current  events 
Day.     Collacon,  251 
Debates  and  debating,  165,  100, 

193 

Decimal  classification,  14-18 
Departmental  libraries,  5 
Depository  libraries,  374 
Descriptive   catalogue  of   gov~ 

ernment  publications,  377 


216 


INDEX 


Desk  standard  dictionary,  124 

Dewey.  Decimal  classification, 
14-18 

Diccionario  enciclopedico  his- 
pano-americano,  112 

Dictionaries,  119-34 

Dictionary  card  catalog,  28 

of  medieval  ro- 
mance, 243 

—  of  national  biography, 

137 

— —  of  phrase  and  fable, 

241 

Directories,  agriculture,  311; 
architects,  341 ;  city,  342 ; 
education,  364-66 ;  govern- 
ment, 203-04;  home  econom- 
ics, 311;  magazines,  266-67; 
manufacturers,  338-41 ;  news- 
papers, 266;  publishers,  264- 
65,  341;  shippers,  338 

Directory  of  agricultural  and 
home  economics  leaders,  311 

1 of  directories,  344 

Document  catalogue,  379 

index,  380 

Dodd.  Modern  constitutions, 
198 

Domestic  economy,  308-24 

Doubleday,  Page  and  co.'s  geo- 
graphical manual,  151 

Drama  league,  392 

Dramatic  index,    103 

Dress,  315-18 

Droysen.  Allgemeiner  histor- 
ischer  handatlas,  175 

Dun's  mercantile  agency,  352 


Eberlein  and  McClure.  Prac- 
tical book  of  period  furni- 
ture, 320 

Eberlein,  McClure  and  Hollo- 
way.  Practical  book  of  in- 
terior decoration,  319 

Economics,   188-95 

Edition,  78;  call  number,  23, 
no.4,  21 ;  on  catalog  card,  54 

Editor  card,  49 

Edmund  and  Williams.  Toast- 
er's handbook,  255 

Education,  360-69;  directories, 
364-66 

Edwards.  Words,  facts  and 
phrases,  243 

Electricity,  331 

Encyclopedia  Americana,  in 

Encyclopaedia  Britannica,  109 

of  religion  and  ethics, 

214 

Encyclopedias,  108-18 

Engineering,  325-36 

index  annual,  335 

England,  see  Great  Britain 

English  literature,  223,  227, 
229,  233,  237-38 

— — -^ —  poets,  229 

• proverbs,  254 

Engravers,  270 

Essays,  236 

Evaluation  of   a  book,   90 

Expansive  classification,   12 

Experiment  station  record,  305 

Exporters'  encyclopaedia,  354 

"F",  use  instead  of  classifica- 
tion 'number  for  fiction,  17 


217 


INDEX 


Fact,  fancy  and  fable,  243 
Faiths  and  folklore,  213 
Familiar  quotations,  245 

—  short  sayings  of  great 
men,  250 

Farmers'  bulletin,  300 
Fernald.      English      synonyms, 

128 

Fiction,  classification,  17;  in- 
dexes, 258-60 ;  names,  240, 

243 

Filing,  see  Card  catalog 

Finance,   347~52 

Finch  and  Baker.  Geography 
of  the  world's  agriculture, 
298 

Fine  arts,  268-75 

Firkins.  Index  to  short  stor- 
ies, 260 

Fish.  Lincoln  bibliography, 
386 

Five  thousand  facts  and  fan- 
cies, 243 

Flowers,  282-83,  293 

Folio,  23,   footnote  8 

Foods,  321-24 

Foreign  commerce  and  navi- 
gation of  the  U.S.,  357 

Fowler.  Concise  Oxford  dic- 
tionary, 124 

Franklin.  Case  for  woman  suf- 
frage, 388 

Fraternities,  college,  367 

French  year  book,  194 

Frey.  Sobriquets  and  nick- 
names, 243 

Fugitive  facts,  243 

Fungi,  286 


Funk     and     Wagnalls.       New 

standard  dictionary,  121 
Furniture,  320 

Gannett.  Dictionary  of  alti- 
tudes in  the  U.S.,  281 

Gazetteer,  143-44 

Geography,  143-58 

Geologic  atlas  of  the  U.S.,  280 

Geology,  279-81 

Gillette.  Handbook  of  cost 
data,  333 

—  and  Dana.    Handbook 
of  mechanical  and  electrical 
cost  data,  333 

Glazebrook.    Dictionary  of  ap- 
plied physics,  278 
Government,   186-203 

—  city,  bibliography,  '388 
Government    documents,    cata- 
log cards,  57,  75 

-  state,    197, 
202 

-United 
States,    370-81 ;    guide,    371 ; 
indexes,  376-80 ;   agriculture, 
295-307,     commerce,     356-58, 
Congress,    106,    203 ;    educa- 
tion,   362-64,    368;    geology, 
279-81 ;  home  economics,  309, 
Indians,  183 ;  laws,  201 ;  sta- 
tistics, 207-08.  See  also  U.S. 
Superintendent      of       docu- 
ments.   Price  list 
Government  officials,  196 
La  grande  encyclopedic,  112 
Granger.     Index  to  poetry  and 
recitations,   261 


218 


INDEX 


Gray.  New  manual  of  botany, 
282 

Great  Britain,  almanacs,  115- 
17;  history,  180-81 ;  bibliog- 
raphy, 387 

Great  debates  in  American  his- 
tory, 165 

Greece,  ancient,   176-79 

Griffin.  Bibliography  of  Amer- 
ican historical  societies,  386 

Grocer's  encyclopedia,  323 

Gross.  Sources  and  literature 
of  English  history,  387 

Grove.  Dictionary  of  music, 
272 

Guide  books,  catalog  subject 
card,  143 

-  cards,  27 

—  to  current  periodicals, 
267 

to    historical    fiction, 

259 

—  to  the  best  fiction,  258 

to    U.S.    government 

publications,  371 

Handbooks,  engineering,  333 ; 
historical,  164;  literary,  239- 
43 

Handy-book  of  literary  curiosi- 
ties, 243 

Harmuth.  Dictionary  of  tex- 
tiles, 314 

Harper's  book  of  facts,  164 

dictionary   of    classi- 
cal literature  and  antiquities, 
176 


Harper's  encyclopaedia  of  U.S. 
history,  182 

Hastings.  Dictionary  of  the 
Bible,  217;  Encyclopedia  of 
religion  and  ethics,  214 

Haydn's  dictionary  of  dates, 
164 

Hazell's  annual,  116 

Hazlitt.  English  proverbs,  254; 
Faiths  and  folklore,  213 

Heading  in  card  catalog,  28 

Heilprin,  see  Lippincott's  new 
gazetteer,  144 

Hendricks'  commercial  regis- 
ter, 339 

Heroes  and  heroines  of  fiction, 

243 

History;  atlases,  171-75;  bibli- 
ographies, 159;  catalog  cards, 
40,  76;  reference  books,  159- 
84;  sources,  159,  165-69,  184 

for   ready   reference, 

160 

Hodge.  Handbook  of  Ameri- 
can Indians,  183 

Holland.  Butterfly  book,  290; 
Moth  book,  290 

Home  book  of  verse,  231 

economics,   308-24 

Hool.       Concrete       engineers' 

handbook,  333 
Hopkins.     Scientific  American 

cyclopedia   of    formulas,   312 
Hornaday.      American    natural 

history,  287 
Horticulture,  293 
Hough.  Handbook  of  the  trees, 

284  ' 


219 


INDEX 


Household   science,   see   Home 

economics 
Hoyt.     Cyclopedia  of  practical 

quotations,  246 
Hubbard.      American     history 

and    encyclopedia    of    music, 

273 
Hymns,  dictionary,  219 

Illustrator  card,  49 
Index  distinguished  from  bib- 
liography, 389 

generalis,  366 

of  a  book,  definition 

and  description,  86 

Indexes    to   general    literature, 

257 

Indian  year  book,  194 

Indians,  American,  183 

Industrial  arts  index,  104 

Interior  decoration,  313,  319-20 

Interlibrary  loans,  4 

International  index  to  period- 
icals, 99 

-  library  of  technology, 
328 

Introduction  of  a  book,  83 

Investments,  349-52 

Japan  year  book,  194 

Jewish   encyclopedia,   221 

Joint  author  card,  48 

Journal  of  agricultural  re- 
search, 304 

Judging  a  book,  90 

Julian.  Dictionary  of  hymnol- 
ogy,  219 


Kelly's  directory  of  merchants, 
338 

Kent.  Mechanical  engineers' 
pocket-book,  333 

Ketchum.  Structural  engineers' 
handbook,  333 

Kettleborough,  State  constitu- 
tions, 200 

Kretschmer.  Die  trachten  der 
volker,  317 

Lalor.  Cyclopaedia  of  political 
science,  188 

Language,  catalog  cards  for, 
40 

Lamed.  History  for  ready  ref- 
erence, 160;  Literature  of 
American  history,  383 

Larousse.  Grand  dictionnaire 
universel,  112 

Lathrop.  Rhymers'  lexicon,  133 

Laws,  198-202 

Lee.  See  Dictionary  of  na- 
tional biography,  137 

Libraries,  departmental,  5 ;  de- 
pository, 374 

Library,  college,  2-8 

of  American  litera- 
ture, 226 

of  Congress,  bibliog- 


raphies, 393 ;  classification, 
13;  printed  cards,  33-34;  se- 
lect list  of  references  on  cap- 
ital punishment,  388 

of   literary   criticism, 


238 


of    the    world's    best 


literature,  225 

regulations,  7 


220 


INDEX 


Lippincott's  biographical  dic- 
tionary, 136 

—  home  manuals,  310 
new  gazetteer,  144 

Literature,  cataloging  of,  40; 
reference  books,  222-67.  See 
also  Criticism 

Little.  Cyclopedia  of  classi- 
fied dates,  164 

Loan  department,  3,  8 

Loans,  interlibrary,  3 

Longfellow.  Cyclopaedia  of 
works  of  architecture,  269 

Loring.    Rhymers'  lexicon,  133 

Low  and  Pulling.  Dictionary 
of  English  history,  180 

Lyford.  Bibliography  of  home 
economics,  309 

Machinery's  encyclopedia,  330 

—  handbook  for  machine 
shop  and  drafting  room,  333 

McLaughlin  and  Hart.  Cyclo- 
pedia of  American  govern- 
ment, 187 

Magazine  indexes,  95-106;  ag- 
ricultural, 294 ;  engineering, 
104,  334-35 ;  suggestions 
about  the  use  of,  107 

subject-index,  100 

Magazines,  6,  92-107 ;  call  num- 
ber 23,  no.  13;  catalog  cards, 
46-47;  classification,  15;  di- 
rectories, 266-67,  345 ;  list  of 
standard,  93;  shelf  list  card, 
25 

Mallory's  statutes,  201 
Manufacturers,  338-41 


Maps,  143,  156-58;  subject  cat- 
alog card,  143 

March.  Thesaurus  dictionary, 
130 

Market  data  book,  345 

Markets,  306,  345 

Marks.  Mechanical  engineers' 
handbook,  333 

Mathews.  Field  book  of  Am- 
erican wild  flowers,  283 ; 
Field  book  of  American  trees 
and  shrubs,  283 

Mawson.  Geographical  manual, 
152;  Standard  thesaurus  of 
English  words  and  phrases, 
132 

Merriman.  American  civil  en- 
gineers' handbook,  333 

Mexican  year  book,  194 

Meyers  grosses  konversations- 
lexikon,  112 

Mill.     International  geography, 

145 

Miller.  Great  debates  in  Am- 
erican history,  165 

Minerva  jahrbuch,  366 

Modern  eloquence,  234 

shop  practice,  329 

Monroe.  Cyclopedia  of  educa- 
tion, 360 

Monthly  catalog  U.S.  public 
documents,  372 

record  of  current  edu- 
cational publications,  368 

Moody's  analyses  of  invest- 
ments, 349 

manual    of    railroads 

and     corporation     securities, 
351 


221 


INDEX 


Mosher.  More  toasts,  255 

Moth  book,  290 

Moulton.  Library  of  literary 
criticism,  238 

Mulhall.  Dictionary  of  statis- 
tics, 205 

Municipal  government,  388 

Munro.  Bibliography  of  mu- 
nicipal government,  388 

Murray.  New  English  diction- 
ary, 123 

Mushrooms,  286 

Music,  272-75 

Mythology,  136,  176-79 

National  cyclopaedia  of  Ameri- 
can biography,  139 
New  encyclopedia  of  social  re- 
form, 190 

English     dictionary, 
123 

-  Hazell  annual,  116 

international  diction- 
ary,  1 20 

international  encyclo- 


paedia,  no 
international 


year 
book,   114 

-  library  of  poetry  and 
song,  230 

-  Schaff-Herzog  encyc- 
lopedia   of    religious   knowl- 
edge, 215 

-  South   Wales   official 
year  book,     194 

standard     dictionary, 


121 


New     York     Public     Library. 

Armenia  and  the  Armenians, 

386 

York     Times     index, 

168 
Zealand   official   year 

book,   194 

Newfoundland  year  book,  194 
Newspapers,  directories,  266 
Newton.     Dictionary  of  birds, 

288 

Noted  names  of  fiction,  243 
Nuova     enciclopedia     italiana, 

112 

Official  guide  of  the  railways, 

353 

Orations,  234-35 
Order  department,  3 
Oxford  dictionary,  123 

Painting,   270-71 

Palgrave.  Dictionary  of  po- 
litical economy,  189 

Pamphlets,  catalog  cards,  55 

Patterson's  American  educa- 
tional directory,  365 

Peck.  Harper's  dictionary  of 
classical  literature  and  anti- 
quities, 176 

Peele.  Mining  engineers'  hand- 
book, 333 

Fender.  Handbook  for  elec- 
trical engineers,  333 

Periodicals,  see  Magazines 

Philosophy,   bibliography,   383 

Phyfe.  Five  thousand  facts 
and  fancies,  243 

Physics,  278 


222 


INDEX 


Place,  arrangement  of  catalog 
cards,  74~75 

Planche.  Cyclopaedia  of  cos- 
tume, 316 

Ploetz.  Manual  of  universal 
history,  162 

Poetry,  collections,  228-33;  in- 
dex, 261 

Political  economy,  see  Econom- 
ics 
science,  187-88 

Polk.  Directory  of  director- 
ies, 344 

Poole.    Historical  atlas,  173 

Poole's  index,  96-97 

Poore.  Descriptive  catalogue  of 
the  government  publications 
of  the  U.S.,  376 

Poor's  manual  of  the  railroads, 
350 

Popular  antiquities,  212 

Practical  book  of  interior  dec- 
oration, 319 

—  book  of  period  furni- 
ture, 320 

Preface  of  a  book,  80 

Price  list,  see  U.S.  Superin- 
tendent of  documents 

Proverbs,  253-54 

Public  affairs  information  ser- 
vice. Bulletin,  192 

-  documents,  see  Gov- 
ernment documents ;  U.S. 
public  documents 

Publishers,  directories,  264-65 

Putnam.  Tabular  views  of  uni- 
versal history,  163 


Quarto,  23,  footnote  8 
Quotations,  244-55 

Racinet.      Le    costume  'histor- 
ique,  318 

Railroads,  350-51,  353     ' 

Rand.     Bibliography  of  philos- 
ophy, 383 

-  McNally.  Bankers' 
directory,  347 ;  Commercial 
atlas  of  America,  149;  Com- 
mercial atlas  of  foreign 
countries,  150 

Readers'  guide,  98 

-   supplement, 
99 

Reader's  handbook  of  famous 
names,  240 

Reading,  suggestions,  6 

Reddall.  Fact,  fancy  and  fable, 
243 

Reed.     Modern  eloquence,  234 

Reference  books,  6,  88-91 
—  department,  3,  8  • 

Register    of    American    manu- 
facturers, 340 

Regulations,  see  Library  regu- 
lations 

Religion,  214-21 ;  bibliography, 
386 

Reserve  books,  8 

Reviews    of   books,   see    Book 
reviews 

Rhyming  dictionaries,  133-34 

Richardson.     Alphabetical  sub- 
ject index  to  religion,  386 

Riemann.    Dictionary  of  music, 
275 


223 


INDEX 


Rogers.    Tree  book,  285 
Roget.     Thesaurus  of  English 

words  and  phrases,  131 
Rome,  ancient,  176-79 
Rules,  see  Library  regulations 
Russian  year  book,  194 

Sandys.  Companion  to  Latin 
studies,  179 

Schaff.  New  Schaff-Herzog 
encyclopedia  of  religious 
knowledge,  215 

Science,  276-91 ;  bibliography, 
386 

Scientific  American  cyclopedia 
of  formulas,  312 

Scope  of  a  book,  oo 

"See  also"  card,  37;  filing,  73 

"See"  card,  35-36 

Serial  number,  375;  how  to 
find,  381 

set,  374-75 ;  indexes, 

376-80 

Series  card,  53 

Severance.  Guide  to  current 
periodicals,  267 

Shearer.  List  of  documentary 
material,  386 

Shelf  list,  25 

Shelving,  19-24 

Shepherd.    Historical  atlas,  172 

Sherman.    Food  products,  321 

Shippers,   directory,  338 

"Shipping  world"  yearbook,  355 

Short  stories,  index,  260 

Slater.  Robert  Louis  Steven- 
son, 383 

Smith,  J.  R.  World's  food  re- 
sources, 322 


Smith,  W.  Dictionary  of  Greek 
and  Roman  antiquities,  177; 
Dictionary  of  Greek  and 
Roman  biography  and  myth- 
ology, 178 

Sobriquets  and  nicknames,  243 

Societies,  catalog  cards,  61 

Sociology,  185-213 

Soule.  Dictionary  of  English 
synonymes,  129 

Sources,  historical,  159,  165- 
69,  184 

South  African  year  book,  194 

American  year  book, 

194 

Special  libraries,  392 

Spence.  Dictionary  of  medie- 
val romance,  243 

Standard   cyclopedia   of   horti- 
culture, 293 
dictionary,  121 

handbook  for  electri- 
cal engineers,  333 

— thesaurus,  132 


State     constitutional     conven- 
tions, bibliography,  386 

constitutions,  200 

State  laws,  202 

State  manuals,  197 
Statesman's  year-book,   186 
Statistical  abstract  of  the  U.S., 

207 

Statistics,  204-08 
Stedman.  American  anthology, 

232;  Victorian  anthology,  233 

and  Hutchinson.     Li- 
brary of  American  literature, 
226 


224 


INDEX 


Stephen.  See  Dictionary  of  na- 
tional biography,  137 

Stevenson.  Home  book  of 
verse,  231 

Stieler.  Atlas  of  modern  geog- 
raphy, 151 

Stories,  see  Fiction,  Short 
stories 

Sturgis.  Dictionary  of  archi- 
tecture, 268 

Subject  card,  31;  filing,  69-76; 
headings,  38-46 

Survey    of    current    business, 

357 

Swan.  Dictionary  of  contem- 
porary quotations,  252 

Swanton.  Guide  to  U.S.  gov- 
ernment publications,  371 

Synonym  dictionaries,  125-32 

Table  of  contents  in  a  book,  81 

Tabular  views  of  universal  his- 
tory, 163 

Telephone  directories,  342 

Textiles,  314 

Thesaurus  of  English  words 
and  phrases,  131 

Thomas'  register  of  American 
manufacturers,  340 

Thomas.  Universal  pronounc- 
ing dictionary  of  biography, 
136 

Thompson.  Directory  of  mail- 
ing lists,  342 

Thornev      Fugitive    facts,    243 

Thorpe.  Dictionary  of  applied 
chemistry,  276 


Title  card,  30;  filing,  63,  72,  74- 

75 
Title-page,  78 

Toaster's  handbook,  255 
Trade  bibliographies,  264-65 
Translation,    call    number,    23, 

no.  12,  15 

Translator  card,  49    • 
Trautwine.       Civil     engineer's 

pocket-book,  333 
Travel   books,    catalog   subject 

card,   143 
Trees,  284-85 

United  States.  Advisory  com- 
mittee for  aeronautics.  Bib- 
liography of  aeronautics,  386 

Agriculture  dept.  Bul- 
letin, 301 ;  Card  index  of  ex- 
periment station  literature, 
296;  Card  index  to  publica- 
tions of  the  U.S.  Dept.  of 
agriculture,  297;  Department 
circular,  302;  Experiment 
station  record,  305 ;  Farmers' 
bulletin,  300 ;  Journal  of  ag- 
ricultural research,  304 ; 
Market  reporter,  306 ; 
Monthly  crop  reporter,  306; 
Monthly  list  of  publications, 
307;  National  weather  and 
crop  bulletin,  306;  Office  of 
the  secretary  circular,  303; 
Weather,  crops  and  markets, 
306;  Yearbook,  299 
-  almanacs,  118 

catalog,  264 


225 


INDEX 


United  States.  Census  bureau. 
Census  of  the  United  States, 
208 

compiled  statutes,  201 

-  Congress.       Congres- 
sional   record,    203;    Official 
Congressional  directory,    196 
Education    bureau. 


Annual  report,  362;  Bulletin, 
363 ;  Educational  directory, 
364;  Monthly  record  of  cur- 
rent educational  publipations, 
368 

Foreign  and  domestic 


commerce  bureau.  Com- 
merce reports,  357;  Foreign 
commerce  and  navigation  of 
the  U.S.,  357;  Statistical  ab- 
stract, 207;  Survey  of  cur- 
rent business,  357 

Geological    survey. 


Geologic  atlas  of  the  United 
States,  280 ;  Topographic 
sheets,  156;  World  atlas  of 
commercial  geology,  279 

United  States,  history,  165-69, 
182-84 ;  bibliographies,  383, 
386-87 

Interstate  commerce 

commission.  Annual  report, 

359 

—  laws,  statutes,  etc.,  201 
Library  of  Congress, 


see  Library  of  Congress 

Post     office     depart- 


ment.   Rural  delivery  county 
maps,  157 
public  documents,  370- 


United  States.  Superintendent 
of  documents.  Catalogue  of 
the  public  documents,  379; 
Checklist  of  United  States 
public  documents,  376 ;  Index 
to  the  reports  and  docu- 
ments, 380,  Monthly  cata- 
logue, 372 

-  Price       list, 

3735  agriculture,  307;  com- 
merce, 359 ;  economics,  195 ; 
education,  369 ;  engineering, 
336;  geography,  147;  history, 
169;  home  economics,  324; 
law,  195 ;  maps,  158 ;  political 
science,  195 ;  science,  291 ; 
sociology,  195 

University  library,  2-8 

musical  encyclopedia, 


274 


publications,    catalog 


8l 


cards,  58-60 

Victorian  anthology,  233 

year  book,   194 

Walker.  Rhyming  dictionary, 
134 

Walsh.  Curiosities  of  popular 
customs,  210 ;  Handy-book 
of  literary  curiosities,  243 ; 
Heroes  and  heroines  of  fic- 
tion, 243;  International  en- 
cyclopedia of  quotations,  247. 

Ward,  A.  Encyclopedia  of 
foods  and  beverages,  323 

T.  H.  English  poets, 

229 


226 


INDEX 


Warner.  Library  of  the  world's 
best  literature,  225 

Watson.       Encyclopaedia     and 
dictionary  of  education,  361 

Weather,    crops    and   markets, 
306 

Webb.    New  dictionary  of  sta- 
tistics, 206 

Webster.      New     international 
dictionary,  120 

Webster's  collegiate  dictionary, 
124 

Weinberg.     Color  in  everyday 
life,  313 

Wheeler.    Noted  names  of  fic- 
tion, 243 

-  Who  wrote  it?    243 

Whibley.    Companion  to  Greek- 
studies,   179 

Whitaker.    Almanac,  117 
Who  was  who,  140 

wrote  it?  243 

Who's  who,  140 


Wilson.     Debaters'     handbook 
series,    193 ;    Study   outlines, 

393 
Winston.  Simplified  dictionary, 

124 
Woman  suffrage,  bibliography, 

388 

Words,  facts  and  phrases,  243 
Work  mark,  20 
World  almanac,  118 

atlas    of    commercial 

geology,  279 

World's  best  essays,  236 

literature, 

225 


in   America, 


141 


—  orations,  235 

—  poetry,  228 

World's  food  resources,  322 
Wright.     Constitutions   of   the 

states  at  war,  199 

Year  books  for  various  coun- 
tries, 194 

Young.  Analytical  concordance 
to  the  Bible,  218 

Zoology,  287-90 


227 


~7f\r-       ,     "  il        I! 


I 


I1 

i  i 


lit  p 


